07 2016 Landscape Contractor Tender Document

Stage25Landscape&Irrigation
Construction&MaintenanceWorks

TENDERNO:07/2016

Tenderclose:
3:00pm(WST),16November2016
TendertobelodgedintheTenderBoxlocatedat:
TamalaParkRegionalCouncil,Unit2,369ScarboroughBeachRoad,Innaloo
Tendersreceivedafterthetimespecifiedforclosingwillnotbeaccepted
PRINCIPAL
SATTERLEY PROPERTY GROUP/TAMALA PARK REGIONAL COUNCIL
PROJECT
CATALINA BEACH ESTATE
MINDARIE, WA
SPECIFICATION AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT FOR

STAGE 25 - STREETSCAPE
LANDSCAPE & IRRIGATION CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE WORKS
CONTRACT NUMBER
CB-01
DATE
OCTOBER 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION A: TENDER & CONTRACT CONDITIONS...................9
1 CONDITIONS OF TENDERING .................................................................................................. 11
1.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2 TENDER DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH TENDER................................................................................................................................................... 12
1.4 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.5 INTERPRETATION....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.6 ADDENDA..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.7 TENDERING ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14
1.8 LODGEMENT OF TENDERS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.9 EVALUATION PROCESS ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
1.10 SELECTION CRITERIA ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
1.11 TENDER VALIDITY PERIOD AND AWARD OF CONTRACT..................................................................................................................................... 17
1.12 PROPERTY IN THIS TENDER DOCUMENT .............................................................................................................................................................. 17
1.13 CONTENTS OF TENDER ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
1.14 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.15 COMPLETION OF TENDER ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
1.16 CONFORMING AND ALTERNATIVE TENDERS ........................................................................................................................................................ 17
1.17 LUMP SUM CONTRACT .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
1.18 SCHEDULE OF RATES ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.19 PROVISIONAL SUMS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
1.20 QUANTITIES ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
1.21 GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (GST).......................................................................................................................................................................... 18
1.22 TIME FOR COMPLETION ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
1.23 PROJECT TIMELINE.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
1.24 CONTRACT STAGING/SEPARABLE PORTIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
1.25 INDICATIVE PROJECT TIMELINE .............................................................................................................................................................................. 19
1.26 TENDERERS WARRANTIES ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
1.27 INSPECTION OF THE SITE AND CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
1.28 TENDERERS ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 20
1.29 RESERVATION OF THE SUPERINTENDENTS/PRINCIPALS RIGHTS .................................................................................................................. 20
1.30 FORM OF AGREEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
1.31 B.C.I.T.F LEVY ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
1.32 SITE STABILISATION .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
1.33 GROUND WATER LEVEL............................................................................................................................................................................................ 21
1.34 OTHER CONTRACTS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
1.35 NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS AND/OR SUPPLIERS ..................................................................................................................................... 21
1.36 SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS AND MAJOR SUPPLIERS .......................................................................................................................... 21
1.37 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY PRINCIPAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.38 SAFETY STANDARDS AND PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................................................................. 22
1.39 LETTER OF CAPACITY AND BANK REFERENCE .................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.40 EXTENSIONS OF TIME DURING TENDER PERIOD ................................................................................................................................................. 22
1.41 PROVISION OF FURTHER INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.42 CODE OF PRACTICE .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
1.43 CONFIDENTIALITY ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.44 DISCLOSURE OF CONTRACT INFORMATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 23
1.45 IDENTITY OF THE TENDERER .................................................................................................................................................................................. 23
1.46 JOINT TENDERS ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
1.47 REGISTRATION OR LICENSING OF CONTRACTORS ............................................................................................................................................ 23
1.48 ASSIGNMENT OF TENDER ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 23
1.49 COMMUNICATIONS WITH SUPERINTENDENT AND THE PRINCIPAL .................................................................................................................. 23
1.50 ABSENCE OF OBLIGATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
2 FORM OF TENDER .................................................................................................................... 25

2.1 AUSTRALIAN STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING AND FORM OF TENDER AS 2124 - 1992 ............................................... 25
2.2 TENDER FORM - AS 2124 - 1992 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 27
3 TENDER SCHEDULES ............................................................................................................... 29

3.1 SUMMARY OF TENDER PRICES: .............................................................................................................................................................................. 29
3.2 SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS AND MAJOR SUPPLIERS: ......................................................................................................................... 31
3.3 SCHEDULE OF DAY WORKS LABOUR RATES: ....................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.4 SCHEDULE OF PLANT HIRE RATES: ........................................................................................................................................................................ 35
3.5 LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION: ................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

SPECIFICATION CATALINA BEACH STAGE 25 Contract CB-01 1
4 IRRIGATION................................................................................................................................ 56
4.1 IRRIGATION BORE: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 56
4.2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM: ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 57
4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM SCHEDULE OF RATES: ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
4.9 MAINTENANCE: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 70
4.10 MAINTENANCE: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 71
4.11 MAINTENANCE: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 72
4.12 MAINTENANCE: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 73
4.13 MAINTENANCE: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 74
4.14 MAINTENANCE: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 75
4.15 SCHEDULE OF TENDERERS EXPERIENCE............................................................................................................................................................ 76
5 ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART A ..................................................................................... 77

6 ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART B ..................................................................................... 79
7 AUSTRALIAN STANDARD FORM OF FORMAL INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT ................. 81
SECTION B PRELIMINARIES ................82
8 PRELIMINARIES......................................................................................................................... 83
8.1 GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 83
8.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 83
8.3 CO-OPERATION .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 83
8.4 CASH FLOW SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 83
8.5 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 83
8.6 NOTIFICATION OF VARIATIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 83
8.7 STAGING AND CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMMES ................................................................................................................................................... 83
8.8 EXTENSION OF TIME ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 83
8.9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 84
8.10 WORKING HOURS AND DAYS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
8.11 MEETINGS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
8.12 SITE AND PUBLIC SECURITY .................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
8.13 CONTRACTORS SITE FACILITIES ............................................................................................................................................................................ 84
8.14 SANITATION ON WORKS SITE .................................................................................................................................................................................. 85
8.15 SITE SIGNBOARDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
8.16 ADVERTISING.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 85
8.17 CONTOURS AND LEVELS .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
8.18 STRUCTURAL DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR .............................................................................................................................................................. 85
8.19 STRUCTURAL DESIGN BY PRINCIPAL ..................................................................................................................................................................... 85
8.20 SHOP DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
8.21 TEMPORARY WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 85
8.22 BUILDING LICENCE/PERMIT APPLICATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 86
8.23 CERTIFICATION BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ....................................................................................................................................................... 86
8.24 AS-CONSTRUCTED SURVEY .................................................................................................................................................................................... 86
8.25 EXISTING SERVICES .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
8.26 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 86
8.27 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 87
8.28 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY ........................................................................................................................................................... 87
8.29 SAFETY PLAN.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
8.30 THE SITE CIVIL PROTECTION/ADJACENT WORKS ............................................................................................................................................. 88
8.31 ADVISORY NOTICES .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 88
8.32 PROCEDURE FOLLOWING DUST RELATED COMPLAINT ..................................................................................................................................... 88
8.33 DILAPIDATION SURVEYS........................................................................................................................................................................................... 89
8.34 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 89
8.35 POLLUTION AND ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 89
8.36 DUST AND WIND BLOWN SAND ............................................................................................................................................................................... 90
8.37 CHEMICAL INFORMATION ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 91
8.38 CLEAN-UP OF POLLUTION ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 91
8.39 INCLEMENT WEATHER .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
8.40 LOCAL AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 92
8.41 INDUSTRIAL AWARDS, DISPUTES AND PAYMENTS .............................................................................................................................................. 92
SECTION C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................93

9 GENERALLY............................................................................................................................... 95

9.1 LOCATION OF WORKS AND ACCESS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 95
9.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS......................................................................................................................................................................................... 95
9.3 WORKS BY OTHERS................................................................................................................................................................................................... 95
9.4 NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS / SUPPLIERS .................................................................................................................................................. 96
9.5 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY PRINCIPAL..................................................................................................................................................................... 96
9.7 AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY AND DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................................................................... 97
9.8 STAGING AND PROGRAMME .................................................................................................................................................................................... 97
9.9 LIMITATIONS ON ACCESS ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 97
9.10 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 98
10 SITEWORKS, SETOUT AND EARTHWORKS ........................................................................... 99

10.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
10.2 STANDARDS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 99
10.3 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FENCE.......................................................................................................................................................................... 99
10.4 DUST, NOISE, VIBRATION AND OTHER ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS ............................................................................................................. 99
10.5 WORK NEAR EXISTING TREES ................................................................................................................................................................................. 99
10.6 RETENTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION ............................................................................................................................................................... 100
10.7 CLEARING AROUND EXISTING TREES TO BE RETAINED .................................................................................................................................. 100
10.8 VEGETATION REMOVAL .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 101
10.9 WEED ERADICATION................................................................................................................................................................................................ 101
10.10 STAGING OF VEGETATION REMOVAL................................................................................................................................................................... 101
10.11 TRANSPLANT RELOCATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 101
10.12 SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND INSPECTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 101
10.13 PROTECTION OF SURVEY STATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................... 102
10.14 PROJECT SURVEYOR .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 102
10.15 LEVELS AND ALIGNMENT........................................................................................................................................................................................ 102
10.16 CLEARING .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 102
10.17 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 103
10.18 BULK EARTHWORKS ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 103
10.19 FINAL MINOR TRIM ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 103
10.20 EARTHWORKS - GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................................................................. 103
10.21 NOTICE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 103
10.22 ROCK EXCAVATION ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 103
10.23 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL .............................................................................................................................................................. 103
10.24 EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 104
10.25 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 104
10.26 FILLING AND RESPREADING .................................................................................................................................................................................. 104
10.27 GEOTECHNICAL TESTING ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 105
10.28 DISPOSAL OF APPROVED SURPLUS SPOIL ON SITE ......................................................................................................................................... 106
10.29 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL AND RUBBISH OFFSITE ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
10.30 MINOR GRADING AND TRIMMING .......................................................................................................................................................................... 106
10.31 MATCHING UP ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 106
10.32 FINAL PRESENTATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 106
10.33 HYDROMULCHING .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 106
10.34 AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY OF EARTHWORKS ................................................................................................................................................. 106
11 TIMBER WORK......................................................................................................................... 107

11.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
11.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 107
11.3 TIMBER....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
11.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT ................................................................................................................................................................................. 107
11.5 TREATMENT OF CUT ENDS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
11.6 TIMBER FIXINGS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
11.7 FINISHING: STAINS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 108
11.8 FINISHING: OIL .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
11.9 SAMPLES ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
11.10 TIMBER BOLLARDS STAINED BLACK .................................................................................................................................................................... 108
12 METALWORK ........................................................................................................................... 109

12.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 109
12.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 109
12.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 110
12.4 SITE MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 110
12.5 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 110
12.6 DISSIMILAR METALS (GALVANIC POTENTIAL) ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
12.7 FABRICATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 111
12.8 WELDING ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112
12.9 FASTENINGS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 112
12.10 BOLTS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 112
12.11 COLD FORMED STEELWORK.................................................................................................................................................................................. 112
12.12 GALVANISING............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 113
12.13 REPAIR TO DAMAGED FINISHES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 113
12.14 FINISH ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 114
12.15 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 114

12.16 PAINT PREPARATION .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 115
12.17 PAINTING METHODS ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 115
12.18 SITE PAINTING .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 115
12.19 TESTING..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 116
12.20 INSTALLATION OF HANDRAILS/BALUSTRADES ................................................................................................................................................... 116
12.21 ERECTION.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 116
12.22 SECURITY DURING ERECTION ............................................................................................................................................................................... 116
12.23 HOLLOW SECTION CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................................................................................................... 116
12.24 INSPECTION AND TESTING..................................................................................................................................................................................... 116
12.25 TEMPORARY WORKS .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
12.26 ERECTION TOLERANCES ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 117
12.27 GROUTING ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
12.28 SITE MODIFICATIONS .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
13 SEGMENTAL AND STONE PEDESTRIAN PAVING (NOT USED) .......................................... 119

14 CRUSHED STONE/AGGREGATE HARDSTAND (NOTE USED) ............................................ 120
14.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
14.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 120
14.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 120
14.4 SAMPLES ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
14.5 CRUSHED STONE/AGGREGATE HARDSTAND ..................................................................................................................................................... 120
14.6 POROUS RESIN BOUND AGGREGATE PAVING ................................................................................................................................................... 122
14.7 COMPLETION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 122
14.8 TESTING..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 123
14.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR HARDSTAND ......................................................................................................................................................... 123
15 SEGMENTAL ROAD PAVING (NOT USED) ............................................................................ 125

16 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (ASPHALT) PAVEMENT (NOT USED) ........................................ 127
17 LIMESTONE AND RECONSTITUTED BLOCKWORK ............................................................. 129
17.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 129
17.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 129
17.3 BLOCKS...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 129
17.4 MORTARS .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 130
17.5 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 130
17.6 COURSING AND BOND ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 131
17.7 JOINTS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 131
17.8 SAMPLES ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 131
17.9 FOOTINGS TO LIMESTONE WALLS AND PIERS ................................................................................................................................................... 131
17.10 REINFORCEMENT TO LIMESTONE WALLS, PIERS AND FOOTINGS ................................................................................................................. 131
17.11 CLEANING .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 131
17.12 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK ........................................................................................................................................................................ 131
17.13 GRAFFITI PROTECTION ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 131
17.14 DAMP COURSE ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 131
18 INSITU CONCRETE .................................................................................................................. 133

18.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 133
18.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 133
18.3 INSITU CONCRETE FOOTINGS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 133
18.4 INSITU CONCRETE PAVING(FLATWORK) - STANDARD ...................................................................................................................................... 135
18.5 INSITU CONCRETE PAVING (FLATWORK) EXPOSED/WASHED AGGREGATE .............................................................................................. 137
18.6 INSITU CONCRETE MOWING KERBS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 138
18.7 SHOTCRETE / BLINDING TO WATERCOURSES & LAKE EDGES ........................................................................................................................ 138
19 CONCRETE AND BRICK MASONRY ...................................................................................... 141

19.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 141
19.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 141
19.3 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 141
19.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION ................................................................................................................................................................... 142
19.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................................................................................................................. 142
19.6 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 142
19.7 CO-ORDINATION ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 142
19.8 PRODUCTS / MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 143
19.9 MORTAR..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
19.10 DAMP-PROOF COURSE ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
19.11 FLASHINGS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 143
19.12 TERMITE PROTECTION ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
19.13 SLIP JOINTS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
19.14 WALL TIES ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
19.15 JOINT REINFORCEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 144

19.16 LINTELS AND ARCH BARS....................................................................................................................................................................................... 144
19.17 ANCHORAGES .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 144
19.18 MORTAR JOINTS....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 144
19.19 WEEPHOLES ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
19.20 PROVISION FOR TIMBER SHRINKAGE .................................................................................................................................................................. 144
19.21 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED MASONRY CONSTRUCTION (EXCLUDING RETAINING WALLS).................................. 145
19.22 MASONRY UNITS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 146
19.23 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 146
19.24 CEMENT ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 147
19.25 MASONRY CEMENT.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 147
19.26 LIME ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 147
19.27 WATER THICKENER ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 147
19.28 SAND .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 147
19.29 CONCRETE GROUT .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 147
19.30 JOINT MATERIAL....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 147
19.31 DAMP PROOF COURSE ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 147
19.32 FLASHINGS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 148
19.33 TERMITE BARRIERS CONSISTING OF WOVEN STAINLESS STEEL MESH ....................................................................................................... 148
19.34 TERMITE BARRIER PARGING MATERIAL FOR WOVEN STAINLESS STEEL MESH ......................................................................................... 148
19.35 TERMITE BARRIERS CONSISTING OF COMPOSITE FIBRE BLANKET AND PLASTIC MEMBRANE WITH TERMITICIDE IMPREGNATION 148
19.36 SLIP JOINT MATERIAL .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 149
19.37 WALL TIES ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 149
19.38 STEEL LINTELS AND ARCH BARS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 149
19.39 REINFORCED CONCRETE LINTELS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 150
19.40 REINFORCED HOLLOW MASONRY LINTELS ........................................................................................................................................................ 150
19.41 REINFORCED MASONRY BED JOINT LINTELS ..................................................................................................................................................... 150
19.42 ANCHORAGES .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 150
19.43 ACOUSTIC ISOLATION TIES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 150
19.44 JOINT REINFORCEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
19.45 STEEL MULLIONS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
19.46 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
19.47 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
19.48 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 152
19.49 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 152
20 STABILISED / RAMMED EARTH WALLS (NOT USED).......................................................... 155

21 LAKES AND HYDRAULICS (NOT USED)................................................................................ 157
22 WATER FEATURES (NOT USED) ........................................................................................... 159
23 STREET FURNITURE AND PLAY EQUIPMENT ..................................................................... 161
23.1 PLAY EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 161
23.2 PLAY EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SAFETY AUDIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 161
23.3 PLAYGROUND SANDPIT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 161
23.4 PLAYGROUND RUBBER SOFTFALL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 161
23.5 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 162
23.6 LAYING ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 162
23.7 STREET FURNITURE ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 162
23.8 AFL GOAL POSTS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 163
23.9 PICNIC SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 163
23.10 BENCH SEATING....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 163
23.11 DRINKING FOUNTAINS ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 164
23.12 RUBBISH BINS........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 164
23.13 BOLLARDS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 164
23.14 FITTNESS EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 164
23.15 WINDSOCKS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 164
24 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS ..................................................................................................... 165

24.1 GRAFFITI COATING ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 165
24.2 COMPOSITE TIMBER ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 165
24.3 WINDBREAK FENCE ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 165
24.4 LIMESTONE BOULDERS .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 165
24.5 GEOTEXTILE ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 165
24.6 PAINTING ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 165
25 SOFT LANDSCAPE WORKS ................................................................................................... 167

25.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 167
25.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 167
25.3 SOIL CONDITIONER.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 167
25.4 PLANT SUPPLY ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
25.5 PLANTING GENERALLY ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 170
25.6 DEPTH OF PLANTING ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 171

25.7 PLANT PLACEMENT ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 171
25.8 MULCHING ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 172
25.9 MULCHING SHREDDED PINE BARK .................................................................................................................................................................... 175
25.10 ADVANCED TREE PLANTING / MATURE TREE TRANSPLANTING ..................................................................................................................... 175
25.11 TURF INSTANT ROLL-ON ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 176
25.12 GRASS SEEDING & STOLONS ................................................................................................................................................................................ 178
25.13 NATIVE SEEDING ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 180
25.14 EXISTING TREES TO BE RETAINED ....................................................................................................................................................................... 180
25.15 ARBORIST REPORT.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 181
25.16 CLEARING AROUND EXISTING TREES .................................................................................................................................................................. 181
25.17 TREE AND STUMP REMOVAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 181
25.18 ROOT CONTROL BARRIERS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 181
26 PROJECT CONSOLIDATION ................................................................................................... 183

26.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 183
26.2 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 183
26.3 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 183
26.4 CONSOLIDATION PROGRAMME AND LOG BOOK ................................................................................................................................................ 183
26.5 PLACING OF WORKS ON CONSOLIDATION .......................................................................................................................................................... 183
26.6 EXTENT OF CONSOLIDATION ................................................................................................................................................................................. 183
26.7 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 183
26.8 PUMPS, BORES AND ELECTRICS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 184
26.9 IRRIGATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 184
26.10 BORE METER READINGS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 184
26.11 CARE OF WORK AND REINSTATEMENT OF DAMAGE ........................................................................................................................................ 185
26.12 HANDOVER ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 185
SECTION D MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATION...............187

27 MAINTENANCE - GENERAL.................................................................................................... 189
27.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 189
27.2 LANDSCAPE DESIGN OBJECTIVES........................................................................................................................................................................ 189
27.3 MAINTENANCE PERIOD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 190
27.4 SITE ACCESS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 190
27.5 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 190
27.6 APPENDIX A TENDER SCHEDULE: MAINTENANCE PERIOD YEAR 1 ............................................................................................................. 191
27.7 APPENDIX B TENDER SCHEDULE: MAINTENANCE PERIOD YEAR 2 ............................................................................................................. 193
27.8 APPENDIX C SCHEDULE OF RATES ................................................................................................................................................................... 195
27.9 QUALITY OF GOODS AND WORKMANSHIP .......................................................................................................................................................... 197
27.10 INSURANCES ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 197
27.11 EMPLOYMENT AWARDS .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 197
27.12 PERSONNEL .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 197
27.13 VARIATIONS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 197
27.14 PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 197
27.15 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 197
27.16 INSPECTIONS............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 197
27.17 CLEAN UP AND FINISHING ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 197
27.18 FINAL CERTIFICATE ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 198
27.19 LANDSCAPE REPORTS AND LOG BOOKS ............................................................................................................................................................ 198
27.20 PERFORMANCE OF CONTRACTORS .................................................................................................................................................................... 198
27.21 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING WORKS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 198
27.22 ONGOING CHECKING .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 198
27.23 CARE OF WORK AND REINSTATEMENT OF DAMAGE ........................................................................................................................................ 198
27.24 THEFT AND VANDALISM GENERALLY (REFER ALSO TO SOFTSCAPE AND HARDSCAPE CLAUSE) ........................................................ 198
28 MAINTENANCE WORKS HARD LANDSCAPE .................................................................... 199

28.1 CONCRETE PATHWAYS AND PAVED AREAS ....................................................................................................................................................... 199
28.2 STREET FURNITURE ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 199
28.3 SIGNAGE .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
28.4 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
28.5 BBQS ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
28.6 TAPS AND DRINKING FOUNTAINS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 199
28.7 PLAYGROUNDS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 199
28.8 PARTICULAR COMPETENCE REQUIRED FOR THE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE .................................................................................. 202
28.9 SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE FOR PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT ITEMS .................................................................................................................. 202
28.10 VANDALISM AND THEFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 202
28.11 GRAFFITI REMOVAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 203
28.12 BIRD DROPPINGS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 203
29 MAINTENANCE WORKS SOFT LANDSCAPE ..................................................................... 205

29.1 GENERAL WORKS .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 205
29.2 TREES ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 205

29.3 PRUNING.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 205
29.4 STAKING AND GUYING ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 205
29.5 FERTILISING - TREES .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 205
29.6 FERTILISING - GARDEN BEDS ................................................................................................................................................................................ 205
29.7 MULCH TOP UPS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 205
29.8 GARDEN BEDS .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 206
29.9 VANDALISM, THEFT AND PLANT DEATH ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
29.10 INSECT AND DISEASE CONTROL........................................................................................................................................................................... 206
29.11 ADJACENT AREAS .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 206
30 MAINTENANCE WORKS TURF AND GRASS AREAS ........................................................ 207

30.1 MOWING..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 207
30.2 FERTILISING .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 207
30.3 WEED CONTROL....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 207
30.4 TURF / GRASS MANAGEMENT CALENDAR ........................................................................................................................................................... 208
30.5 VANDALISM, THEFT AND GRASS DEATH .............................................................................................................................................................. 209
30.6 GRASS, WEED AND PEST CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................................... 209
30.7 ADJACENT AREAS .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 209
31 ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE WORKS................................................................................... 211

31.1 AERATION .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 211
31.2 TOP DRESSING ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 211
31.3 DETHATCHING .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 211
31.4 LITTER ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 211
31.5 IRRIGATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 211
31.6 IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 212
31.7 EROSION CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 212
SECTION E APPENDICES .................213

32 BULK EARTHWORKS SPECIFICATION ................................................................................ 214
32.1 MONITORING OF VIBRAT ION AND NOISE ........................................................................................................................................................... 215
32.2 DUST CONTROL........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 215
32.3 SITE CLASSIFICATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
32.4 PROVISIONS FOR CLASSIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................................................... 215
32.5 PAYMENT FOR DUST CONTROL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 215
32.6 WIND FENCING ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 216
32.7 WATER CART ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 216
32.8 ADVISORY NOTICES ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 216
32.9 PROCEDURE FOLLOWING DUST RELATED COMPLAINT ................................................................................................................................... 216
32.10 DILAPIDATION SURVEYS......................................................................................................................................................................................... 216
32.11 CLEARING .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 216
32.12 FILLING AND RESPREADING .................................................................................................................................................................................. 217
33 SETTING OUT ........................................................................................................................ 222

33.1 CONTRACTOR TO CHECK BENCH AND REFERENCE MARKS AND OTHER SURV EY MONUMENTS AND PEGS...................................... 222
33.2 PROJECT SURVEYOR .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 222
33.3 LEVELS AND ALIGNMENT........................................................................................................................................................................................ 222
33.4 PROTECTION OF SURVEY STATIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 222
33.5 CONTOURS AND LEVELS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 222
33.6 FINISHING AND PRESENTATION O F THE WORKS............................................................................................................................................ 222
33.7 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS S OIL, RUBBISH AND FIN AL CLEANING UP ............................................................................................................ 223
33.8 TEMPORARY WORKS .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 223
33.9 DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 223
33.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
33.11 NOMINATED SUB- CONTRACTORS........................................................................................................................................................................ 223
33.12 LATENT CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 223
34 EARTHWORKS......................................................................................................................... 224
34.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 224
34.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS...................................................................................................................................................................................... 224
34.3 NOTICE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 224
34.4 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 224
34.5 STOCKPILE SITE ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 224
35 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................................... 225

35.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 225
35.2 CARE OF TREES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 225
35.3 TOPSOIL..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 225
35.4 EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 225

36 BACKFILL AND BULK EARTHWORKS ............................................................................. 227
36.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
36.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
36.3 IMPORTED FILL ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
36.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING.................................................................................................................................................................... 229
36.5 HYDROMULCHING .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 229
37 AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY OF EARTHWORKS ................................................................ 230

37.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 230
37.2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................................................................................................... 230
38 IRRIGATION SPECIFICATION ................................................................................................. 231

38.1 IMPORTANT ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 231
38.2 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 231
38.3 MONITORING AND REPORTING ............................................................................................................................................................................. 231
38.4 ANTICIPATED WATER USAGE ................................................................................................................................................................................ 231
38.5 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 231
38.6 APPENDED SPECIFICATION ................................................................................................................................................................................... 231

TENDER & CONTRACT CONDITIONS
SECTION A:

1 CONDITIONS OF TENDERING
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The Tamala Park Regional Council (TPRC) has commenced construction of Catalina, a new master planned urban development in
the suburbs of Clarkson and Mindarie within Perths north coast corridor. The Tamala Park Regional Council is comprised of the
Town of Cambridge, City of Joondalup, City of Perth, City of Stirling, Town of Victoria Park, City of Vincent and City of Wanneroo.
These member Councils have a joint holding in the project. The Satterley Property Group act as Project Managers and Emerge
Associates as Landscape Architects on the TPRCs behalf.
The Catalina site is a prime infill development site spanning an area of 170 ha, approximately 34km north of Perths CBD, nestled
between the coastline and Clarkson Train Station.
It is surrounded by the established

residential areas of Burns Beach,
Kinross, Clarkson and Mindarie. It
also adjoins the Ocean Keys retail
and commercial centre and is only
2km from Mindarie Marina. As
such it is surrounded by
established private and public
infrastructure, services and
amenities.
Ultimately, the Catalina Estate will

comprise around 2,300 lots,
providing homes to approximately
6,000 residents, achieving best practice outcomes in urban design. It is anticipated the site will be developed at a rate of 100 - 150
lots per annum. To date over 750 lots have been sold.
Emerge Associates has been appointed Superintendent of the Landscape and Irrigation Works component of the Project for and
on behalf of the Principal
1.2 TENDER DOCUMENTS

The Tender shall be in strict accordance with the Emerge Associates Tender Documents for Catalina Beach, Mindarie; comprising
the following:
Specification and Contract Document for Stage 25 Landscape and Irrigation Construction and Maintenance Works;
Contract No CB-01, incorporating the General Conditions of Contract AS2124-1992 as amended by the Principal,
Specifications and Drawings as listed

A. Landscape Drawings (Emerge Associates)
CB-01-000 REV A COVER SHEET
CB-01-200 REV A OVERALL SITE PLAN
CB-01-300 REV A GRADING PLAN
CB-01-400 REV A FINISHES PLAN
CB-01-500 REV A PLANTING PLAN
CB-01-502 REV A PLANTING PLAN AVIATOR BLVD
CB-01-503 REV A PLANTING PLAN MARMION AVE
CB-01-600 REV A DETAIL PLAN
CB-01-800 REV A SECTIONS
CB-01-901 REV A TYPICAL HARDWORKS
CB-01-903 REV A TYIMBER DECKING DETAIL PLANS
CB-01-906 REV A WALL DETAIL
CB-01-907 REV A FEATURE WALL DETAIL

CB-01-911 REV A SHELTER A DETAIL
CB-01-916 REV A SHELTER B DETAIL
CB-01-926 REV A CUSTOM FURNITURE DETAIL
CB-01-927 REV A TYPICAL FURNITURE DETAIL
CB-01-928 REV A IRON FILTER ENCLOSURE
CB-01-931 REV A PLAYGROUND DETAILS
CB-01-932 REV A CUSTOM PLAY PLATFORM DETAIL
CB-01-934 REV A FEATURE PLAY WALLS DETAILS
CB-01-936 REV A TYPICAL SOFTWORKS DETAILS
CB-01-941 REV A GENERAL NOTES
B. Irrigation Drawings (Total Eden)
17367-01 REV A KEY PLAN

17367-02 REV A IRRIGATION WORKS
C. Electrical and Lighting Drawings (ETC)
D. Other Drawings (Sub-consultant)
E. The Specifications
The Tenderer shall notify the Superintendent if they are not in receipt of the abovementioned documents within 12 hours of receiving
the Tender. The appropriate documents will be forwarded to the Tenderer within 24 hours of this notification. The Tender period
will not be extended due to the provision of these additional documents.
One set of Drawings listed in Section A and this bound document will be made available to the successful Tenderer free of charge.
Additional full size copies of Drawings will be available at a charge of $3.00 per copy as required. Retention of a clean copy for
future lamination for site reference is recommended.
1.3 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH TENDER

In accordance with the General Conditions of Tendering the following documents shall be completed, signed and submitted with
the Tender;
Tender Form

Schedules specified
A written submission addressing each component of the selection criteria as listed in Clause 1.11 individually; and
All other information required by the Tender Document
1.4 DEFINITIONS
In this Tender Document, except where the context otherwise requires, the defined terms in column 1 below have the respective
meanings in column 2. In addition, where a term is not defined below but is defined in the Contract, the definition in the Contract will
apply to that term in this Tender Document.
Column 1 Column 2
Addenda any additional attachments to this Tender Document or additional information relating to this
Tender Document issued by the Superintendent in accordance with clause 1.5 after the
release of this Tender Document.
Closing of Tenders the date and time and at the location defined in the Letter of Invitation, via the method
prescribed in clause 1.8 or the other date and time set through an extension by the
Superintendent under 1.40.
Conforming Tender a Tender which, in the opinion of the Superintendent, conforms with the requirements of this
Tender Document.
Contract the contract to be executed between the Principal and the successful Tenderer selected by
the Superintendent and/or the Principal.
Contract Sum the sum payable to the Contractor for performing the Contractors Obligations in accordance
with the Contract.
Contractor the party named as the Contractor in the Contract.
Contractors Obligations all of the obligations the Contractor is or may be required to perform under the Contract.
Departure a condition, qualification or provision included in the Tender which has the effect of, or
purports to have the effect of, departing from the requirements of this Tender Document,
including any that limits or excludes liability other than as expressly permitted by this Tender
Document.
Non-Conforming Tender a Tender which, in the Superintendents opinion, does not conform with the requirements of
this Tender Document or contains Departures from, or alternative options to, the
requirements of this Tender Document.
Tender all the documents submitted by the Tenderer in response to this Tender Document.
Tender Price the Tenderers proposed Contract Sum as submitted as part of its Tender.
Tenderer the party or parties submitting a Tender in response to this Tender Document.
Tender Document comprises:
(a) Sections A to E and any Appendices of this Tender Document as issued by the
Superintendent;
(b) any Addenda;
(c) documents or parts of documents expressly incorporated by reference; and
(d) any responses issued by the Superintendent or the Principal under clause 1.50
of Section A to this Tender Document.
Tender Process the process set out in this Tender Document, commencing on the date that this Tender
Document is first made available to the Tenderers by the Superintendent and ending on the
date on which the Contract is executed or the process is otherwise terminated by the
Superintendent.
1.5 INTERPRETATION
In this Tender Document, headings are for convenience only and do not affect the interpretation of this document and, unless the
context otherwise requires:
(a) words importing the singular include the plural and vice versa;
(b) words importing a gender include any gender;
(c) other parts of speech and grammatical forms of a word or phrase defined in this Tender Document have a
corresponding meaning;
(d) an expression importing a natural person includes any company, partnership, joint venture, association,
corporation or other body corporate and any government agency;
(e) a reference to a clause, party, attachment, exhibit or schedule is a reference to a clause of, and a party,
attachment, exhibit and schedule to, this Tender Document and a reference to this Tender Document includes any
attachment, exhibit and schedule;
(f) a reference to a statute, regulation, proclamation, ordinance or by-law includes all statutes, regulations,
proclamations, ordinances or by-laws amending, consolidating or replacing it, whether passed by the same or
another Government Agency with legal power to do so, and a reference to a statute includes all regulations,
proclamations, ordinances and by-laws issued under that statute;
(g) a reference to a document includes all amendments or supplements to, or replacements or novations of,
that document;
(h) a reference to a party to a document includes that partys successors and permitted assigns;

(i) a reference to a business day is a reference to a day on which a day on which banks are open for business
in Perth, Western Australia, excluding a Saturday, Sunday or public holiday;
(j) a reference to a month is a reference to a calendar month; and
(k) no provision of this Tender Document will be construed adversely to a party solely on the ground that the
party was responsible for the preparation of this Tender Document or that provision.
Specifying anything in this Tender Document after the words includes, including or for example or similar expressions does not
limit what else is included unless there is express wording to the contrary.
1.6 ADDENDA
Addenda to the Tender Document may be issued for the purpose of clarifying documents or to effect modification to the design or
the Contract terms. If the Tenderer should be in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Tender Documents, it should
immediately notify the Principal and obtain clarification prior to delivering its Tender. Any interpretation of the Tender Document
shall be made only by formal addendum to the Tender Document. The Principal shall not be responsible for any other interpretation.
Each addendum issued shall be distributed to each Tenderer to whom a Tender Document has been issued.
All addenda issued shall become a part of the Tender Document and one signed copy of the acknowledgement of receipt of an
addendum shall be attached to the Tender.
1.7 TENDERING
The Tenderer shall note that whilst every care has been taken in preparing the Drawings and Specification included in this Tender,
it is the responsibility of the Tenderer to bring to the attention of the Superintendent any ambiguities or inconsistencies found within
the documents during the Tender period for clarification. Failure to undertake this course of action will not form sufficient grounds
for the Contractor to submit future claims following award of the Contract.
1.8 LODGEMENT OF TENDERS

The Tender may be submitted by prepaid post in time for the Tender to be placed in the Tender Box by the date and time for closing.
Tenders close 3pm WST on the date nominated on the front cover of the Tender Document.
No responsibility whatsoever will be accepted by the Principal for Tenders submitted by post. Production of a receipt for a document
having been sent by courier or by post shall not of itself constitute a ground for accepting a Tender.
A Tender not in the Tender Box at the time and date of Tender opening is considered as a late Tender. A late Tender shall not be
considered for evaluation. The Principal accepts no responsibility whatsoever for submitted Tenders failing to be in the Tender Box
at the time and date of closing.
Tenders submitted by facsimile, email, telex, telegram items or oral shall not be acceptable; any Tenders received by such means
shall be deemed non-conforming and not considered.
The tender must be placed in a sealed envelope, clearly endorsed with the Tender number and title as shown on the front cover of
the Tender Document and addressed to:
The Chief Executive Officer

Tamala Park Regional Council
The Tender shall be lodged in the Tender Box, located at:
Tamala Park Regional Council

Unit 2, 369 Scarborough Beach Road
INNALOO WA 6018
The tenderers are requested to submit their tender in triplicate (hard copies and electronic copies). Hard copies are to
include one (1) original and two (2) full copies inclusive of all brochures and associated documentation. Each copy shall
be unbound and clipped (not stapled). The electronic copies are to be provided on CD & USB flash drive and clearly
labelled.
1.9 EVALUATION PROCESS

The following evaluation methodology will be used in respect of this Tender:
Tenders are checked for completeness and compliance. Tenders that do not contain all information requested (e.g.
completed Offer form and Attachments) may be excluded from evaluation.
Tenders are assessed against the Assessment Matrix below.
The most suitable Tenderers may be short listed and may also be required to clarify their Tender, attend an
interview, explain the methodology offered and/or open premises for inspection. Referees may also be contacted
prior to the selection of the successful Tenderer.

A Contract may then be awarded to the Tenderer whose Tender is considered the most advantageous Tender to the Principal.

1.10 SELECTION CRITERIA
Assessment of Tenders will be based on the Tender submitted, the Selection Criteria included in this clause and any other material
as may be requested or received. The Tenderer may submit additional supporting material relating to current workload and additional
material on similar works as desired.
In assessing the Tenders the following Matrix Weighting will be utilised:
Demonstrated Track Record and Experience 30%

Availability of Resources, Capacity & Sub Contractors Nominated 10%
Organisational and Quality Management 5%
Safety and Environmental Management 5%
Tendered Price 50%
The tenderer is to provide on a maximum of two (2) A4 pages per criteria, a response that address the following :
Demonstrated Track Record and Experience (30%)
Tenderers are to list the Project name and approximate landscape construction value and approximate timing of completion of four
(4) (minimum) recent landscape works built by the Tenderer under their current management structure over the last two (2) years.
Only include individual Contracts over $2,000,000 in landscape construction works. Demonstrated experience in similar projects
shall relate to the previous experience a Contractor has with the Works/Services described.
Provide details of experience in constructing landscape projects during the last five (5) years with a particular emphasis
on environmentally sensitive outcomes and sustainability initiatives.
Provide details of experience in respect to undertaking similar projects during the last five (5) years. Discuss how
outstanding issues were dealt with and if the overall Works/Services were completed within budget and on time, including
descriptions of cost efficiencies.
Provide a summary statement of track record in respect to previously completed contracts for similar works undertaken
during the last five (5) years (i.e: limit presentation to one A4 sheet per contract) and in support, provide names and
contact numbers of referees.
Provide details of recent works whereby the Contractors ability to bring innovation to the project resulted in cost savings,
sustainability and environmental excellence being achieved.
Availability of Resources, Capacity & Sub Contractors Nominated (10%)
Availability of resources and capacity is the Contractors ability to complete the Works/Services described in a competent and timely
manner.
Describe the methodology that will be applied to complete all Works described within the given time frame and include
a Gantt chart. Provide recent examples of the companys previous ability to achieve a programme.
Describe what resources will be applied to the Works described, i.e; crew type and number of personnel in each crew
inclusive of their level of qualifications, plant and equipment. Note: The Contractor is requested to provide a full list
of the plant and equipment relevant to the Works described.
Describe how the Works described will be managed and how resources will be utilised.
Contractors are required to state their intention whether they will be subcontracting any of the Works described and
where applicable, are required to provide full details of proposed subcontractors who are to be utilised. The successful
Tenderer shall be requested to confirm its proposed subcontractors before the Works described are awarded.
For any subcontractors proposed, the following details are required in support of this tender;
Please note that approval to use subcontractor is required to be approved by the Principal
Portion of the Works described to be subcontracted
Name and address of the subcontractor
Location of premises
Similar projects undertaken in the last three (3) years
Organisational and Quality Management (5%).

Management is comprised of the following elements; management capabilities (including organisation skills), economic stability and
acceptable insurance:
Provide details of organisational structure and the key personnel who will be responsible for administrating and
carrying out the Works/Services described.
Provide evidence that all working Directors have Workers Compensation Insurance coverage.
Describe the Project Management system to be employed, citing where appropriate examples of previous contracts
of a similar nature to the Works described. In support, provide details on how it is intended to project manage the
Works described.
Explain what processes and strategies will be utilised to ensure that the physical work undertaken in provision of
the Works described is of adequate quality and how the standard will be maintained for the period of the contract
entered into.
Provide works programmes for each separable portion.
Provide copies of the following Quality Assurance (QA) documents used in recording the works undertaken:
The name, qualifications and experience of the Tenderer's QA Representative for this project; and
A list of projects carried out by the Contractor where quality assurance to AS/NZS/ISO 9001 (as a minimum
standard) has been implemented.
Relevant examples of previously used inspection and test plans or inspection/test sheets;
A list of standard forms to be used;
An outline of the proposed method for managing of non-conformance.
Safety and Environmental Management (5%)
Supply OSH policy and management plan details (manual or system), together with a general risk assessment
relevant to the Works described. The risk assessment must include an evaluation impact on all persons including;
the Contractor and the Contractors personnel or agents; the Superintendent to the Contract, Tamala Park Regional
Council personnel and members of the public. There must also be evidence of a commitment to safety, adequate
safety training of the Contractors personnel, with details of the Contractors personnel dedicated to OSH
responsibilities.
Provide examples of any processes currently in place relating to safety, such as Job Safety Analyses sheets,
induction forms, work place inspections and training. Provide actual samples from previous Contracts that are
relevant to the Works described. Note: References to client names are to be deleted.
Supply environmental policy and management system together with a general review of how environmental issues
will be managed as well as details of experience and understanding of environmental issues on previous similar
projects.
Tender Price (50%)
The tendered price shall be fixed and not be subject to any rise and fall.
The Tenderer shall include all costs and disbursements of the Tenderer and nominated Sub Contractors, and the
tendered price shall be deemed to include:
(a) Labour, machines and materials;

(b) Fees and levies including B.C.I.T.F.;
(c) Fees as indicated in the price schedule;
(d) Profit and attendance;
(e) Insurance costs;
(f) All kinds of surcharges;
(g) Mobilisation, demobilisation and establishment charges;
(h) All State and Commonwealth duties, taxes and charges (excluding GST); and
(i) Any other necessary costs to complete the Contract.
GST shall not be included in the Tender prices, however the successful Tenderer shall separately list GST on each
invoice.
Each Contractor shall be ranked for each of the categories listed above in accordance with the Tamala Park Regional Councils
Procurement Policy. A copy of the TPRCs Procurement Policy is available from their website for tenderers information. The
rankings will then be converted to percentages to achieve a total. The Principal has adopted a best value for money approach to
this Tender. Therefore, although price is considered, the Tender containing the lowest price will not necessarily be accepted, nor
will the Tender ranked the highest on the qualitative criteria.

1.11 TENDER VALIDITY PERIOD AND AWARD OF CONTRACT
All Tenders will remain valid and open for acceptance for a minimum period of ninety (90) days from the Close of Tender unless
extended by mutual agreement between the Principal and the Tenderer in writing.
1.12 PROPERTY IN THIS TENDER DOCUMENT

As between the Tender and the Superintendent, this Tender Document, including any documents forming part of it, at all times
remains the property of the Superintendent.
1.13 CONTENTS OF TENDER

The Tender shall be submitted on the Form of Tender provided herein and shall include the bound document and set of Drawings
issued to the Tenderer. The Tender shall be for the whole of the works and consideration will not be given to Tenders submitted for
only part of the works. The Tender shall include all schedules, completed in accordance with the details thereon.
The Superintendent will not return any Tender or copies of a Tender and the Tender will be retained by the Superintendent and/or
the Principal as commercial in confidence. Both the Superintendent and the Principal may make copies of all or part of a Tender
for any purpose related to this Tender Document.
1.14 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY

The Tenderer will bear entirely and exclusively all costs and expenses incurred and in any way associated with developing, preparing
and submitting its Tender, including attending meetings, site visits and interviews and providing any additional information required
by the Superintendent and/or the Principal irrespective of whether or not the Contract proceeds or the Tenderers Tender is accepted
or rejected.
Neither the Superintendent nor the Principal is liable for any loss, expenses, costs or damages incurred by a Tenderer in relation to
the preparation or submission of a Tender or subsequently in post Tender negotiations or otherwise arising from the Tender Process.
This exclusion applies in relation to this Tender Document and also in relation to any other oral or written communications or
disclosures to a Tenderer by either the Superintendent or the Principal.
1.15 COMPLETION OF TENDER

The Tender must be signed by a person or persons, and in a manner authorised by the Tenderer, so that it is binding on the
Tenderer. The Tenderer must provide any evidence required by the Superintendent and/or the Principal to confirm the proper
execution of the Tender.
1.16 CONFORMING AND ALTERNATIVE TENDERS

Tenderers shall submit a Tender conforming in all detail with the Tender Documents. No variations to these Conditions of Tendering
are permitted or will be accepted by the Superintendent or the Principal. The Superintendent and/or the Principal may determine
at their discretion whether a Tender is a Conforming Tender or a Non-Conforming Tender.
Alternative Tenders may be submitted in addition to the Conforming Tender in which case all points of departure from the Tender
Documents shall be clearly and separately listed. Any Tender may be rejected which does not comply with any requirements of, or
which contains provisions not required by these Conditions of Tendering, the Conditions of Contract, the Specification or the
Drawings.
All Alternative Tenders MUST be accompanied by a Conforming Tender. Tenders submitted as Alternative Tenders or made subject
to conditions other than the General and Special Conditions of Contract must in all cases arising be clearly marked ALTERNATIVE
TENDER.
The Principal may in its absolute discretion reject any Alternative Tender as invalid.
1.17 LUMP SUM CONTRACT

The Contract for which a Tender has been invited is a Lump Sum Contract and is not subject to adjustment for rise and fall in the
cost of labour, materials and other costs and charges associated with carrying out the works under the Contract.
The sum of the prices for each item when totalled in the specified way will form the lump sum price for Tender assessment purposes.
If any error is made in the calculation of summation of the amounts, the Tenderer shall be bound by the Lump Sum Tendered.
1.18 SCHEDULE OF RATES

The Schedule of Rates, shows estimates of quantities and shall represent the priced Bill of Quantities as defined in AS2124-1992
and will be used as a basis for the assessment and valuation of any authorised variations to the work under the Contract. The rates
and amounts for each item of work shall be set out opposite each item and the amounts for the items totalled. The Lump Sum
Tender shall comprise this summation.
It shall be the Tenderers responsibility to check and ensure that the items and quantities measured are an accurate reflection of
the work under Contract. Should any items be omitted or quantities incorrect for the Works shown on the Drawings, or described
in the Specification, the Tenderer shall include and/or modify the measured Schedule of Rates to relate to its Tender price.

If a Schedule of Rates omits an item which should reasonably have been anticipated by an experienced and competent Tenderer
to be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the Works, and such omitted item is not inserted by the Tenderer, then the cost
of such item shall be deemed to be included within other items of the Schedule of Rates.
Contractors shall note the Principal will use the rates submitted by the Contractor for extensions of work awarded within
a period of two (2) years from the date of award, with a further option for a one (1) year extension at the sole discretion of
the TPRC.
Tenderers shall complete and submit the Schedule of Rates with their Tenders.
.
1.19 PROVISIONAL SUMS

The Tenderer shall include the Provisional Sums shown in the Schedule of Rates in the Tender price. These sums or any part
thereof shall be expended only on the written instruction of the Superintendent.
Quantities marked Provisional in the Schedule of Rates have been used where the information available is insufficient to permit an
accurate assessment of the actual quantities. Payment for each and every item shown as having a provisional quantity shall be the
actual quantity completed, as measured by the Superintendent and shall be paid for at the rate shown in the Schedule of Rates.
1.20 QUANTITIES
Quantities provided in the Schedule of Rates are for the guidance of Tenderers only and are not warranted to be correct and will
form no part of the Contract. Tenderers shall write in their own quantities together with any additional items in the Schedule of Rates.
1.21 GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (GST)

Goods and Services Tax shall be incorporated on all items as required within the Tendered sum. Alterations to the Tendered or
Contract sum to correct for GST will not be considered, and shall be borne by the Contractor
1.22 TIME FOR COMPLETION

The time for completion of the work under the Contract shall be as nominated in Part A of the Annexure to the General Conditions
and the conforming Tender shall be based on this time. However, should the Tenderer consider that the works could be completed
within a period other than that specified he shall nominate the alternative time for completion of the works as part of an Alternative
Tender. Consideration may be given to a reduced or extended time for completion in the evaluation of Tenders.
1.23 PROJECT TIMELINE

The Contractor shall note the Indicative Project Timeline below. Unless otherwise stipulated the Contractor shall provide a
Programme of Works reflecting the dates listed below. No deviation to the Timeline dates below will be acceptable unless a written
request from the Contractor is approved and authorised by the Superintendent during the course of the Tender and Construction
periods.
Any delay in giving the Contractor Possession of Site resulting from delays in Acceptance of Tender will result in Extensions of Time
to the Contract to a corresponding amount. This extension shall be requested by the Contractor and approved by the Superintendent
prior to submission of the Contractors works programme and the commencement of construction works. Failure to request an
extension at this time will not be grounds for future extensions.
1.24 CONTRACT STAGING/SEPARABLE PORTIONS
Stage 25 Linear POS/Separable Portion A
Stage 25 Linear POS works will include the landscape & irrigation construction works within Lot 8030.
Landscape Construction shall be complete within four weeks (16) weeks from possession of site. The consolidation
period shall be for a period of thirteen (13) weeks. The Contractor shall give the Superintendent three (3) days
notice when they deem landscape construction is complete and obtain approval prior to commencing consolidation.
Stage 25 Greenlink /Separable Portion B
Stage 25 Greenlink works will include the landscape & irrigation construction works within Lot 8029.
Landscape Construction shall be complete within twelve weeks (16) weeks from possession of site. The
consolidation period shall be for a period of thirteen (13) weeks. The Contractor shall give the Superintendent three
(3) days notice when they deem landscape construction is complete and obtain approval prior to commencing
consolidation.
Stage 25 Entry Statement /Separable Portion C
Stage 25 Entry Statement works will only include the Entry Wall construction works only within Lot 8029 & Lot 2137 GH.

consolidation.
Stage 25 Sales Office /Separable Portion D
Stage 25 Sales Office works will include the landscape & irrigation construction works within Lot 2137 GH.
consolidation.
Stage 25 Aviator Boulevard /Separable Portion E
Stage 25 Aviator Boulevard works will include the landscape & irrigation construction works only.
consolidation.
Stage 25 Marmion Avenue Streetscape /Separable Portion F
Stage 25 Marmion Avenue works will include the landscape & irrigation construction works only.
consolidation.
1.25 INDICATIVE PROJECT TIMELINE

It is anticipated that the programme for the project shall be generally in accordance with the following:
Tenders Issued: Wednesday 26 October 2016
Tenders Close: Wednesday 16 November 2016
Panel Meeting: Monday 21 November 2016
Recommendation to TPRC Thursday 24 November 2016
Council Meeting Thursday 8 December 2016
Contract Award Thursday 15 December 2016
Possession of Site: Friday 17 March 2017
Practical Completion (16 wks) Thursday 16 June 2017
Defects liability complete: (52 wks) Friday 17 June 2018
Consolidation Complete (13 wks) Friday 15 September 2017
Maintenance Period (not required)
1.26 TENDERERS WARRANTIES

In submitting the Tender, the Tenderer warrants:
(a) that it has examined this Tender Document and any other information made available by the Superintendent
or the Principal to Tenderers for the purpose of Tendering;
(b) that it has carried out all relevant investigations as appropriate concerning the following and has taken the
following into account in its Tender:
(i) all information which is relevant to the risks, contingencies and other circumstances which could
affect the Tender and which could be reasonably obtained; and
(ii) the availability of labour and materials for the performance of the Contractors Obligations;
(c) the correctness and sufficiency of its Tender, including the information provided by the Tenderer in the
Tender schedules;
(d) that the Tender Price covers the cost of performing the Contractors Obligations in accordance with the
terms and conditions of the Contract, including having regard to the risks and anything referred to in (b) above;
(e) that it has and will maintain the necessary experience, skill and expertise to perform and complete the
Contractors Obligations in accordance with the Contract;
(f) that it will maintain at adequate levels, throughout the period of the Contract, the resources required for the
proper completion of the Contractors Obligations within the time required under the Contract including skilled
manpower, finance, materials, and office and factory buildings and facilities;
(g) that the Tender in all respects is an independent Tender and that no collusion has taken place between the

Tenderer and any other prospective Tenderer or interested party in the preparation of the whole or any part of the
Tender;
(h) that it has not canvassed or contacted any employee or Contractor of the Superintendent or the Principal
in relation to its Tender (except as provided in clause 1.49 or with the Superintendents and/or the Principals
consent);
(i) that it is entitled to lodge a Tender in response to this Tender Document and perform the Contractors
Obligations; and
(j) to its knowledge, there are no actions, claims, proceedings or investigations pending or threatened against
it which would impact on its ability to undertake the Contractors Obligations.
1.27 INSPECTION OF THE SITE AND CONDITIONS

The Tenderer shall inspect the site of the works and satisfy themselves as to the nature and location of the works to be carried out
and all other matters, which may affect the works. The Tenderer shall inform themselves of all relevant physical conditions upon or
below the surface of the site and satisfy themselves as to the character of the material in and upon which the works will be carried
out.
Notwithstanding any latent conditions (as defined in Clause 12 of the General Conditions of Contract) which may be encountered,
Tenderers shall be deemed to have made adequate allowance for the site conditions to be encountered and Tenderers must assume
all responsibility and risk involved therein.
Neglecting to inspect the site or to satisfy themselves regarding the site or any other conditions which may have a bearing on the
works under the Contract, or neglecting to have allowed therefore in the compilation of its Tender shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of any of its responsibilities under the Contract.
1.28 TENDERERS ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The Tenderer acknowledges that:
(a) neither the Superintendent nor the Principal purports to comprehensively describe the Specifications, or
provide all of the information that the Tenderer or the Tenderers advisors may desire or require in reaching
decisions in relation to, or in its assessment of, the Contractors obligations in order to prepare its Tender, including
the Tender Price;
(b) the Tenderer must:
(i) make its own interpretations, deductions and conclusions from the information made available;
(ii) undertake its own investigations; and
(iii) accept full responsibility for those investigations, interpretations, deductions and conclusions;
(c) neither the Superintendent nor the Principal makes any express or implied representation that any estimate
or forecast will be achieved or that any statement as to a future matter;
(d) the Tenderer will not dispute that a document or any other information is authentic or binding on the ground
that the document or other information was transmitted or generated electronically;
(e) the security of the information submitted to either or both of the Superintendent or the Principal electronically
cannot be guaranteed;
(f) neither the Superintendent nor the Principal will not be liable if any information submitted electronically or
other data is lost or misused; and
(g) nothing in the Tender Document limits the Principals rights under the Contract.
1.29 RESERVATION OF THE SUPERINTENDENTS/PRINCIPALS RIGHTS

Each of the Superintendent and the Principal reserves their respective right to, at their discretion:
(a) suspend, end, reinstate or vary the Tender Process;
(b) repeat any stage in the Tender Process;
(c) include a review process as part of the Tender Process;
(d) cancel, supplement, modify or replace this Tender Document, including the draft Contract;
(e) alter the Specifications, including the technical requirements;
(f) not proceed with the Specifications at all or in the manner outlined in this Tender Document;
(g) elect not to select any Tenderer as the successful Tenderer;
(h) extend the Closing of Tenders;
(i) accept or reject:
(i) a partial Tender;
(ii) a Tender that was submitted after the Closing of Tenders; or
(iii) a Tender if the Tenderer or the Tender does not comply with this Tender Document;
(j) reject any Tender as non-compliant, should any Tenderer or Tender in the opinion of the Superintendent
or the Principal not comply with this Tender Document;
(k) not accept the lowest or any Tender;
(l) exclude any Tender from further consideration once the Superintendent and/or the Principal has considered
it;
(m) obtain further, revised or replaced Tenders from one or more Tenderers;
(n) negotiate or clarify matters with any Tenderer, including negotiating with one or more Tenderers or
negotiating on different issues with different Tenderers;
(o) reject a Tender if the Tenderer does not comply with any reasonable request from the Superintendent

and/or the Principal to submit further information or documents;
(p) establish a shortlist of Tenderers with which to negotiate;
(q) hold one or more Tenderers in reserve;
(r) decline to answer queries from a Tenderer;
(s) evaluate Tenders in such a manner as the Superintendent and/or the Principal regards appropriate;
(t) refuse participation by a particular party at any time in the Tender Process;
(u) allow further parties to participate in the Tender Process at any time;
(v) allow a Tenderer to withdraw from the Tender Process;
(w) enter into the Contract without prior notice to the other Tenderers;
(x) conduct a security, probity or financial check on a Tenderer for the purpose of evaluating a Tender;
(y) rely on available information relating to a Tenderer as part of the evaluation of a Tender, including the
Tenders performance under other contracts involving the Superintendent or the Principal;
(z) negotiate with a Tenderer after it has been chosen as the successful or preferred Tenderer;
(aa) take other action as the Superintendent and/or the Principal considers, at its discretion, appropriate in
relation to the Tender Process; and
(bb) waive any requirements or obligations under this Tender Document, in which case that waiver will not affect
any other requirements or obligations contained in this Tender Document.
The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before submitting its Tender as to the correctness and sufficiency of that
Tender to cover all its obligations under the Contract and all matters necessary for the proper completion and maintenance of the
works under the Contract.
1.30 FORM OF AGREEMENT

The successful Tenderer shall be required to enter into a formal agreement with the Principal as set out in the `Australian Standard
Form of Formal Instrument of Agreement, AS 2124-1992` as amended by the Principal.
1.31 B.C.I.T.F LEVY

The Building and Construction Industry Training Fund Levy shall be incorporated into the Contract Sum and paid by the Contractor
as required.
1.32 SITE STABILISATION

The Contractors attention is drawn to the requirement to lodge upon request a detailed work plan outlining the construction staging
and methods which would be adopted to minimise the distribution of material by wind.
1.33 GROUND WATER LEVEL

The Contractor is to make its own judgement as to the ground water level, and make allowance for that level during the construction
of the works.
1.34 OTHER CONTRACTS

The Tenderer shall note that the Principal will be appointing other Contractors to construct other works (e.g. Civil Engineering etc.)
within or immediately adjacent the site boundary as defined under this Contract. The Contractor for this Contract shall be deemed
to have taken into account all reasonable needs of the Contractors for these other Contracts.
The Contractor for this Contract shall at all times co-operate with any other Contractors so that they may carry out the obligations
of their Contracts with the minimum of hindrance.
Should any dispute arise between the Contractor for this Contract and the other Contractors which cannot be resolved between the
parties, the matter shall be referred to the Superintendent whose decision shall be final and binding.
The Contractor shall note that at certain times during construction their work may involve construction within the limits of the site
under possession by a Head (Civil or other) Contractor. It is a requirement by law that all personnel be inducted by the Head
Contractor before operating on the site. The Contractor shall ensure all personnel including delivery personnel and Sub-Contractors
are inducted to the site prior to entering.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate their personnel and liaise with the Head Contractor at all times as to programme, deliveries and
personnel and plant movements when working within their site.
1.35 NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS AND/OR SUPPLIERS

Refer to Section C: GENERALLY of this Specification for a list of nominated Sub-Contractors/Suppliers.
Before selecting Sub-Contractors from the abovementioned list the Tenderer must carry out their own assessment and satisfy
themselves that the subcontract companies selected have all the necessary abilities to complete the work including technical,
management and financial ability.
1.36 SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS AND MAJOR SUPPLIERS

The Tenderer shall submit with its Tender the names and full particulars regarding any Sub-Contractor to whom it intends to sublet
any portion of the Works. The Tenderer shall submit with its Tender the names and full particulars of major suppliers for materials,

which will form part of the Works. The schedule titled Schedule of Sub-Contractors and Major Suppliers shall be completed by
the Tenderer and submitted with its Tender.
1.37 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY PRINCIPAL

Refer to Section C: GENERALLY of this Specification for a list of materials to be supplied by the Principal.
1.38 SAFETY STANDARDS AND PRECAUTIONS

The Contractor shall comply with all relevant Australian Standards and Commonwealth, State and Local Council Standards, Codes
and Guidelines with relevance to the protection of persons and property during the Contact period.
The Principal has compiled a Work Health and Safety (WHS) Handbook for Contractors (WHS.GUI.1) that provides contractors with
instruction as to the Principals requirements for pre mobilisation and notification requirements. Contractors are required to comply
with the requirements of this handbook as part of the obligations under this Contract. The Work Health and Safety (WHS) Handbook
for Contractors is attached at Annexure A.
'The Contractor shall comply with the Principals safety management plan. The safety management plan at the date of this Tender
is attached at Annexure A'
No works shall be undertaken prior to the approval by the Superintendent of a Safety Management Plan prepared by the Contractor
complying with the requirements as outlined above.
1.39 LETTER OF CAPACITY AND BANK REFERENCE

The Tenderer shall upon request in a separate letter accompanying the Tender, furnish evidence that it has carried out other similar
works of comparable type and magnitude during the last three years in order that the Principal, or its nominee, may be satisfied that
the Tenderer is technically and financially capable of executing the Works. Such information need only be provided where
considered necessary to supplement information already provided in the Tender or Tenderers Registration of Interest.
The Tenderer shall give the name of its bank or banks to which the Principal may obtain a reference if required.
1.40 EXTENSIONS OF TIME DURING TENDER PERIOD

If any prospective Tenderer applies to the Superintendent for an extension of time to the Closing of Tenders, the Superintendent
may, in its discretion, approve or refuse the application.
If an extension of time to the Closing of Tenders is granted by the Superintendent, the extension will apply to all Tenderers, and all
prospective Tenderers and Tenderers whose Tenders have already been lodged, will be informed of this extension.
In the event an extension to the Closing of Tenders is granted, Tenders already submitted may be withdrawn and may be amended
and resubmitted in accordance with this Tender Document. The Tender must be re-submitted on or before the extended Closing of
Tenders.
1.41 PROVISION OF FURTHER INFORMATION

At any time after the lodging of a Tender, the Superintendent is entitled to request any further information relevant to the Tender or
the Tenderer as may be required and the Tenderer must promptly provide such information in writing (or in another manner
requested or approved by the Superintendent). Such information may be rejected by the Superintendent if, in its opinion, the
information varies the Tender Document in any material respect.
1.42 CODE OF PRACTICE

In consideration of being invited to Tender, the Tenderer undertakes as a fundamental condition of its Tender and, if successful, the
Contract, that it will act in accordance with the Code of Practice for the Western Australian Building and Construction Industry.
1.43 CONFIDENTIALITY
The Tenderer acknowledges and agrees that this Tender Document and the related data and information (including price
information) exchanged between the Superintendent and/or the Principal and the Tenderer relating to the Tender or subsequently
produced following execution of the Contract may include:

trade secrets of either or all of the Superintendent, the Principal and the Tenderer;
information that has a commercial value to either or all of the Superintendent, the Principal and the Tenderer; or
information about the business, professional, commercial or financial affairs of either or all of the Superintendent,
the Principal and the Tenderer,

that will be destroyed or diminished by publication.
Notwithstanding clause 1.44, all of the provisions of the Contract which deal with confidentiality apply to this Tender Process and
any reference to the Contract in that clause is deemed to be a reference to the Tender and the Tender Process as appropriate.

1.44 DISCLOSURE OF CONTRACT INFORMATION
Documents and other information relevant to the contract may be disclosed when required by law under the Freedom of Information
Act 1992 or under a Court order. All Tenderers will be given particulars of the successful Tenderer(s) or will be advised that no
Tender was accepted.
1.45 IDENTITY OF THE TENDERER

The identity of the Tenderer and the Contractor is fundamental to the Principal. The Tenderer will be the person, persons,
corporation or corporations named as the Tenderer and whose execution appears in both the Form of Tender in Section 2 and on
the Summary of Tender Prices in Section 3.1 of this Request. Upon acceptance of the Tender, the Tenderer will become the
Contractor.
1.46 JOINT TENDERS

Where a Tender is lodged in the name of two or more persons, either by way of joint venture, partnership or otherwise, irrespective
of the relationship between the parties, each person:
(a) is jointly and severally:
(i) bound by the terms of this Tender Document and the Tender; and
(ii) if the Tender is accepted, bound by the Contract entered into by the Tenderer and the Principal
and entitled to the benefit of the Contract; and
(b) must sign the Tender in accordance with clause 1.13.
1.47 REGISTRATION OR LICENSING OF CONTRACTORS

Where an act or ordinance of the state of Western Australia requires that a Contractor (as defined by the act or ordinance) be
registered or licensed to carry out the work described in the Tender documents, the Tenderer shall state on the Form of Tender in
the space provided, its registration or license number.
The Tender may not be considered if the Tenderer fails to provide such registration or license number.
1.48 ASSIGNMENT OF TENDER

The Tenderer must not assign the Tender or any interest in or created from the Tender without the prior written consent of the
Superintendent. If a Tenderer makes an assignment without the Superintendents prior written consent, the assignee may, in the
Superintendents absolute discretion, be disqualified and not given any further consideration.
1.49 COMMUNICATIONS WITH SUPERINTENDENT AND THE PRINCIPAL

All communications from the Tenderer to the Superintendent upon which the Tenderer intends to rely for the purposes of its Tender
must be in writing and addressed to:
EMERGE ASSOCIATES
Suite 4, 26 Railway Road, Subiaco
WA 6008
Ph +61 8 9380 4988

Fax+ 61 8 9380 9636
Any Tenderer canvassing or contacting an employee or Contractor of the Superintendent or the Principal in relation to its Tender
(except as provided in this clause or with the Superintendents prior written consent) may at the Superintendents discretion have
its Tender disqualified following which neither the Superintendent nor the Principal will give the Tender any further consideration.
1.50 ABSENCE OF OBLIGATIONS

The Tenderer, by submitting a Tender, acknowledges and accepts that, except under clauses 1.10, 1.12 and 1.40 no legal or other
obligation in respect of the undertaking of the Contractors Obligations or otherwise in relation to the Tender Process outlined in this
Tender Document will arise between the Tenderer and the Superintendent and/or the Principal until all necessary approvals and
consents in relation to the Contractors Obligations and the Contract have been obtained and the Contract has been executed.

2 FORM OF TENDER
2.1 AUSTRALIAN STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING AND FORM OF TENDER AS 2124 - 1992
The documents upon which the Tenderer is to Tender are:
CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE A Contract No. CB-01
Australian Standard General Conditions of Contract AS 2124 1992 and Annexures Part A and B as amended by
the Principal
Specification and Contract Document CB-01 dated October 2016
all Drawings listed in Section A of the above document
Tenderers must complete the Tender Form provided and lodge it with all accompanying Tender Schedules or information in a sealed
envelope endorsed with the Contract Name and Number at the place and by the time stated in the Notice to Tenderers
The Principal is not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender
emerge associates FORM OF TENDER

2.2 TENDER FORM - AS 2124 - 1992
Name of person, firm or company Tendering :

USE BLOCK LETTERS ............................................................................................................................................................
Of (Address) ............................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................. ACN ..........................................................................
Building Licence/Permit or Registration No ......................................... ...................................................................................
Hereby Tender(s) to perform the work for
(Project Name, Stage and Contract No) CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE A Contract No. CB-01 .............
..................................................................................................................................................................................................
for Landscape and Irrigation Construction and Maintenance Works in

accordance with the following Documents:
The Specification, all Schedules, all Addenda and all Drawings Listed in Section A or issued under Specification and Contract Document
for Contract No. CB-01 dated 10 October 2016 as issued by Emerge Associates.
1. For the lump sum of
$ ................................................................................................................................................................................................
(Written Sum) ..........................................................................................................................................................................
Exclusive of GST ......................................................................................................................................................................
or
2. At the rates in the attached Schedule of Rates
Note: When the Tender documents provide that the Tender is to be a lump sum only (2) does not apply. When the Tender documents provide
that the Tender is to be a Schedule of Rates only, (1) does not apply.
I / We undertake to perform the work under the contract in accordance with AS- 2124 General Conditions of Contract and Annexure,
Specification, Drawings and Bill of Quantities (if any) which documents I / we have examined, and I / we further agree that this Tender shall
remain binding on me / us for 90 days, or as such other period as stated in the conditions of Tendering, from the date of Closing of Tenders
and shall not be withdrawn for that period.
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................
Telephone No.: ......................................................................... Facsimile No.: .....................................................................................
Signature of Authorised Officer: .............................................................................................................................................................

(NAME IN BLOCK LETTERS)
emerge associates
3 TENDER SCHEDULES
3.1 SUMMARY OF TENDER PRICES:
PROJECT: CATALINA BEACH, WA
DESCRIPTION: STAGE 25, LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE WORKS
CONTRACT NO: CB-01
SUMMARY OF TENDER PRICE (to be completed by Tenderers)
Stage 25 Linear POS/Separable Portion A
1. Landscape Construction $ _________________________________________________________________ +GST
2. Irrigation Bore Construction $ ______________________________________________________________ +GST
3. Irrigation System Construction $ ____________________________________________________________ +GST
4. Electrical and Lighting Services $ ___________________________________________________________ +GST
6. Maintenance $ __________________________________________________________________________ +GST
Stage 25 Greenlink/Separable Portion B
3. Maintenance $ __________________________________________________________________________ +GST
Total Tender Price as shown on Form of Tender $ ______________________________________________ +GST
TOTAL including GST $ ____________________________________________________________________
Stage 25 Entry Statement/Separable Portion C
3. Maintenance $ __________________________________________________________________________ +GST
emerge associates TENDER SCHEDULES

Stage 25 Sales Office/Separable Portion D
3. Maintenance $ __________________________________________________________________________ +GST
Stage 25 Aviator Boulevard/Separable Portion E
3. Maintenance $ __________________________________________________________________________ +GST
Stage 25 Marmion Ave/Separable Portion F
3. Maintenance $ __________________________________________________________________________ +GST
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


3.2 SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS AND MAJOR SUPPLIERS:
Tenderers are to list the name and address of each Sub-Contractor they propose to engage to carry out any works
under the Contract.
ITEM OF WORK
NAME
ADDRESS
ITEM OF WORK
NAME
ADDRESS
ITEM OF WORK
NAME
ADDRESS
ITEM OF WORK
NAME
ADDRESS
ITEM OF WORK
NAME
ADDRESS
ITEM OF WORK
NAME
ADDRESS
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


3.3 SCHEDULE OF DAY WORKS LABOUR RATES:
Tenderers shall list below the hourly rates payable for various occupational groups, which may be employed on site:
OCCUPATION RATE PER HOUR (excluding GST)
1. Project Manager
2. Site Manager / Foreman
3. Site Supervisor
4. Leading Hand
5. Horticulturalist / Arboriculturalist
6. Landscape Apprentice
7. Labourer Horticultural
8. Labourer Skilled
9. Labourer Unskilled
10. Paver Tradesperson
11. Paver Labourer / Installer
12. Electrical - Licensed
13. Electrical - Apprentice
14. Plumber - Licensed
15. Plumber - Tradesman
Other Trades/Classifications (as identified by the Tenderer)
16.
17.
18.
19.
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


3.4 SCHEDULE OF PLANT HIRE RATES:
Tenderers shall list the hourly rates for the hire of all types of construction equipment used on site for clearing, earthworks,
excavation, compaction, laying of pipes, grading of surfaces, watering, etc.
The rates shall include allowances for an experienced operator, fuel, consumable stores, maintenance, overheads and profit.
TYPE OF PLANT/EQUIPMENT RATE PER HOUR (excluding GST)
1. 8 Wheel Truck (10 CuM)
2. 6 Wheel Truck (10 Cu M)
3. Loader (Medium size)
4. Roller (Up to 10 tonne)
5. Truck Hiab
6. Water Cart (1800L)
7. Water Cart (900 L)
8. Mini Excavator (Up to 7 tonne)
9. Skid-Steer Loader (Bobcat)
10. Plate Compactor
11. Stump Grinder
12. Other Plant and Equipment (as identified by the Tenderer)
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


3.5 LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION:
CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Linear POS/Separable Portion A
This is a Lump Sum Tender and the price so Tendered shall be compensation for the complete works as described by the
Specification and Drawings. This Tender includes for the provision of all materials, plant and labour (unless specifically noted
otherwise) and the complete and proper construction of all works as described by the Specification and Drawings and shall
include but not be limited to, the securing, manufacture or fabrication of all parts, and their transportation, installation, erection,
maintenance and replacement of defective parts all to the entire satisfaction of the Superintendent.
The Schedule below shall be completed with quantities and rates to allow for assessment of Tenders and the valuing of
variations under the Contract.
Tenderers shall include a schedule of prices so submitted that when added together represent a lump sum for the comparison
of Tenders. The individual items shall be used for the calculation of progress payments.
This schedule and the descriptions and scope of the items obtained therein shall be read as part of the Specification.
GST shall NOT be included in the rate shown for each item.
EMERGE
ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT
QTY
1.0 PRELIMINARIES
1.1 GENERAL PRELIMINARIES Item
1.2 PRODUCTION OF REQUIRED SHOP DWGS Item
1.3 PROVISION OF SAMPLES, TEST RESULTS, AUTHORITY APPROVALS Item
1.4 PRODUCTION OF QA AND PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Item
1.5 PRODUCTION OF AS CONSTRUCTED DWGS INCLUDING SURVEY Item
OHS COMPLIANCE
The tenderer shall complete the following schedule allowing for all costs to
2.0
ensure the information is retained onsite and available to the principal and
superintendent at any time.
2.1 CONTRACT WORKS INSURANCES (with Principal noted as jointly insured) Item
PROVISION FOR SITE SHED AND FACILITIES (for the duration of the Item
2.2
project)
2.3 SITE FENCING (supply for the duration of the project and removal) Item
2.4 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE/SAFETY FENCING Item
PREPARATION AND IMPLEMENTATION OF A TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
2.5 Item
PLAN
PREPARATION AND PROVISION OF A CONTRACT WORKS SAFETY
2.6 Item.
MANAGEMENT PLAN
2.7 PREPARATION OF A RISK ASSESSMENT PLAN Item
2.8 CONTRACTOR & SUB CONTRACTOR INDUCTIONS & TRAINING Item
2.9 INDEPENDENT SAFETY AUDIT (PER PRINCIPALS REQUIREMENTS) Item
PREPARATION, UPDATING AND PROVISION OF RISK
2.10 Item
REGISTER (for duration of the project, provide at site meetings)
COMPLETION OF PRINCIPALS CONTRACTORS MONTHLY WHSE Item
2.11
REPORT
2.12 TOOLBOX MEETINGS (undertaken weekly for the duration of the project) Item
2.13 UNDERTAKING AND PROVISION OF SWMS DOCUMENTATION Item
2.14 UNDERTAKING AND PROVISION OF JSA DOCUMENTATION Item
INSPECTION, TESTING AND REPORTING FOR PLANT AND Item
2.15
EQUIPMENT
3.0 SITE WORKS
3.1 REMOVAL OF DEMOLITION WASTE AND DISPOSAL OFFSITE Item
3.2 DUST SUPPRESSION AND WATER CARTS Item
3.3 SERVICES/UTILITIES LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION Item
3.4 SITEWORKS & SET OUT 7,600 sq m
3.5 ROCK EXCAVATION Item P.Sum

EMERGE
QTY
3.6 DEWATERING Item -
3.7 WEED/UNDERGROWTH ERADICATION 7,600 sq m
4.0 EARTHWORKS AND GRADING
4.1 BULK EARTHWORKS (Specification Clause 9.18) 7,600 sq m
4.2 FINAL MINOR TRIM (+/- 100mm) 7,600 sq m
6.0 WALLS AND STEPS
6.1 RECONSTITUTED LIMESTONE SEATING WALL (Detail 1, Dwg CB-01-906) 15 lin m
RECONSTITUTED LIMESTONE SEATING WALL WITH LIMESTONE
6.2 170 lin m
CLADDING (Detail 2 & 5, Dwg CB-01-906)
PRE FABRICATED CONCRETE PLAY WALLS WITH PORTS OF THE
6.3 8 each
WORLD NEGATIVE CONTOURING (Dwg CB-01-934 & Dwg CB-01-935)
CONCRETE PLAY WALL WITH COMPOSITE TIMBER CLADDING TO
6.4 18 lin m
BORE (Detail 4, Dwg CB-01-906)
6.5 CONCRETE STAIRS (Details 10 & 11, Dwg CB-01-902) 133 lin m
7.0 STRUCTURES
7.1 FEATURE SHELTER (Dwg CB-01-911 & Dwg CB-01-912) 1 each
7.2 FEATURE ARBOUR (Dwg CB-01-916) 1 each
7.3 IRON FILTER ENCLOSURE (Dwg CB-01-928) 15 lin m
8.0 COMPOSITE DECKING AND BRIDGES
8.1 COMPOSITE DECKING (Details 1,2,5,6 & 7, Dwg CB-01-902) 278 sq m
8.2 COMPOSITE DECKING STEPS (Details 8 & 9, Dwg CB-01-902) 6 sq m
8.3 PEDESTRIAN BRIDGE (Details 3-7, Dwg CB-01-902 & Details 2 & 3, Dwg CB-01-903) 28 sq m
9.0 STONEWORK
9.1 LIMESTONE BOULDERS (Detail 8, Dwg CB-01-936) 40 each
10.0 HARDSCAPES
10.1 CONCRETE FOOTPATH (Washed Aggregate) 960 sq m
10.2 CONCRETE FOOTPATH (Standard Grey Concrete 32mPa) 405 sq m
10.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOOTPATH (Standard Grey Concrete 32mPa) 185 sq m
10.4 CONCRETE MOWING KERB (175mm Wide by 150mm High) 68 lin m
10.5 RUBBER SOFTFALL 203 sq m
10.6 PLAYGROUND MULCH SOFTFALL 118 sq m
11.0 SITE FURNITURE
11.1 STAIR HANDRAILS 9 lin m
11.2 DRINKING FOUNTAINS (inc all connections) 1 each
11.3 BENCH SEATS 1 each
11.4 PICNIC SETTINGS (inc 2No under shelters) 2 each
11.5 RUBBISH BIN & POST (inc 240lt wheelie bin) 2 each
11.6 CUSTOM CONCRETE BENCHES (Details 1-7, Dwg CB-01-926) 3 each
11.7 CUSTOM COMPOSITE SUN BEDS (Details 8-10, Dwg CB-01-926) 4 each
11.8 WIND SOCKS (Details 7, Dwg CB-01-927) 12 each
11.9 CUSTOM CATALINA TREE GRILLE (Details 6-7, Dwg CB-01-927) 4 each
11.10 METAL BOLLARDS 44 each
11.11 METAL BOLLARDS REMOVEABLE 8 each
11.12 TIMBER BOLLARDS 21 each
11.13 TIMBER BOLLARDS REMOVEABLE 6 each

EMERGE
QTY
12.0 PLAY EQUIPMENT
P.
12.1 CUSTOM PLAY TOWER (Subject to separate tender) 1 $435,000.0 $435,000.0
Sum
12.2 CUSTOM PLAY TOWER (Profit & attendance for all coordination purposes) 1 item
12.3 KOMPAN CUSTOM NET (0081192503 For EPDM discs to composite platform) 1 each
12.4 KOMPAN CUSTOM NET (0081192603 With membrane to concrete platform) 1 each
12.5 CONCRETE PLAY PLATFORM (Dwg CB-01-932 & Dwg CB-01-933) 12 m2
12.6 COMPOSITE DECK PLAY PLATFORM (Dwg CB-01-932 & Dwg CB-01-933) 13.6 m2
12.7 ADVENTURE+ IN-GROUND TRAMPOLINES 3 each
12.8 KOMPAN HOLDING GRIPS 79 each
13.0 SOFT LANDSCAPE WORKS
TREE PLANTING (Complete inc supply, install and staked/guyed as specified)
13.1 - 500 litre 45 each
13.2 - 200 litre 55 each
13.3 - 30 litre 819 each
SHRUB PLANTING (Complete inc supply, install as specified)
13.4 - 200mm 6,123 each
13.5 SOIL CONDITIONER (Turf 50mm) 2,466 sq m
13.6 SOIL CONDITIONER (Gardens 75mm) 2,323 sq m
13.7 SOIL CONDITIONER (Trees) 100 each
13.8 MULCHING (Imported - Supply and Install) 2,531 sq m
13.9 TURF INSTANT ROLL ON (Kikuyu) 2,466 sq m
14.0 MATURE TRANSPLANTS
14.1 MATURE TRANSPLANTS - (Complete inc supply, install as specified) 23 item
14.2 WARRANTY FOR MATURE TRANSPLANTS 1 item
14.3 MONTHLY REPORTING ON MATURE TRANSPLANTS 1 item
15.0 MISCELLANEOUS
15.1 GRAFITTI COATING (inc all Exposed Limestone Walls, Capping, Concrete Walls etc) 1 item
15.2 ROOT CONTROL BARRIER (3 lin m per tree) 300 lin m
16.0 LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL
16.1 POS LIGHTING & ELECTRICAL (Details 8, Dwg CB-01-927) 3 each
16.2 LIGHTING & ELECTRICAL inspection No1 by Sub-Consultant 1 each
17.0 IRRIGATION
17.1 IRRIGATION BORE,PUMP AND ELECTRICS 1 item
17.2 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM 1 item
18.0 INSPECTION/CERTIFICATION
18.1 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER inspection No1 by Sub-Consultant 1 each
18.5 PLAYGROUND SAFETY AUDIT(at PC) 1 each
18.6 PLAYGROUND SAFETY AUDIT(annually following PC) 2 each

EMERGE
QTY
18.7 ARBORIST REPORT(at PC) 1 each
19.0 CONSOLIDATION (13 weeks) 13 wks
20.0 CONTINGENCY P.Sum
21.0 MAINTENANCE item
22.0 ANY OTHER ITEMS NOT INCLUDED ABOVE (list below)
23.0 TOTAL PRICE TENDERED (excluding GST)

24.0 GST (10%)
25.0 GRAND TOTAL LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Greenlink/Separable Portion B
EMERGE
QTY
1.0 PRELIMINARIES
OHS COMPLIANCE
2.0
2.2
project)
2.5 Item
PLAN
2.6 Item.
MANAGEMENT PLAN
2.10 Item
2.11
REPORT
2.15
EQUIPMENT
3.0 SITE WORKS

EMERGE
QTY
5.0 WALLS
RECONSTITUTED LIMESTONE SEATING WALL WITH LIMESTONE
5.1 8 lin m
CLADDING (Detail 2 & 5, Dwg CB-01-906)
6.0 HARDSCAPES
6.1 CONCRETE FOOTPATH (Washed Aggregate) 80 sq m
6.4 RUBBER SOFTFALL 50 sq m
7.0 SITE FURNITURE
7.1 PICNIC SETTINGS (inc 2No under shelters) 2 each
7.2 METAL BOLLARDS 2 each
7.3 METAL BOLLARDS REMOVEABLE 1 each
8.0 PLAY EQUIPMENT
8.1 FORPARK PARKFIT EQUIPMENT (Cycle Seat Colour:Blue) 1 each
8.2 FORPARK PARKFIT EQUIPMENT (Step Up Colour:Blue) 1 each
9.1 - 500 litre 8 each
9.2 - 200 litre 12 each
9.3 - 200mm 3,565 each
9.4 SOIL CONDITIONER (Turf 50mm) 254 sq m
9.8 TURF INSTANT ROLL ON (Kikuyu) 254 sq m
10.0 MISCELLANEOUS
10.1 GRAFITTI COATING (inc all Exposed Limestone Walls, Capping etc) 1 item
11.0 IRRIGATION
14.0 CONTINGENCY 1 P.Sum

EMERGE
QTY

18.0 GST (10%)
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Entry Statement/Separable Portion C
EMERGE
QTY
1.0 PRELIMINARIES
OHS COMPLIANCE
2.0
2.2
project)
2.5 Item
PLAN
2.6 Item.
MANAGEMENT PLAN
2.10 Item
2.11
REPORT
2.15
EQUIPMENT
3.0 SITE WORKS
3.4 SITEWORKS & SET OUT 40 sq m

EMERGE
QTY
3.7 WEED/UNDERGROWTH ERADICATION 40 sq m
4.1 FINAL MINOR TRIM (+/- 100mm) 40 sq m
5.0 WALLS
RECONSTITUTED LIMESTONE ENTRY WALL WITH CATALINA
5.1 2 each
SIGNAGE (Dwg CB-01-907)
7.0 SITE FURNITURE
7.1 WIND SOCKS (Details 7, Dwg CB-01-927) 31 each
9.1 MULCHING (Imported - Supply and Install) 32 sq m
10.0 MISCELLANEOUS
10.1 GRAFITTI COATING (inc all Exposed Limestone Walls, Capping etc) 2 item
11.0 IRRIGATION

EMERGE
QTY
18.0 GST (10%)

Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Sales Office/Separable Portion D
EMERGE
QTY
1.0 PRELIMINARIES
OHS COMPLIANCE
2.0
2.2
project)
2.5 Item
PLAN
2.6 Item.
MANAGEMENT PLAN
2.10 Item
2.11
REPORT
2.15
EQUIPMENT
3.0 SITE WORKS

EMERGE
QTY
4.1 BULK EARTHWORKS (Specification Clause 9.18) 3,188 sq m
5.0 HARDSCAPES
6.1 - 500 litre 18 each
6.2 - 200 litre 40 each
6.3 - 200mm 4,453 each
6.4 SOIL CONDITIONER (Turf 50mm) 1,663 sq m
6.8 TURF INSTANT ROLL ON (Kikuyu) 1,663 sq m
8.0 MISCELLANEOUS
9.0 IRRIGATION
12.0 CONTINGENCY P.Sum

EMERGE
QTY

16.0 GST (10%)

Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Aviator Boulevard/Separable Portion E
EMERGE
QTY
1.0 PRELIMINARIES
OHS COMPLIANCE
2.0
2.2
project)
2.5 Item
PLAN
2.6 Item.
MANAGEMENT PLAN
2.10 Item
2.11
REPORT
2.15
EQUIPMENT
3.0 SITE WORKS

EMERGE
QTY
5.1 - 500 litre 66 each
5.2 - 200mm 7,636 each
7.0 MISCELLANEOUS
8.0 IRRIGATION

EMERGE
QTY
15.0 GST (10%)

Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Marmion Avenue/Separable Portion F
EMERGE
QTY
1.0 PRELIMINARIES
OHS COMPLIANCE
2.0
2.2
project)
2.5 Item
PLAN
2.6 Item.
MANAGEMENT PLAN
2.10 Item
2.11
REPORT
2.15
EQUIPMENT
3.0 SITE WORKS

EMERGE
QTY
5.0 STONEWORK
5.1 LIMESTONE BOULDERS (Detail 8, Dwg CB-01-936) 93 each
6.0 SITE FURNITURE
6.2 TIMBER BOLLARD 93 each
7.1 - 200 litre 96 each
7.2 - 200mm 17,182 each
8.0 MISCELLANEOUS
9.0 IRRIGATION

EMERGE
QTY
16.0 GST (10%)

Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


4 IRRIGATION
4.1 IRRIGATION BORE:
CATALINA BEACH , WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE A Linear POS/Separable Portion 01
BORE PUMP AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Final payment will only be paided on measured quanties as per schedule
Item Description Unit Qty Rate Total

Supply and install 100mm bore head assembly,
1.1 including concrete block, to City of Wanneroo
Specifications Lot 1 $ -
Supply and installation of 100mm PVC discharge
1.2 column, air line, probe conduit and column
centralisers Metre $ -
Supply and install bore submersible pump,
1.3 Grundfos SP46-11 28kW MS6000 motor, complete
with, electrical cable and junction box Lot 1 $ -
Supply and installation of electrical cubicle as per
1.4 specification including Irrigation Controller to City of
Wanneroo Specification Lot 1 $ -
Elliots or Land & Water Iron Filtration unit, to treat
1.5 12lps @ 2ppm iron, including soakwells for back
wash Lot 1 $ -
1.6 Mobilization and Demobilization Lot 1 $ -
1.7 Commissioning of Pump and Electrical Lot 1 $ -
1.8 Any other costs - give details $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Sub-Total $ -
10% GST $ -
GRAND TOTAL $ -
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................

emerge associates IRRIGATION

4.2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM:
CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 1 PACKAGE A - Separable Portion 01
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM SCHEDULE OF RATES:
The unit rates submitted shall be lump sum prices for each item of material or component, inclusive of all labour and plant hire
costs associated with the installation of each component. GST shall NOT be included in the rate shown for each item.
This is a lump sum contract and these rates are intended for variation purposes only.

1.00 Mainlines:
1.01 100mm Class 12 RRJ PVC Mainline Mt $ -
Mainline Fittings (including thrust blocks as required):

2.00 Please List
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
3.00 Lateral pipe, including all fittings
3.01 80mm Class 9 SWJ Lateral pipe Mt $ -
4.00 Mainline Isolation Valves

100mm CI Flanged Sluice valve complete with Valve Box,
4.01 not including CI mainline fittings. Ea $ -
5.00 Solenoid Valves

Supply and install 50mm solenoid valve assembly including
5.01 ball valve and valve box as per specifications Ea $ -
5.04 100mm Bronze tapping bands for solenoid valve connection Ea $ -

Supply and install 50mm air valve assembly including ball
5.06 valve and valve box as per specifications and drawings Ea $ -

Supply and install 50mm flushing valve assembly including
5.07 ball valve and valve box as per specifications and drawings Ea $ -
6.00 Sprinklers
Supply and install Hunter I20-04 geardrive, nozzle and
6.01 articulated riser Ea $ -
Supply and install TORO 570XF-6P 150mm pop up
6.02 sprinkler, complete with spray nozzle and articulated riser Ea $ -
sprinkler, complete with a bubbler nozzle, and articulated
6.04 riser Ea $ -
7.00 Control
7.01 Supply and installation of a Hunter ICD100 Decoder to valve Ea $ -
8.00 Solenoid Control Cable

Supply and install 3.3mm2 Red & Blue solid core twisted
8.01 cable Mt $ -
8.02 Supply and install 40 mm MD Conduit Mt $ -
8.03 Supply and install P2 Cable Pits Ea $ -
9.00 Completion
9.01 As constructed drawings Lot $ -
As constructed Survey Data to "O-spec" as noted in
9.01 irrigation spec. Lot $ -
9.02 Manuals Ea $ -
9.03 Testing & Commissioning Lot $ -
10.00 Other Items (Please list below)

10.01 Ea $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Sub-Total $ -
10% GST $ -
GRAND TOTAL $ -
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................



1.00 Mainlines:

2.00 Please List
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -




6.00 Sprinklers
6.04 riser Ea $ -
7.00 Control

8.01 cable Mt $ -
9.00 Completion
9.02 Manuals Ea $ -

10.01 Ea $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Sub-Total $ -
10% GST $ -
GRAND TOTAL $ -
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................



1.00 Mainlines:

2.00 Please List
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -




6.00 Sprinklers
6.04 riser Ea $ -
7.00 Control

8.01 cable Mt $ -
9.00 Completion
9.02 Manuals Ea $ -

10.01 Ea $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Sub-Total $ -
10% GST $ -
GRAND TOTAL $ -
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................



1.00 Mainlines:

2.00 Please List
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -




6.00 Sprinklers
6.04 riser Ea $ -
7.00 Control

8.01 cable Mt $ -
9.00 Completion
9.02 Manuals Ea $ -

10.01 Ea $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Sub-Total $ -
10% GST $ -
GRAND TOTAL $ -
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................



1.00 Mainlines:

2.00 Please List
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -

100mm CI Flanged Sluice valve complete with Valve Box, not
4.01 including CI mainline fittings. Ea $ -



Supply and install 50mm flushing valve assembly including ball
6.00 Sprinklers
Supply and install TORO 570XF-6P 150mm pop up sprinkler,
6.02 complete with spray nozzle and articulated riser Ea $ -

6.04 complete with a bubbler nozzle, and articulated riser Ea $ -
7.00 Control

Supply and install 3.3mm2 Red & Blue solid core twisted cable
8.01 Mt $ -
9.00 Completion
As constructed Survey Data to "O-spec" as noted in irrigation
9.01 spec. Lot $ -
9.02 Manuals Ea $ -

10.01 Ea $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Sub-Total $ -
10% GST $ -
GRAND TOTAL $ -
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Marmion Avenue/Separable Portion E

1.00 Mainlines:

2.00 Please List
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -
Ea $ -




Supply and install 50mm flushing valve assembly including ball
6.00 Sprinklers

6.04 complete with a bubbler nozzle, and articulated riser Ea $ -
7.00 Control

Supply and install 3.3mm2 Red & Blue solid core twisted cable
8.01 Mt $ -
9.00 Completion
As constructed Survey Data to "O-spec" as noted in irrigation
9.01 spec. Lot $ -
9.02 Manuals Ea $ -

10.01 Ea $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
Sub-Total $ -
10% GST $ -
GRAND TOTAL $ -
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


4.9 MAINTENANCE:
Together with the summary below the Tenderer shall refer to and complete the maintenance schedules included within the
Maintenance Section of this Specification.
ITEM DESCRIPTION QNTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT
Maintenance Period 1 (39 weeks) 39 week
TOTAL PRICE TENDERED (Excl GST) Maintenance Periods 1&2 $
10% GST $
TOTAL Price for Maintenance Periods 1&2 $
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


4.10 MAINTENANCE:
This is a Lump Sum Tender and the price so Tendered shall be compensation for the complete works as described by the Specification
and Drawings. This Tender includes for the provision of all materials, plant and labour (unless specifically noted otherwise) and the
complete and proper construction of all works as described by the Specification and Drawings and shall include but not be limited to,
the securing, manufacture or fabrication of all parts, and their transportation, installation, erection, maintenance and replacement of
defective parts all to the entire satisfaction of the Superintendent.
The Schedule below shall be completed with quantities and rates to allow for assessment of Tenders and the valuing of variations
under the Contract.
Tenderers shall include a schedule of prices so submitted that when added together represent a lump sum for the comparison of
Tenders. The individual items shall be used for the calculation of progress payments.
Together with the summary below the Tenderer shall refer to and complete the maintenance schedules included within the Maintenance
Section of this Specification.
10% GST $
Tenderers Name: ....................................................................................................................................................................................
Telephone No.: ......................................................................... Facsimile No.: ......................................................................................
Signature of Authorised Officer: ..............................................................................................................................................................


4.11 MAINTENANCE:
under the Contract.
10% GST $
Tenderers Name: ....................................................................................................................................................................................


4.12 MAINTENANCE:
under the Contract.
10% GST $
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................


4.13 MAINTENANCE:
under the Contract.
10% GST $
Tenderers Name: ....................................................................................................................................................................................
Telephone No.: ........................................................................ Facsimile No.: ......................................................................................
Signature of Authorised Officer: ..............................................................................................................................................................


4.14 MAINTENANCE:
CATALINA BEACH, WA. STAGE 25 PACKAGE Marmion Avenue/Separable Portion F
under the Contract.
10% GST $
Tenderers Name: ....................................................................................................................................................................................


4.15 SCHEDULE OF TENDERERS EXPERIENCE
Tenderers are to list the Project name and approximate landscape construction value and approximate timing of completion of four
(4) (minimum) recent landscape works built by the Tenderer under their current management structure over the last two (2) years.
Only include individual Contracts over $500,000 in landscape construction works.
19. PROJECT
EST LANDSCAPE VALUE (excl GST)
TIME OF COMPLETION
20. PROJECT
TIME OF COMPLETION
21. PROJECT
TIME OF COMPLETION
22. PROJECT
TIME OF COMPLETION
23. PROJECT
TIME OF COMPLETION
24. PROJECT
TIME OF COMPLETION
Tenderers Name:....................................................................................................................................................................................

emerge associates
5 ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART A
ANNEXURE to the Australian Standard General Conditions of Contract AS2124 1992
This Annexure shall be issued as part of the Tender documents and is to be attached to the General Conditions of Contract and shall be
read as part of the Contract.
The law applicable is that of the State or Territory of: (Clause 1) Western Australia
Payments under the Contract shall be made at: (Clause 2) Perth, Western Australia
The Principal: (Clause 2) TAMALA PARK REGIONAL COUNCIL)

ABN: 77 069 468 271
The address of the Principal: Unit 2, 369 Scarborough Beach Road
INNALOO WA 6018
The Superintendent: (Clause 2) EMERGE ASSOCIATES

ABN: 44 656 153 170
ACN: 656 153 170
The address of the Superintendent: Suite 4, No 6 Centro Avenue
SUBIACO, PERTH, WA 6003
Limits of accuracy applying to quantities for which the Principal

accepted a rate of rates: (Clause 3.3(b)) 40%
Bill of Quantities - the alternative applying: (Clause 4.1) Alternative 1
The time for lodgement of the priced copy of the Bill of

Quantities: (Clause 4.2) With Tender
# Contractor shall provide security in the amount of: (Clause 5.2) 5% of the Contract Sum
# The period of notice required of a partys intention to have recourse

to retention moneys and/or to convert security: (Clause 5.5) 5 Days
The percentage to which the entitlement to security and retention

moneys is reduced: (Clause 5.7) 50% (2.5% held from maintenance period)
Interest on retention moneys and security - the alternative

applying: (Clause 5.9) Alternative 2
The number of copies to be supplied by the Principal: (Clause 8.3) 3 Copies
The number of copies to be supplied by the Contractor: (Clause 8.4) N/A
The time within which the Superintendent must give a direction as

to the suitability and return of the Contractors copies: (Clause 8.4) N/A
Work which cannot be subcontracted without approval: (Clause 9.2) All Works under the Contract
The percentage for profit and attendance: (Clause 11(b)) 10%
The amount or percentage for profit and attendance: (Clause 11(c)) 10%
Insurance of Works - the alternative applying: (Clause 18) Alternative 1
The assessment for insurance purposes of the costs of

demolition and removal of debris: (Clause 18(ii)) 10% of value of the Works
The assessment for insurance purposes of consultants

Fees: (Clause 18 (iii)) 10% of value of the Works
The value of materials to be supplied by the Principal: Nil
The additional amount or percentage: (Clause 18(v)) 20% of value of the Works
emerge associates ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART A

Public Liability Insurance - the alternative applying: (Clause 19) Alternative 1
The amount of Public Liability Insurance shall be not

less than: (Clause 19) $20 million
The time for giving possession of the Site: (Clause 27.1) Within 14 days From Tender
Acceptance
# The Date for Practical Completion: (Clause 35.2) Refer to Separable Portions
# Liquidated Damages per day: (Clause 35.6) Refer to Separable Portions
# Limit of Liquidated Damages: (Clause 35.7) No Limit
# Bonus per day for early Practical Completion: (Clause 35.8) N/A
# Limit of bonus: (Clause 35.8) N/A
# Extra costs for Delay or Disruption: (Clause 36) Nil
# The Defects Liability Period: (Clause 37) 52 Weeks
The charge for overheads, profit, etc. for Day work: (Clause 41(f)) To be included in the rates
Time for Payment Claims: (Clause 42.1) Last calendar day of each month
Unfixed Plant and Materials for which payment claims may be made
notwithstanding that they are not incorporated in the Works:
(Clause 42.1(ii)) Nil
Retention moneys on: (Clause 42.3) (a) work incorporated into he Works and
any work or items for which are a different
amount of retention is not provided, 10% of
the value until 5% of the Adjusted Contract
Sum is held;
(b) items on Site but not yet incorporated

into the Works, 10%
(c) items off Site but in Australia, 100%;
(d) items not in Australia, 100%
(e) disbursements incurred by the

Contractor for customs duties, freight,
marine insurance, primage, landing and
transport in respect of the work under the
Contract 10%
Unfixed Plant and Materials the alternative applying: Alternative 1

(Clause 42.4)
The rate of interest on overdue payments: (Clause 42.9) The Reference Rate of Bank West plus 1%
The delay in giving possession of the site which shall be a

substantial breach: (Clause 44.7) 90 days
The person to nominate an Arbitrator: (Clause 47.3) Chairperson of the Western Australian
Chapter of The Institute of Arbitrators
& Mediators Australia
Location of Arbitration: (Clause 47.3) Perth, Western Australia
emerge associates ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART A

6 ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART B
ANNEXURE to the Australian Standard General Conditions of Contract
The following clauses within AS 2124 - 1992 have been deleted, amended and/or added to as set out below:
Clause 3.3 Add third paragraph

(c) Where the Principal accepted a rate for the item based upon a provisional
quantity the rate shall apply to such works as instructed by the Superintendent
regardless of the provisional quantity used in the Bill of Quantities to derive a
Lump Sum.
Clause 5.4 Add second sentence

Time for Lodgement Failure to lodge security within that period shall be a substantial breach of Contract
of Security within the meaning of Clause 44 unless the Principal determines to deduct from monies
owing to the Contractor an amount equal to the security required which shall be held
as security until alternative security is lodged or the security is returnable to the
Contractor.
Clause 10.5 Amend first sentence

Direct Payment of In respect of Nominated subcontract work performed by a Nominated Sub-Contractor
Nominated the Principal upon notice in writing to the Contractor may determine to make payment
Sub-Contractors directly to the Nominated Sub-Contractor.
Clause 10.6 Amend first sentence

Termination of Nominated The Contractor shall not terminate a subcontract for nominated Subcontract Work
Sub-Contractors without written approval of the Superintendent. The Contractor shall notify the
Superintendent of the Contractors intention to terminate and the reasons as early as
possible.
Clause 12.4 Amend clause

Time Bar In making a valuation pursuant to Clause 12.3 regard shall not be had to the value of
additional work carried out, additional Constructional Plant used or extra cost incurred
more than 7 days before the date on which the Contractor gives the written notice
required by Clause 12.2
Clause 19 Amend clause

Alternative 1 Before the latest date upon which the Principal is to give Possession of the Site to the
Contractor, the Contractor shall take out a Public Liability Policy of insurance in the
joint names of the Principal and the Contractor which covers the Principal, the
Contractor the Superintendent and all subcontractors employed from time to time in
relation to the work under the Contract for their respective rights and interests and
covers their liabilities to third parties. The policy shall also cover the Contractors
liability to the Principal and Principals liability to the Contractor for loss of or damage
to property (other than property required to be insured by Clause 18) and the death of
or injury to any person (other than liability which is required by law to be insured under
a Workers Compensation Policy of insurance).
The Public Liability Policy of insurance shall be for an amount in respect of any one
occurrence not less than the sum stated in the Annexure and, unless specified
elsewhere in the Contract, shall be effected with and insurer and in terms both
approved by the Principal which approvals shall not be unreasonably withheld. The
policy shall be in force as and from the date upon which the Principal makes the Site
available to the Contractor and shall be maintained until the Final Certificate is issued
under Clause 42.8.
Clause 21.1 Amend first paragraph

Proof of Insurance Before the latest date upon which the Principal is to give Possession of the Site to the
Contractor and whenever requested in writing by the other party, a party liable to effect
or maintain insurance shall produce evidence to the satisfaction and approval of the
other part of the insurance effected and maintained.
emerge associates ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART B

Clause 21.3 Amend sub-clause (a)
Notice from or to the Insurer (a) require the insurer, whenever a notice of cancellation or other notice concerning
the policy is given by the insurer of the party effecting such insurance, or
whenever the party effecting such insurance fails to renew the policy or fails to
pay the premiums by the due date, at the same time to inform the other or both
parties as the case may be in writing that the notice has been given or the policy
not renewed or the premium not paid by the due dates.
Clause 40.1 Amend paragraph 3

Variations to the Work The Contractor shall execute a variation upon receipt of notice from the Superintendent
to vary the work under the Contract and shall be bound by the same conditions, as far
as they are applicable, as if the variation were part of the work under the Contract
originally.
Add fourth paragraph

Clause 42.7
If the Contractor fails to make a Final Payment Claim after the expiration of the period
Final Payment Claim
for lodging of a Final Payment Claim the Superintendent may issue a Final Certificate.
emerge associates ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART B

7 AUSTRALIAN STANDARD FORM OF FORMAL INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT
AGREEMENT MADE ON THE .............................................. day of .......................................................... 20 ...............................................
BETWEEN (Contractors name) ...................................................................................................................................................................
(Contractors address) ...................................................................................................................................................................................
ACN ........................................................................... ABN..............................................................................................................................
AND (Principals name) .................................................................................................................................................................................
(Principals address) ......................................................................................................................................................................................
ACN .......................................................................... ABN ............................................................................................................................
IT IS AGREED that the annexed documents marked as follows:
Submitted Tender dated: ...............................................................................................................................................................................
Letter of acceptance dated: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
AS 2124-1992 General Conditions of Contract and Annexure (agreement signed and all pages initialled by parties)
Specification and Contract Document for Contract No. CB-01
Drawing Numbers as listed in Section A Drawing Schedule, Specification and Contract Document for Contract No No. CB-01
Other Documents: .........................................................................................................................................................................................
(Use extra sheets if necessary to list all documents and Drawings)
shall together comprise the Contract between the parties AND if the Contractor or the Principal is two or more persons then they
shall be bound jointly and severally.
SIGNED BY THE CONTRACTOR:........................................................................................................................................................................................
(Print) ................................................................................................................................. Date
SIGNED BY THE PRINCIPAL: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................
(Print) ................................................................................................................ Date
emerge associates AUSTRALIAN STANDARD FORM OF FORMAL INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT

PRELIMINARIES
SECTION B
emerge associates AUSTRALIAN STANDARD FORM OF FORMAL INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT

8 PRELIMINARIES
8.1 GENERALLY
The Conditions of Contract shall be the [Amended] General Conditions of Contract (AS 21241992) together with General
Conditions of Tendering and Form of Tender (AS 21251992), Form of Formal Instrument of Agreement (AS 21271992) as
amended by the Principal and Conditions as detailed in the Annexure Part B
8.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Further to Clause 8 of the General Conditions of Contract, the work shall be performed in accordance with the following documents:
Any Special Conditions of Contract as agreed upon before a formal agreement is executed
The General Conditions of Contract
The Drawings
The Specifications
If there is any conflict between the Contract Documents then:
The provisions of the Special Conditions shall be paramount

The provisions of the Drawings shall take precedence over the Specification
The provisions of the Specification shall take precedence over the General Conditions of Contract
8.3 CO-OPERATION
Further to Clause 27 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall make all reasonable effort to perform the Work
under the Contract in such a manner as to enable its Work to be performed without hindrance to others. No claim will be considered
arising out of such other work or interference there from.
8.4 CASH FLOW SCHEDULE

Further to Clauses 33 and 42 of the General Conditions of Contract, upon request the Contractor shall submit a cash flow schedule,
in conjunction with the construction programme, setting out the value of work to be completed in each monthly period of the Contract.
8.5 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

Further to Clause 37 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall note that the Contract has a Defects Liability Period
as noted in the General Conditions of Contract, the period of the defects liability being stated in the Annexure Part A to the General
Conditions of Contract.
8.6 NOTIFICATION OF VARIATIONS

Further to Clause 40 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall notify the Superintendent verbally within 24 hours
of any item he believes to be a variation to the Contract and provide written confirmation within 48 hours. The Contractor shall
within 3 days provide full details including costings and extension of time he believes are warranted by the variation. Within 3 days
of receipt of these details the Superintendent shall provide the Contractor with its assessment of the variation claim.
Variation claims which are not detailed as stated in this clause will not be assessed and there will be no basis for further claim.
8.7 STAGING AND CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMMES

Further to Clause 33.2 of the General Conditions of Contract and within three (3) days after the Date of Acceptance of Tender, the
Contractor shall forward to the Superintendent a detailed Staging Programme setting out the order and stages in which the
construction work will be carried out.
The Contractor shall submit to the Superintendent within seven (7) days after acceptance of Tender, a detailed Construction
Programme outlining all works. Each of the nominated and approved Sub-Contractors must be in full agreement with the
programme. The programme shall be signed off by all nominated Sub-Contractors prior to submission to the Superintendent.
8.8 EXTENSION OF TIME

Further to Clause 35.5 of the General Conditions of Contract, a claim for extension of time arising from a work variation requested
by the Superintendent will be solely assessed on the effect that the variation has on the critical path of the works programme.
A claim for extension of time arising from inclement weather conditions will be assessed on the effect rather than the occurrence.
Where such a claim is based on wet weather, only those wet days in excess of the average monthly number of wet days will be
assessed on effect on the critical path of the works programme. The monthly average shall be as determined by the Bureau of
Meteorology for the locality of the Works.
A wet day shall be a day having rainfall equal to or in excess of 5mm as recorded by the Bureau of Meteorology for that locality.
emerge associates PRELIMINARIES

8.9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Further to Clause 35.6 of the General Conditions of Contract, Should the completion times nominated in the Contract be extended,
the Principal will be subjected to additional costs including fees for construction supervision and Contract administration, delayed
sales, etc.
The amount for liquidated damages nominated in Annexure Part A has been based on the assessment of these costs and may be
applied by the Principal in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract.
Liquidated damages specified in Part A of the Annexure to the Australian Standard General Conditions of Contract will apply.
8.10 WORKING HOURS AND DAYS

Further to Clause 32 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor may work between the hours of 7.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.
Mondays to Fridays and 7.00 a.m. to 4.00 p.m. Saturdays with no work being permitted on Sundays. Under special circumstances
and subject to the approval of the local authority and the Superintendent, the working hours may be increased.
The Contractor shall notify the Superintendent of its work start and finish times and working days prior to commencement of the
Works on the Site.
8.11 MEETINGS
Further to Clause 33 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Superintendent shall call Site Progress Meetings as necessary. The
Superintendent shall chair the Site Progress Meetings and record and distribute the Minutes.
The meetings may include the Contractor, the Superintendent, the Principal or its representative, Consultants and others required
from time to time and the Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for attending such Site Progress Meetings and shall arrange
to diligently carry out the progress of the Works as discussed or arranged at such meetings. The Contractor shall provide progress
reports and Programme updates at these meetings or as otherwise called for by the Superintendent, in a format acceptable to the
Superintendent.
8.12 SITE AND PUBLIC SECURITY

Further to Clause 15 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall monitor and control wherever practicable, the
access of all persons to the Site.
The Contractor shall ensure that no persons, including friends and relatives (particularly children) of employees and the
representatives or organisations unrelated to the Contract, enter the Site without the express permission of the Contractor.
The Contractor is advised that residents / families currently live adjacent to the site, as such particular care and attention to the
prevention of vandalism, theft and public injury is required. It is recommended that the site be rendered as secure as possible to
prevent vandalism, damage or injury.
If, in the opinion of the Superintendent at any period of the contract and during all non working hours maximum security cannot be
maintained, the Contractor shall employ an approved static guard security service on the site.
The Contractor shall provide a temporary safety fence as required by the Occupational Safety and Health Act 1984 and the
Occupational Safety and Health Regulations 1996 and with any amendments that may be made by the Act and the Regulations.
The Contractor shall allow in its Tender for vandalism and interference or disruption to work which may be caused by any person
or personal either employs or not employed by the Contractor during the course of the contract.
8.13 CONTRACTORS SITE FACILITIES

Further to Clause 27 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor may provide and maintain on the Site, facilities for its
staff, workers and Sub-Contractors including all necessary offices, stores, workshops, sheds, toilets and other facilities that are
required. The standard and position of any such facilities and extent of clearing shall be subject to the approval of the
Superintendent.
Buildings shall be of sound construction with good quality materials used throughout. The location, adequacy and general
appearance of all buildings shall be approved by the Superintendent prior to their installation. The Contractors attention is drawn to
various requirements of the Specification of the storage of materials such as cement and steel reinforcement. The Contractor shall
provide facilities satisfactory to the Superintendent for the storage of such materials.
All buildings and facilities used by the Contractor shall be cleared away and removed by it at no cost to the Principal on completion
of the Works and the Site shall be left in a clean and tidy condition.
An access road to this area shall be constructed by the Contractor as required and maintained in a dust-free condition throughout
the duration of the Contract. Upon completion of the Works this access shall be removed and the ground restored to its original
shape and level to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.

Areas set aside for the location of these facilities shall be away from significant stands of vegetation. To prevent the soil around tree
roots being compacted, vehicles and equipment shall not be driven or parked under trees.
Storage sites for oil and other contaminant materials and plant maintenance areas shall be confined to specially designed areas
within the Site in case of spillage. These areas shall be approved by the Superintendent and shall ensure that any spillages are
confined. Adequate quantities of suitable material to counteract spillages shall be kept on hand.
8.14 SANITATION ON WORKS SITE

Further to Clause 27 of the General Conditions of Contract, approved temporary toilet facilities may be provided by the Contractor
and maintained in a clean, tidy and hygienic state. All traces of the facilities shall be removed and the ground surface disinfected on
Practical Completion of the Works.
8.15 SITE SIGNBOARDS

Further to Clause 27 of the General Conditions of Contract, within seven (7) days of commencing work on the site the Contractor
shall erect or cause to be erected a project signboard and an information signboard in a location approved by the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall maintain these signboards in good condition during the currency of the Contract.
8.16 ADVERTISING
Further to Clause 8 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall not exhibit or permit to be exhibited any advertisement
on the Site or any land to which it has access under the Contract, without the written permission of the Superintendent.
8.17 CONTOURS AND LEVELS

Further to Clause 28 of the General Conditions of Contract, contours and levels provided on the Drawings to show existing levels
shall be deemed to be the level used in preparation of the Tender.
If it can be shown on the date of possession of the site by the Contractor, or within 48 hours of that date, that the existing levels
differ from the levels shown on the Drawings by an amount which would change the quantity of any of the work to be executed
under the Contract by more than 10% of the quantity calculated from the levels shown on the Drawings, the Contract sum shall be
adjusted accordingly.
8.18 STRUCTURAL DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR

For Items scheduled in Section C:GENERALLY, it is the Contractors responsibility to have all elements requiring structural design
i.e. footings, walls and all structures detailed by a qualified, practicing Structural Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that Council Approvals and Building Licences/Permits have been received for all works prior to
construction unless otherwise authorised.
The Drawings supplied at Tender are for Tender and for design guidance only as indicated on the plans. The Contractor shall submit
final details to the Superintendent first in draft and then followed in the form of structurally certified documentation and shop
Drawings. Approval from the Superintendent is to be granted prior to submission by the Contractor to Council for approval and
construction.
8.19 STRUCTURAL DESIGN BY PRINCIPAL

For Items scheduled in Section C:GENERALLY, all elements requiring structural design i.e. footings, walls and all structures shall
be detailed by a qualified, practicing Structural Engineer engaged by the Principal.
The Contractor is entitled to review the Drawings and amend details to improve the efficiency of construction however all revised
structural elements are to be then certified by a qualified, practicing structural engineer engaged by the Contractor. Revised and
certified details are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that Council Approvals and Building Licences/Permits have been received for all works prior to
8.20 SHOP DRAWINGS

All fabrication details are to be submitted by the Contractor to the Superintendent for approval as Shop Drawings prior to the
commencement of fabrication. Submitted Drawings are to be in AutoCAD 2013 format and laid out using standard international
Drawing protocols. Submit shop Drawings in a timely manner, allowing a minimum of 14 days for examination prior to return.
Shop drawings will be reviewed for general conformance with design concept only. Comments on examined shop Drawings will
apply to general principles of design only. Examination of the Drawings by the Superintendent or Consulting Engineers will in no
way relieve the Contractors responsibility for any errors, omissions or necessity of furnishing such workmanship or materials as
may be required for the completion of these works in accordance with the Contract documents. The design drawings, the
specification and all relevant Standards shall all have priority over the examined shop drawing.
8.21 TEMPORARY WORKS

The Contractor is wholly responsible and liable for the design and construction of all temporary works in relation to the Works.

When requested by the Superintendent, the Contractor shall forthwith supply full details of any proposed temporary works.
The submission of calculations or details shall not in any way limit the liability of the Contractor nor be seen as an admission of
liability on the part of the Principal or the Superintendent.
8.22 BUILDING LICENCE/PERMIT APPLICATION

The Contractor shall submit to the Local Authority all Building Licence/Permit Applications as required, inclusive of all fees, charges,
and structural advice for approval where required.
As scheduled in Section C: GENERALLY Some elements may have had structural input as indicated on the plans. The Contractor
shall confirm the presence or receipt of approved Structural Drawings within the Contract or by the Superintendent prior to
commencing works.
A copy of all building licence/permits, applications and approvals shall be provided to the Superintendent as they are lodged,
processed and approved. The Contractor shall ensure they have access to or are knowledgeable of the status of and /or have
copies of all approvals, structural designs and building applications at all times.
8.23 CERTIFICATION BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

It is the Contractors responsibility to engage a qualified, practicing Structural Engineer to certify the completed Works. The works
within this Contract to be certified include but are not limited to:
Retaining walls
Feature shelter
Compaction of Backfill
Certification by the Structural Engineer is required to meet or exceed the standards of the Local Government Authority.
Details of certification shall be submitted to the Superintendent upon or prior to submission of a payment claim for the completion
of each element.
8.24 AS-CONSTRUCTED SURVEY

Further to Clause 8.4 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall, at appropriate stages of the Works make access
to the Works available to a Surveyor engaged by the Contractor to provide As Constructed surveys and prepare Drawings for
submission to the relevant authorities. Refer to Section C: GENERALLY for detailed requirements.
8.25 EXISTING SERVICES

Further to Clause 28 of the General Conditions of Contract, prior to commencing the Works on the Site, the Contractor shall obtain
a full set of Civil Earthworks and Roadworks and Services Drawings and familiarise themselves with the scope of the works
potentially impacting upon the works under this Contract. The Contractor shall make inquiries of all Service Authorities via Dial
before you Dig and determine the location of all services including upon adjacent sites. Furthermore, the Contractor shall engage
an authorised Service Locator to attend site and determine the depth of each service. These locations and depths shall be clearly
shown on the Site and on existing service Drawings and prominently displayed in the Contractors site office. The Contractors
workforce shall be made aware of the locations of all services and the need for protection. Services shown on the landscape plans
are indicative only.
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to existing fencing, drainage structures, telephone and
power lines, water mains and services and/or other improvement during the performance of the Works. Any damage caused by the
Contractor shall be made good by the Contractor at the expense of the Contractor or the Superintendent shall arrange for such
damage to be made good by others and for the costs involved to be deducted from payments due to the Contractor. The Contractor
shall establish what services or improvements exist or are under construction at the Site of the Works.
Any damage caused by the Contractor to any existing services shall be notified immediately to the Superintendent and to the Service
Authorities or persons concerned.
Negligence by the Contractor in managing and supervising the protection of services shall be sufficient cause for the Superintendent
to direct the Contractor to remove relevant persons from the Site or from any activity connected with the Works, in accordance with
Clause 26 of the General Conditions.
8.26 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Further to Clause 33 of the General Conditions of Contract, if at any time during the progress of the works, plant or equipment
appear to the Superintendent to be insufficient, inefficient or inappropriate to secure the quality of work required, or the proper rates
of progress, the Superintendent may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency, improve their character, augment their number,
or to substitute plant or equipment as the case may be. And the Contractor must conform to such orders.
Failure by the Superintendent to demand such variations or additions shall not relive the Contractor of its obligations to secure the
quality of the work and the rate of progress necessary to complete the work within the time required by the Contract and to the
requirement of the Contract.

8.27 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
Further to Clause 30 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall obtain guarantees as specified in the Contract The
Contractor shall provide warranties for the works except where this is not reasonably possible and where he has so notified the
Superintendent in writing before the work of the relevant Sub-Contractor has been processed.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Principal shall have the benefit of the guarantees including any guarantees specified in the
Contract that are to be obtained by Sub-Contractors of the Contractor. As soon as possible after Practical Completion and before
the issue of the Final Certificate the Contractor shall produce such specified warranties or equivalent warranties to be effectively
transferred or issued directly in favour of the Principal so that thereafter the warrantors shall be directly responsible to the Principal.
Unless otherwise specified, guarantee periods shall begin on the Date of Practical Completion.
8.28 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY

Further to Clause 15 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall:
at its own cost provide all things and take all measures necessary to protect people and property on
or adjacent to the Site;
prevent nuisance and unreasonable noise and disturbance.
ensure the safety of all traffic on the Site and
be responsible for any injury, accident or damage arising from the failure of the Contractor to take
precautions or perform its obligations under Clause 15 of the General Conditions of Contract.
Without limiting the generality of the Contractors obligations, they include the provision of barricades, guards, fencing, temporary
roads, footpaths, warning signs, lighting, watching traffic flagging, safety helmets and clothing, removal of obstructions and
protection of services.
If the Contractor or the employees or agents of the Contractor damage property, including but not limited to public utilities and
services and property on or adjacent to the Site, the Contractor shall promptly make good the damage and pay any compensation
which the law requires the Contractor to pay.
If the Contractor fails to comply with an obligation under this Clause, the Principal may, in addition to any other remedy, arrange for
others to perform the obligation on the Contractors behalf and the cost incurred by the Principal shall be a debt due from the
Contractor to the Principal.
8.29 SAFETY PLAN

Further to Clause 15 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall comply with the Occupational Safety and Health
Act 1984 (the Act) and the Occupational Safety and Health Regulations 1996 (the Regulations). The Contractor shall also comply
with any amendments that may be made to the Act and Regulations from time to time.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring that wherever practicable, its employees and those of its Sub-Contractors
are not exposed to hazards. The Contractor shall ensure that all employees are suitably trained and qualified to carry out the Work
under the Contract, and that all work permits have been obtained before the commencement of work. The Contractor shall at all
times use proper and safe plant and equipment and to ensure that all employees using the equipment are adequately trained,
instructed and supervised in the safe operation of the equipment.
The Contractor shall within 2 weeks of the Date of Possession of Site submit to the Superintendent a Safety Plan in accordance
with the Act and Regulations noted above. This shall cover but is not limited to:
Training, Operation and Requirements of employees operating on site

Training, Operation and Requirements of Sub-Contractors operating on site
Training, Operation and Requirements of Plant and Machinery operating on site
Reporting procedures
Risk management
Liaison and co-ordination of Safety procedures with other Contractors on Site
Protocols for dealing with service providers and Government Agencies
Emergency Response Procedures
The Contractor shall submit a report once a fortnight (as a minimum) on all safety matters to the Superintendent.
The Principal has the right to conduct safety and health audits. Safety and health audits may also be applied to Sub-Contractors,
where applicable. The Superintendent and the Principals Safety and Health Officer shall be entitled to inspect all registers, reports
and certificates required by statute to be kept by the Contractor in respect of safety and health matters applicable to the Contract.
A copy of all accident reports or reports of dangerous occurrences occurring in relation to the Contract shall be provided to the
Superintendent and the Principals Safety and Health Co-ordinator as soon as practicable.

Prior to the commencement date, the Contractor shall provide to the Superintendent and the Principals Safety and Health Co-
ordinator, details of all hazardous substances to be brought on site to be used for the purpose of the execution of the work under
the Contract.
The Superintendent has the right to suspend the carrying out of the whole or part of the Works under the Contract if in the opinion
of Superintendent; the Contractor fails to provide for the protection or safety of any person or property.
The Contractor shall note that at certain times during the construction their work may involve construction within a site under the
contractual possession of another Contractor (Main Contractor). It is a requirement of this Contract that all personnel complete a
safety induction in accordance with the Safety Plan of the Main Contractor prior to commencing works. The Contractor shall ensure
all of their personnel including Sub-Contractors and delivery personnel are inducted to the site prior to entering.
The Contractor shall liaise with the Main Contractor and co-ordinate their own works and personnel in order to minimise conflict and
maximise safety and efficiency of operation.
The Principal has compiled a Work Health and Safety (WHS) Handbook for Contractors (WHS.GUI.1) that provides contractors with
instruction as to the Principals requirements for pre mobilisation and notification requirements. Contractors are required to comply
with the requirements of this handbook as part of the obligations under this Contract. The Work Health and Safety (WHS) Handbook
for Contractors is available for collection/review from the Principal.
The Contractor shall comply with the Principals Safety Management Plan. The Safety Management Plan at the date of this Tender
is available for collection/review from the Principal.
8.30 THE SITE CIVIL PROTECTION/ADJACENT WORKS

Further to Clause 27 of the General Conditions of Contract, access onto and around the Site shall be as approved by the
Superintendent.
Further to Clause 15, 16 and 17 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain barricades,
guards, fencing, temporary roadways, footpaths, signs and lighting. It shall provide and maintain all watching and traffic flagging
lawfully required by any public or other authority or necessary for the protection of the Works or of other property or for the safety
and convenience of the public and others and shall remove same when no longer required.
The Contractor shall avoid obstruction or damage to roadways and footpaths, drains and water courses and public utilities and other
services on or adjacent to the Site which are visible, or the location of which can be ascertained by the Contractor from the
appropriate authority or from the Contract.
Further to Clause 28 of the General Conditions of Contract, where the Works include extensions of or are adjacent to existing works,
the Contractor shall be responsible for making the proper junction between the sections of work and for making good any damage
to the adjacent or existing works. The Contractor shall ensure that the adjacent or existing works conform in level and location with
those shown on the Drawings before commencing any work on the Site.
The Contractor shall remove any obstruction immediately and make good any damage at its own cost; in default of which the
Principal may employ and pay others to execute the work and recover the cost as a debt due to the Principal from the Contractor
under the Contract.
The Contractor shall avoid interference with or damage to property on or adjacent to the Site and shall provide temporary protection
and shall repair and reinstate all damage caused thereto by it either directly or indirectly.
The Contractor shall prevent nuisance to the owners, tenants or occupiers or properties adjacent to the Site and the public generally.
The Contractor shall be responsible at its own cost for all footpath and other deposits or bonds required by statutory authorities.
8.31 ADVISORY NOTICES

In accordance with EPA and Local Government requirements based on the classification of the site the Contractor shall issue
Advisory Notices to adjoining land occupiers, the local authority and the EPA at least 48 hours before site works commence. The
notice shall include details for the contractor, consulting engineer, Contract period and site classification. The notices shall be in a
format approved by the Superintendent prior to issue.
8.32 PROCEDURE FOLLOWING DUST RELATED COMPLAINT

Following receipt of a dust related complaint by either the Contractor or Superintendent, assessment and procedure to be followed
shall be in accordance with Appendix 3 of the EPA Guidelines. If it is the Superintendent's opinion that wind borne material has
been deposited outside the site as a consequence of the Contractors failure to undertake adequate control measures the
Superintendent may direct the Contractor to remove this material within 24 hours at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall
pay for the rectification of damage resulting from the wind borne material.

8.33 DILAPIDATION SURVEYS
Dilapidation surveys will be conducted on existing buildings in the vicinity of the works by a third party qualified assessor, appointed
by the Contractor. The surveys will be conducted prior to works commencing on site. Reports from the dilapidation surveys will be
issued to the Principal and property owner prior to the commencement of works in the relevant area.
The extent of the dilapidation surveys will be agreed by the Principal and the Contractors Representative, however, direction will
be provided by the Superintendent in order to help identify the properties at risk of potential damage.
Following the dilapidation surveys, a risk assessment will be conducted for all the buildings surveyed. Where the assessed risk of
damage to the building is high, monitoring of vibration will be put in place prior to works commencing, and, protective measures
installed to preserve the building.
8.34 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

Further to Clause 15 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall submit full details of proposed traffic management
measures to the Superintendent as part of its Safety Management Plan. Management procedures are to be in accordance with the
relevant Australian Standards and adhere to Commonwealth, State and Local Government regulations, policy and/or guidelines.
The Contractor shall construct the Works with the least possible interference to public traffic. Public roads and driveways shall
remain open at all times for the safe movement of traffic. In addition, the Contractor shall maintain the existing road as necessary
for this purpose.
Where the amount of dust raised by the traffic or by construction works causes a hazard to public traffic, then the Contractor shall
take action, such as watering, to eliminate the hazard. In dry conditions, watering shall be undertaken a minimum of four times per
day. The cost for such action shall be included under the lump sum cost for the Contract.
The Contractors plant and equipment shall not cross over existing roads during construction operations without prior approval of
the Superintendent as to the proposed methods of traffic control including flagmen.
The Contractor shall not direct public traffic onto the completed Works from the existing road or sidetracks without obtaining prior
written approval from the Superintendent.
Further to Clause 15 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall supply signs, cones, lights and any other necessary
equipment and erect and maintain same in good condition in accordance with local authority requirements the relevant Australian
Standards or as instructed by the Superintendent. Maintenance of signs includes washing to ensure night visibility.
Works such as trenches or spoil heaps and other hazards shall be individually signed and barricaded at all times and equipped with
warning lamps at night notwithstanding that the area in question may not be open to traffic at the time. All sections being widened
or excavated shall have, at all times, the edge of the widening or excavation clearly indicated by delineators and steady amber
lights.
8.35 POLLUTION AND ENVIRONMENT

Operations
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall conduct its operations in a manner
that will minimise damage to the environment on the Site and minimise pollution on the Site and the Contractor shall comply with
the requirements from time to time of all Acts (including Codes and Laws) of Parliament (whether State or Federal) and with the
lawful requirements of public, municipal and other authorities, including the Environmental Protection Authority, in any way regarding
pollution.
Noise and Vibration

Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall at all times take adequate measures
to control noise and vibration on site. The Contractor shall comply with all statutory requirements relating to control of noise and
vibration levels on site and take all necessary precautions to minimise nuisance from noise and vibration and ensure that all Sub-
Contractors observe similar care.
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all monitoring in accordance with local government requirements and associated
costs on the instructions of the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall arrange its operations and shall provide silencing and or damping equipment to its plant, at its own expense,
to whatever extent is necessary to satisfy the requirements of the Local Authority Health Department in relation to the sound and
vibration level arising from the Contractors operations near the boundaries of existing occupied properties.
Soil Erosion
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall take all proper precautions to prevent
soil erosion from any land used or occupied by the Contractor in the execution of work under the contract.
Stockpiles

Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the height of stockpiles shall be kept to less than 3 metres
high. Stockpiles include topsoil material and trench excavation. As with all other disturbed ground, stockpiles shall be kept wet
down. The Contractor may wish to give consideration to the use of temporary stabilisation measures at the Contractors expense.
No Discharge
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, no rubbish, litter, waste, oil, bilge water or other
pollutants shall be discharged or allowed to escape from the Contractors equipment or from its Sub-Contractors equipment. The
Contractor shall take all reasonable measures including instructing its employees and its Sub-Contractors in such matters and
shall ensure that its employees observe and perform the requirements of this Clause. All debris, spoil, rubbish or materials shall
be suitably contained and covered in vehicles during transportation to or from the site to prevent spillage or contamination of
adjoining and other areas of property. The Contractor shall maintain vehicles, wheels and tracks in a suitable clean condition to
prevent transfer of mud onto adjacent streets or other areas. All site refuse (including foodstuffs) shall be handled and disposed of
in accordance with the requirements of relevant statutes and to the approval of the Superintendent.
Smoking on Construction Sites

Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall at all times ensure that all workmen
and visitors on the construction site comply with the following policy on smoking. In respect of construction sites, smoking is
prohibited:
In site offices, lunchrooms or enclosed toilet facilities; and

Inside existing premises that are designated no smoking areas.
Fire Control
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contactor shall comply with all the conditions of the
Bush Fires Act 1954 (as amended).
Flora and Fauna

Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor is to note that it is an offence under the
Wildlife Conservation Act 1950 to remove or disturb Rare and Declared Flora or Fauna populations unless written permission is
obtained from the Minister for the Department of Environment and Conservation.
Aboriginal Sites
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, should the presence of a site of possible significance be
discovered, the Contractor shall notify the Superintendent and the Department of Indigenous Affairs and immediately cease work
within the area. The Contractor is to note that it is an offence under the WA Aboriginal Heritage Act 1972 to interfere with any
Aboriginal site unless written permission is obtained from the Minister for Indigenous Affairs.
8.36 DUST AND WIND BLOWN SAND

Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall take all necessary measures to
prevent dust and sand from being lifted by wind and carried onto land outside the site of the works.
The site shall be assessed in accordance with the EPA Guidelines and the risk of dust nuisance rated accordingly. Provisions
including contingency arrangements for each classification are given in the EPA Dust Control Guidelines and it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to be aware of the required provisions and be capable of implementing both the provisions and
contingency arrangements as directed by the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall accept responsibility for preventing aeolian movement of sand, dust or soil from within the site of the works
and shall indemnify the Principal against any claims which may arise as a result of aeolian movement of sand, dust or soil from
within the site of the works however valid those claims may be. The Contractor shall arrange its operations so that existing
vegetation and topsoil are preserved in all areas except those on which fill is to be placed on or in which excavation is to take
place or those areas which are defined in this Specification as areas for occupation or access.
Any over-clearing shall be reinstated by the Contractor with vegetation of similar species and maturity, at its expense. All access
tracks and other disturbed areas shall be regularly watered to prevent wind erosion. The Contractor shall on request, within 24
hours, remove from public roads and other land outside the Site sand or dust wherever the Superintendent considers the sand or
dust originated from the site of the works.
Where a resident has made a complaint of dust nuisance, the Contractor shall contact the affected party within two (2) hours of
being notified of the complaint. The Contractor shall forward a report to the Superintendent within the subsequent two (2) hours
detailing:
The nature of the complaint

The Contractors assessment of the complaint
The Contractors proposed course of action

In the event that complaints are received from neighbouring properties in respect to airborne dust, the Superintendent shall
determine whether the Contractor is and has been taking appropriate action, and further determine whether the Contractor shall
immediately initiate any or all of the following at the request of the Superintendent.
Wind Fencing
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, wind fencing (1800 high) shall be erected at the
Contractors cost prior to the commencement of any further works and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction
period that follows. Suitable material such as hessian cloth/shade cloth shall be affixed to the fencing along its full length and
height. Structural adequacy of the fence shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor at no cost to the Principal shall immediately repair any damage that occurs to the wind fencing.
The Contractor shall also allow for removing any sand that accumulates at the foot of the wind fencing, placing it within the site as
directed by the Superintendent. These actions may need to be undertaken on a regular basis. The Contractor shall remove and
dispose of wind fencing at the completion of the project.
Stabilisation
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, when instructed by the Superintendent, the Contractor
shall carry out stabilisation of disturbed areas within 48 hours.
Suspension of the Works

Further to Clause 15,16,17,34 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, in the event that extreme weather conditions make
the control of wind-blown sand difficult, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Superintendent. The Superintendent shall
determine whether the Contractor is and has been taking appropriate action, and further determine whether earth working
operations should be suspended.
Where such action for suspension does not mean loss of greater than 4 hours per day, the costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor may claim the cost of equipment stand down beyond 4 hours per day. The duration of the suspension shall be
ended immediately upon the Superintendents instruction.
Failure to Comply
Further to Clause 34 of the General Conditions of Contract, where the Superintendent at its sole discretion determines the Contractor
has not been taking appropriate action or work as required under the Contract to minimise dust nuisance and the Contractor further
fails to initiate actions or work as requested by the Superintendent within 24 hours including additional work as requested by the
Superintendent shall entitle the Superintendent without any further notification to the Contractor to arrange for the work or initiate
actions. The cost of such work or actions including time required by the Superintendent in organising the work or actions shall be
deducted from the Contract Sum.
Water Carts
Further to Clause 15,16,17 and 39 of the General Conditions of Contract, sufficient water carts and adequate volumes of water shall
be allowed for in the Tender Sum and used during the Contract to keep all disturbed areas wet and shall be available for a minimum
of 10 hours per day, including Saturdays & Sundays. The water carts shall be able to traverse all areas of the site, and be of not
less than 10,000 litres capacity per 5 hectares of disturbed site and shall be fitted with a pump and automated spray to damp down
disturbed areas and stockpiles. Non disturbed areas within the site boundary that are the source of windblown sand are also to be
watered down. Where adequate water carts have not been provided and operated at the request of the Superintendent within 4
hours an amount of $1,000.00 including GST shall be deducted from the Contract Sum per day of non-compliance to the
Superintendents direction. The method of refilling shall be such that at least 1 water cart is in operation at all times. At least one
water cart is to remain full at the end of each day so that it may be immediately used the following morning.
8.37 CHEMICAL INFORMATION

Further to Clause 29 of the General Conditions of Contract, the use of chemicals specified or required during the currency of this
contract shall comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act 1984 (the Act) and the Occupational Safety and Health
Regulations 1996 (the Regulations) concerning information on chemical substances.
The Contractor shall ensure manufacturers, importers and suppliers of chemical substances for use on the works, are responsible
for providing information on those substances to be used, refer to section 23(3) of the Act. Copies of all information supplied shall
be kept on site. The Contractor is responsible for passing on information supplied by manufacturers, importers and suppliers of
chemical substances to workers on site, refer to section 19(1)(B) of the Act.
8.38 CLEAN-UP OF POLLUTION

Further to Clause 38 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall as soon as practical and at its own expense clean
up any pollution caused by it or its Sub-Contractors in the course of performing the work under the Contract.
8.39 INCLEMENT WEATHER

Further to Clause 16 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, provide all plant, materials and
labour necessary to protect the works from damage from inclement weather (Inclement weather shall be defined as that which is wet
or with temperature in excess of 37.5 degrees centigrade, and over the average for a particular month, in accordance with the records

of the Perth Bureau of Meteorology). Low points or excavations where water may collect shall be kept thoroughly drained by
mechanical or gravitational means. Drains or water courses utilised for this purpose shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent.
The Contractor shall prevent, in so far as reasonably possible, any materials entering any gully, manhole or pipe, and shall remove
from the drainage system any materials from any source which may be deposited in the drainage system by any agency up to the
date of Practical Completion.
8.40 LOCAL AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS

Further to Clause 14 of the General Conditions of Contract, all work shall meet the requirements of the Local Authority and other
relevant authorities who will inspect the Works from time to time to ascertain whether the standard of work meets their respective
requirements.
Local Authority is:

City of Wanneroo
23 Dundebar Road,
WANNEROO WA 6065
Ph: 9405 5000
8.41 INDUSTRIAL AWARDS, DISPUTES AND PAYMENTS

Further to Clause 14 of the General Conditions of Contract, notwithstanding anything herein mentioned to the contrary:
With respect to all work done in Western Australia under the Contract, the Contractor shall observe, perform and
comply in all material respects with all relevant industrial agreements and orders to competent Courts or Industrial
Tribunals applicable to the work to be done under the Contract.

Failure by the Contractor to comply with sub-clause (i) hereof shall entitle the Principal by notice in writing to the
Contractor to forthwith terminate the Contract but without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Principal.
Disputes
The Contractor shall resolve any industrial disputes that may arise during the course of construction for any reason, with no additional
cost being borne by the Principal. For the purposes of Clause 35.5 of the General Conditions, only industrial actions encompassing the
state-wide operations of the affected industry shall be considered.
Payments
The Contractor shall allow for any site allowance payments and this amount, if any, shall be included in the Contract Lump Sum.
The Contractor shall make payment of the required levy to the Building and Construction Industry Training Fund. Payment shall be
made prior to the commencement of any construction work, and evidence of payment provided to the Superintendent. The Contractor
shall be responsible for any penalty charges, which may be incurred due to late payment. These payments shall be included in the
Contract Lump Sum.
emerge associates
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION C
emerge associates
9 GENERALLY
9.1 LOCATION OF WORKS AND ACCESS
The works area is located at `Catalina Beach Estate, Mindarie`. The site shall be accessed off Aviator Boulevard. Refer to landscape
plans for site access details. Limit all direct access from major roads where possible.
The Contractor shall advise the names and contact phone numbers (mobile) of all workers and Sub-Contractors working on site for
the duration of the works.
All site delivery areas shall be as approved by the Superintendent prior to use and construction. The Contractor shall conform to all
relevant Traffic Management standards and practices as specified and/or relevant Australian Standards.
Deliveries, access and transport shall be confined to standard working hours.
9.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

The works shall include the provision of all materials, labour, equipment and cartage as necessary for the due and proper completion
of the Works comprising, but not limited to, the following:
EARTHWORKS AND CLEARANCE

BULK EARTHWORKS
DEWATERING AS REQUIRED
RETAINING & STRUCTURAL WALLS
IRRIGATION PUMP STATION
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
STONEWORK
COMPOSITE DECK / STEEL BOARDWALKS
PEDESTRIAN COMPOSITE DECK BRIDGE
STEEL SHADE STRUCTURES
CONCRETE AND/OR SEGMENTAL UNIT PAVING
SOILWORKS AND FINAL GRADING
SOFT LANDSCAPING
FURNITURE CUSTOM & TYPICAL
PLAY SOFTFALL & PLAY ELEMENTS
COMPLETE AFTERCARE AND MAINTENANCE OF ALL LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION WORKS IN STAGE 25
THROUGHOUT THE SUBSEQUENT MAINTENANCE PERIOD (I.E., FOR THE PERIOD FROM THE END OF
THE CONSOLIDATION PERIOD FOR EACH STAGE UNTIL 12 MONTHS AFTER THE DATE OF PRACTICAL
COMPLETION FOR STAGE 25); AND,
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE TO STAGE 25 WORKS THROUGHOUT THE SUBSEQUENT 21 MONTH
MAINTENANCE PERIOD PRIOR TO HANDOVER TO COUNCIL.
COMPLETE AFTERCARE AND MAINTENANCE OF ALL LANDSCAPE WORKS (INCLUDING IRRIGATION AND
TURF) THROUGHOUT THE 13 WEEK CONSOLIDATION PERIOD.
9.3 WORKS BY OTHERS

The Works shall be undertaken in conjunction with works carried out by others as part of the project particularly, but not limited to:
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND SERVICES

ROAD CONSTRUCTION
STREET LIGHTING INSTALLATION
The Tenderer for the Contract shall be deemed to have taken into account this coordination role in its Lump Sum price. The
Contractor shall cooperate with others and allow free access by others as required or ordered by the Superintendent to enable those
other works to be completed.
The design, supply & installation of the Custom Play Tower is by others. The scope of the Custom Play Tower works by others
includes:
DESIGN, DETAIL DOCUMENTATION & APPROVALS OF A CUSTOM PLAY TOWER PER THE SPECIFICATION
SUPPLY & INSTALL OF THE CUSTOM PLAY TOWER
CUSTOM PLAY TOWER TO BE NOVATED IN LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOS PACKAGE & CONTRACTOR TO
INCLUDE PROFIT & ATTENDANCE FOR ALL COORDINATION PURPOSES.
SUCCESSFUL CUSTOM PLAY TOWER TENDERER TO REPORT AS A SUB-CONTRACTOR TO LANDSCAPE
CONTRACTOR
emerge associates GENERALLY

9.4 NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS / SUPPLIERS
Further to Clause 10 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Principal has nominated the following Sub-Contractors / Suppliers.
The Contractor shall liaise with each Sub-Contractor / Supplier for all coordination of their works relative to other works taking place.
ITEM NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTOR / SUPPLIER
X Custom Play Tower Subject to separate tender 06/2016
Before selecting Sub-Contractors from the above list the Tenderer must carry out their own assessment and satisfy themselves
that the subcontract companies selected have all the necessary abilities to complete the work including technical, management and
financial ability.
9.5 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY PRINCIPAL

Further to Clause 18 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Principal shall supply the following materials. The Contractor shall
liaise with each Sub-Contractor / Supplier for all coordination of works relative to the supply of the materials listed.
ITEM NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION DETAILS OF LOCATION/DELIVERY
Nil Nil Include name and all contact details

9.6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
All elements requiring structural design, i.e., footings, walls and all structures, shall be detailed and certified by a qualified, practicing
Structural Engineer engaged by either the Principal or the Contractor as scheduled below.
ITEM NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION STRUCTURAL DESIGN

Composite decking, pedestrian bridge &
1.0 By Principal
associated balustrades
2.0 Limestone & concrete walls By Principal
3.0 Steel shade structures By Principal
4.0 Custom Furniture By Principal
5.0 Iron filter screen posts By Principal
6.0 Custom Play Platform & Balustrade By Principal
7.0 Custom Concrete Play Walls By Principal
8.0 Feature Windsocks By Contractor
9.0 Custom Play Tower By Contractor
The Drawings supplied at Tender are for design guidance only. Where indicated in above schedule, the Contractor shall submit
final details to the Superintendent first in draft and then followed in the form of structurally certified documentation and shop
drawings. Approval from the Superintendent is to be granted prior to submission by the Contractor to Council for building
licence/Permit approval and construction.
The Contractor is also entitled to review the Drawings prepared by the Principals structural engineer and to amend details to improve
the efficiency of construction. However, all revised structural elements are to be then certified by a qualified, practicing structural
engineer engaged by the Contractor. Revised and certified details are to be submitted to the Superintendent for approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that Council Approvals and Building Licence/Permits have been received for all works prior to
9.7 AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY AND DRAWINGS

In addition to the requirement for irrigation, electrical and similar As Constructed drawings as specified in the relevant sections of
this document, the Contractor shall engage a licensed surveyor to undertake As Constructed surveys in accordance with the
requirements of the current version of A-Spec Digital Data Specification - Consultant/Developer Specifications for the Delivery of
Digital Data to Local Government and Authorities as applicable to the state of Western Australia and comprising the following:
D-Spec - Stormwater Drainage Specification

R-Spec Road Specification
O-Spec Open Space Specification
B-Spec Buildings Specification
T-Spec Telecommunications Specification
Where landscaped areas are to be handed over to the Local Authority, the As Constructed survey shall record all information
strictly in accordance with the current revision of the O-Spec standard for Open Space together with relevant sections of D-Spec
and R-Spec, as applicable.
In order to comply with the requirements of O-Spec, the surveyor engaged by the Contractor shall be responsible for provision of
all services as itemised in the section titled: Western Australia Responsibility of the Developer, as applicable to a surveyor
engaged by the Developer.
Copies of the above-mentioned specifications can be obtained from the A-Spec website: www.dspec.com.au
9.8 STAGING AND PROGRAMME

The Contractors attention is drawn to the requirement to separate pricing into Separable Portions. All portions of work are to occur
simultaneously to the described programmes.
9.9 LIMITATIONS ON ACCESS

The Contractors attention is drawn to Works by Others and the limitations on access available.

9.10 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
The Contractor shall establish, implement and manage a Contract specific Traffic Management Plan (TMP) complying with the
Contract, the Main Roads Western Australia (MRWA)s Code of Practice Traffic Management for Works on Roads, Australian
Standard AS 1742.3 - 2009, the Occupational Safety and Health Act 1984 and the Occupational Safety and Health Regulations
1996.
The Contractor shall include for all costs associated with the preparation and implementation of the TMP, as required to implement
the Landscape Works.

10 SITEWORKS, SETOUT AND EARTHWORKS
10.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
This Specification covers all works included but not limited to:
Mobilisation and site establishment

Site setout
General site clearance
Earthworks, trimming and fine grading
Works around existing trees
Cutting and filling earthworks
Sourcing of sand fill
Transportation of the sand to site.
Placement and compaction of sand fill
Removal of plant and equipment upon completion ofworks
Supervision, inspection and testing
10.2 STANDARDS
All equipment, materials and workmanship supplied by the Contractor for incorporation into the Works shall comply with the
respective Australian Standard applicable which is current as at the date of close of Tenders.
Where an Australian Standard is nominated in this documentation, it is provided as a guide to the Contractor for the selection of
appropriate materials and/or work practices which are required by the Principal. Where a nominated Standard or Interim Standard
has been revised, amended and/or designated, or is not current as at the date of close of Tenders, the applicable Standard shall
be the Australian Standard which is current as at the date of close of Tenders.
Materials and workmanship shall conform to the current Australian Standards, where such Standard exists, including the following:
AS 1289 Methods of Testing Soils for EngineeringPurposes

AS1726 Geotechnical Site Investigations
AS3798 Guidelines on Earthworks for Commercial and Residential Developments
WA GOV Construction Safety Act 1972 and Regulations1973
AS 2436- Guide to Noise Control of Construction Maintenance and Demolition Sites.
10.3 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FENCE

Within five (5) working days of the Date of Possession of the site, the Contractor shall erect temporary protective fencing to the
perimeter of all Public Open Space areas and to any other areas to be landscaped (verges, drainage basins and the like) that might
be vulnerable to damage as described below.
The temporary fencing shall comply with the requirements of applicable Safety Plans and shall be sufficiently robust and secure to
prevent the following activities occurring within the protected area for the duration of the Contract:
creation and use of informal vehicle access routes;

vehicle parking;
storage of plant, equipment and materials;
dumping of waste; and
any other activities that are likely to be detrimental to the health of existing trees to be retained and/or might cause
damage to undisturbed areas.
The temporary fencing shall be located to protect the whole of the Public Open Space/verge/basin areas on alignments to the
approval of the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the fence as an effective barrier at all times throughout the Contract.
10.4 DUST, NOISE, VIBRATION AND OTHER ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

Refer to Section B PRELIMINARIES.
10.5 WORK NEAR EXISTING TREES

Protection
Protect trees specified or shown to be retained from damage by site works. Take necessary precautions as described below.
Harmful Materials
Do not store or otherwise place bulk materials and harmful materials under or near trees. Do not place spoil from excavations
against tree trunks, even for short periods. Prevent wind-blown materials such as cement form harming trees and plants.
Damage
emerge associates siteworks, setout and earthworks

Prevent damage to tree bark. Do not attach stays, guys and the like to trees.
Work under trees

Do not add or remove topsoil within the drip line of trees. If it is necessary to excavate within the drip line, use hand methods such
that root systems are preserved intact and undamaged. Open up excavations under tree canopies for as short a period as possible.
Roots
Do not cut tree roots exceeding 50mm diameter unless approved by the Superintendent. Where it is necessary to cut tree roots,
use means such that the cutting does not unduly disturb the remaining root system. Immediately after cutting, apply a bituminous
fungicidal sealant to the cut surface to prevent the incursion of rot or disease.
Backfilling
Do not backfill around tree trunks to a height greater than 300mm above the original ground surface. Immediately after backfilling,
thoroughly water the root zone surrounding the tree.
Compacted Ground
Avoid compaction of the ground under trees. The parking of plant and storage of equipment under trees to be retained is not
permitted.
Australian Standards
All works associated with the protection of existing trees shall comply with Australian Standard;
AS 4970 Protection of trees on development sites
10.6 RETENTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION

Protection of existing vegetation
The Contractor shall note that great importance is placed on retention of any natural or significant vegetation in its current state,
and thus the Contractor shall limit the movement of plant and equipment and stockpiling of materials to within the limit of the works
to be cleared.
The penalties for significant damage (as determined by the Superintendent) or unauthorised clearing are as follows:
Type of Existing Vegetation Penalty

Heritage tree (listed by State Heritage Office or Cost of comparable replacement
Local Authority as having heritage value)
Significant tree (8.0m and greater in either total $20,000 or the cost of replacement,
height or canopy diameter) whichever is the greater value
Medium tree (4.0 8.0m in total height) $10,000 each
Minor tree (1.0m 4.0m in total height) $1,000
Shrubs $20/square metre
Existing Bushland $100/square metre
Existing Turf $100/square metre
For the purposes of this Specification a tree is all trees with a 200mm diameter trunk and greater, and one metre or greater in total
height.
Contractors should note that if clearing works extend beyond the prescribed limits without the written authorisation of the
Superintendent, these costs will apply and be borne solely by the Contractor by reduction in monies payable under the Contract.
If the Contractor believes that for construction purposes, additional movement areas are required in the form of haul roads and/or
access roads, they shall submit details of the proposed location and extent of these roads to the Superintendent for approval prior
to their construction.
In addition to the above penalties the Contractor shall undertake to co-ordinate, manage and achieve any and all necessary
approvals in relation to protecting and /or the rectification of damage to the satisfaction of the Superintendent, Local Authority and
relevant agencies.
10.7 CLEARING AROUND EXISTING TREES TO BE RETAINED

The Contractor shall undertake to remove all understorey vegetation from in between closely located existing trees to be retained
as noted on the Drawings. In difficult to access areas between groups of existing trees, removal of grass, weeds and other
deleterious material shall occur by hand or mechanical means as appropriate.
Note: No damage to trees to be retained is to be caused either above or below ground.
Arborist
When there is no option but to work in the immediate vicinity of existing trees that are to be retained, the Contractor is to organise
for a qualified Arborist to be on site to oversee these works.

The Contractor is to engage, at the Contractors expense, a qualified, experienced and reputable Arborist to oversee the demolition
works in close proximity to any particular tree to be retained. The Arborist is to be contacted a minimum 3 weeks prior to the
demolition works commencing to ensure appropriate scheduling of works.
10.8 VEGETATION REMOVAL

The Contractor shall note that trees to be removed and/or retained shall be tagged on site as follows. The Principal, Contractor and
Superintendent shall agree to either;
Tag trees to be retained, OR

Tag trees to be removed, whichever is the lesser.
The Contractor shall not remove any trees or vegetation without seeking absolute clarity from the Superintendent in writing as to
which option above has implemented.
All tree removal shall comply with the relevant Australian Standards and accepted industry standards, particularly but not limited to
safety, adjoining property, insurance and pedestrian and traffic control. The Contractor shall be liable for any and all costs
associated with damage or injury resulting from tree removal.
Grub out stumps and roots over 75mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500mm below Sub-grade in paved areas or below finished
surface in unpaved areas. Backfill grub holes with suitable spoil from excavations compacted in layers to the density of the
surrounding undisturbed soil.
All debris together with fallen timber shall be loaded, hauled and disposed of in a tip in compliance with statutory requirements or
may if instructed be dumped as directed by the Superintendent.
10.9 WEED ERADICATION

All weed growth shall be eliminated throughout the landscape areas prior to commencement of any soil preparation or planting or
grassing works. Weed eradication shall be undertaken by use of an approved non-residual herbicide such as Roundup or
equivalent. Apply such herbicide only on windless days strictly in accordance with the manufacturers written directions and any
relevant health regulations.
Following the application of the herbicide, the treated areas shall be left undisturbed for a minimum of seven (7) days ingestion
period prior to undertaking any further work in such areas.
10.10 STAGING OF VEGETATION REMOVAL

At the Superintendents discretion the removal of vegetation may be staged in order to temporarily retain shade, screening, habitat,
buffers and the like until future construction works occur.
The Contractor shall not remove any vegetation until instruction from the Superintendent in writing is provided as to the extent of
staged clearing.
10.11 TRANSPLANT RELOCATIONS

No existing trees to be transplanted/relocated as part of this contract.
10.12 SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND INSPECTION

The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out the works from the points given on the Drawings and for constructing the works
to the required line and level.
The Contractor will provide:
White painted timber stakes to define the position of trees, paths, paving, garden beds and other construction
elements as specified and or on the Drawings
Bench marks for reduction of levels (if required)
Stakes to define lot boundaries
Setting out shall be approved by the Superintendent prior to the commencement of construction.
Permanent survey pegs that have been damaged or moved during construction shall be reinstated by a Licensed Surveyor
nominated or approved by the Superintendent and the cost of such work shall be paid for in full by the Contractor.
Should survey pegs or marks be in the line of construction operations, the Contractor shall advise the Superintendent prior to
commencing work to enable their temporary removal or relocation of the works. Co-ordination shall include necessary approvals
from Main Roads Department, Council, Service Authorities, other Contractors and the like.
Due to the nature of landscape construction works, minor changes in the layout of the works may be instigated by the
Superintendent on site.

The Contractor shall allow in their price for changes in the setout of the works. A variation to the contract shall only be issued where
any changes results in a change in the Bill of Quantities.
The Contractor shall check horizontal and vertical values of all established or identified benchmarks, reference marks and boundary
and location pegs and compare them with the values and measurements given on the Contract drawings and with other information
and data such as pre-cal plans that may be made available by the Superintendent to the Contractor from time to time. In case the
values given differ from the values established in the field, the work shall not proceed until the Superintendents approval has been
given. Copies of the recorded survey and setting out information shall be made available to the Superintendent. For the avoidance
of doubt, the responsibility for set-out is the responsibility of the Contractor at all times.
10.13 PROTECTION OF SURVEY STATIONS

Survey stations and bench marks shall be preserved and adequately protected from disturbance for the duration of the Contract by
the Contractor.
Any disturbance of a survey station or bench mark shall be reported to the Superintendent without delay. The Contractor shall not
attempt to reinstate the station or mark without an instruction from the Superintendent and shall accept full liability for damage,
however caused.
10.14 PROJECT SURVEYOR

The Principal, through the Project Surveyor, will arrange for the following survey information to be provided:-
A copy of the pre-calculation plan, marked up to show the pegs placed and bench mark level information;
An electronic data set, for set-out by the Contractor.
It shall be the Contractors responsibility to re-establish, recover or transfer any of the above survey pegs which will be, or are,
disturbed in the course of construction.
The Contractor shall give the Project Surveyor 48 hours notice of when information is to be provided to the Contractor.
10.15 LEVELS AND ALIGNMENT

All levels shown on the Drawings refer to Australian Height Datum (AHD). Existing surface levels refer to the surface at the time of
survey. All vertical control for the work shall be established from the temporary bench marks provided by the Project Surveyor. It
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to set out accurately all work according to the Drawings or figured dimensions thereon.
Pipe and RCB drains, End Treatments, Access Chambers, Open Drains and all Earthworks shall be set out in accordance with the
alignments and levels shown on the working drawings. Setting out tolerances are:
Horizontal 0.020 m Vertical 0.005 m.
The concept of the works and the alignments (both vertical and horizontal) shown on the drawings shall not be altered in any way
without the prior approval of the Superintendent.
10.16 CLEARING
Unless otherwise specified or directed, remove all trees, logs, stumps, boulders, roots and scrub within the limits of clearing.
Demolish and dispose of existing fences, structures and slabs detailed to be removed. Grass and topsoil shall not be removed as
part of this initial clearing. All standing trees shall remain unless directed otherwise by the Superintendent. Give seven (7) days
notice of intention to clear any section of the works so that the Superintendent may determine the trees and plants not already
detailed within the limits of clearing which are to be preserved.
Grub out stumps and roots to a minimum depth of 500mm below Sub-grade in paved areas or below finished surface in unpaved
areas. Backfill grub holes with suitable spoil from excavations compacted in layers to the density of the surrounding undisturbed
soil. All equipment used for clearing shall be fitted with rakes/tines or similar equipment so that as little soil as possible is disturbed
and added to the vegetation stockpiles. No material from clearing is to be pushed beyond the limit of the site.
Cleared vegetation shall be mulched and stockpiled at an agreed site. Spoil from grubbing out; unsuitable material, uncontrolled fill
and rubbish etc shall be removed from site to an approved Local Authority tipping site at the Contractors expense.
Clearing and grubbing shall extend over the areas of the site shown by the limit of earthworks on the drawings. Limits of clearing
are defined as lines one metre outside the intersection of excavation or embankment slopes with the natural surface or the outside
limits of slope rounding together with any other limits detailed.
Existing access tracks, storage, laydown and borrow areas, or similar shall be kept in a condition to be agreed with the
Superintendent. Access tracks locations are to be agreed with the Superintendent prior to construction.

10.17 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
Unless otherwise permitted or directed, all debris resulting from clearing operations together with all lying and fallen timber and
rubbish shall be removed from the site. All cleared material removed from the site shall, unless required by the Contractor for other
purposes, be loaded, hauled, dumped and disposed of in a tip in compliance with statutory requirements.
The Superintendent may permit the disposal of boulders, concrete fragments and other non-combustible materials by burial within
the POS reserves outside paved areas. When buried, the tops of boulders, etc. shall be not less than 800mm below finished
surface.
The Superintendent may direct that boulders greater than 0.03 cubic metres in volume be stockpiled on site.
10.18 BULK EARTHWORKS

Definition: Bulk Earthworks is defined as being all operations including clearing, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil,
excavation, backfilling and compaction to achieve the bulk levels which shall be within a tolerance of +/- 100mm from finished
design level allowing for a Final Minor Trim to bring the levels to with +/- 10mm of design levels.
Where indicated on the Drawings Bulk Earthworks are to be undertaken as part of this Contract in accordance with the clauses set
out below
10.19 FINAL MINOR TRIM

Definition: Bulk Earthworks is defined as being all operations including clearing, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil,
excavation, backfilling and compaction to achieve the bulk levels which shall be within a tolerance of +/- 100mm from finished
design level allowing for a Final Minor Trim to bring the levels to with +/- 10mm of design levels.
10.20 EARTHWORKS - GENERALLY

The Contractors responsibility under this Contract shall extend to all works necessary to transform the existing levels as shown on
the Drawings to those shown as proposed levels on the Drawings. The Contractor shall complete the earthworks to this specification
and adhere to the tolerances as set out herein and as depicted in the drawings.
10.21 NOTICE
If the following are encountered, give notice immediately and obtain instructions before carrying out any further work in the affected
area:
Bad ground - Ground unsuitable for the purposes of the works, including fill liable to subsidence, ground containing
cavities, faults or fissures, contaminated ground and ground which is or becomes soft, wet or unstable.
Rock - refer to the clause below entitled Rock Excavation
Suspected Aboriginal or other artefacts
Underground springs or watercourses,
Unknown underground tanks/structures.
10.22 ROCK EXCAVATION

Rock excavation is classed as any excavation material that cannot be undertaken by a hydraulic excavator (Caterpillar 330B or
equivalent in good condition) fitted with a rock bucket at a rate of three cubic metres per hour. The excavator shall be capable of
exerting a minimum breakout force of 180kN at the bottom of the excavation with a 600 mm wide bucket fitted with rock teeth.
Excavation in all other classes of material shall be termed common excavation. Material which can be loosened with a pick, frozen
materials, soft laminated shale and hardpan, which for convenience or economy is loosened by drilling, blasting, wedging or the use
of pneumatic tools, removal of concrete pavement and retaining walls, shall not be classified as rock excavation
Rock excavation shall be undertaken as an approved variation to the Contract at the rate specified by the Contractor in the Schedule
of prices.
Rock excavation is a provisional quantity and payment for rock excavation shall only be made where the extent has been determined
by the Contractor and Superintendent and an approved variation issued. The remaining dollar balance of any variations issued shall
remain with the Principal to be expended if and as approved.
10.23 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL

After the completion of clearing operations all topsoil shall be stripped. Strip topsoil within the limits of earthworks area to provide
for later re-use as specified. Ensure that all topsoil is removed from any areas to be covered by paving or structures. Also strip
topsoil within the limits of clearing for underground services beyond the limits of earthworks. Unless otherwise directed, the depth
of stripping shall be to 150mm or to the bottom of the grass root zone, whichever is greater. Grass shall be stripped together with
topsoil. Avoid contamination by any other material.
Stockpile topsoil on or near the site for later re-use as specified. A designated stockpile site will be made available by the Principal.
Topsoil is to be separated from all other spoil material. Stockpiles are to not exceed 3.0m in height. If to remain unused for more
than four (4) weeks, topsoil stockpiles shall be sown with a fast growing, non-invasive seed or have an application of Dustex or
similar to prevent wind erosion.

10.24 EXCAVATION
Excavate to conform to the lines grades, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Excavate over the site to give
correct levels and profiles as the basis for construction, paving, filling and landscaping.
The Superintendent may order the removal of any soft spots, debris or organic material exposed when excavated areas have been
trimmed to finished formation levels. Remove all rocks and boulders which protrude above finished surfaces of Sub-grades. Make
allowance for compaction or settlement.
Separate the best granular materials from excavations for use in the upper layers of fill Sub-grades.
No explosives are to be used at any time.
10.25 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

Following Clearing and Grubbing and prior to the placement of bulk earthworks fill, the contractor shall proof roll the existing surface
to satisfaction of the Superintendent. The in-situ sub-grade shall be adequately watered and consolidated with a power drum roller
of 8 to 10 tonnes. The roller shall run over the sub-grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as elastic
mass. The roller shall pass a minimum of but not limiting to 5 runs on the sub-grade.
Unless otherwise stated the affected areas shall achieve a minimum compaction of 8 blows per 300mm layer to a depth of 450mm
(ie. 150mm to 450mm)
The approved subgrade preparation shall be surveyed by the Contractors licensed surveyor, and shall be independently spot
checked by the Principals surveyor. This survey data shall be use as a base in determining/checking the quantity of Forward
Earthworks.
The contractor shall notify and allow the Superintendent adequate time to inspect, review the Contractors compaction test sheets,
and confirm sub-grade has been compacted to the requirements stated in this technical specification and geotechnical report.
10.26 FILLING AND RESPREADING

Generally
Before filling commences, the Superintendent may order the removal of any soft spots, debris or organic material exposed when
the nominal depth of topsoil has been stripped in areas where natural surface is within 1m below finished levels. This additional
stripping may extend to a depth of 300mm below the general depth of stripping. Grade all stripped surfaces to prevent accumulation
of water.
Materials
Material to be used for fill shall consist of materials approved by the Superintendent, free from timber, stumps and weeds, or other
perishable matter, and shall be obtained generally from the excavation.
Unless otherwise specified or directed, the materials used for filling shall be obtained from cut from site. Filling shall be free from
logs, stumps, weeds and other perishable matter. The best available material, i.e. the most granular and least plastic, shall be used
in the upper layers of construction. Material used in the top 150mm below Sub-grades shall be free of particles larger than 75mm.
Material used in the top 600mm below Sub-grades shall be free of particles larger than 150mm.
Rocky materials not exceeding 600mm maximum dimension may be used in embankments. Suitable fine materials shall be placed
with the rock to fill the interstices and produce a dense compact embankment.
The Superintendent may permit the disposal of rocks larger than 600m by burial in banks, mounds, or other areas at least 800mm
below finished surface.
Any material imported to be used as suitable fill shall satisfy the following criteria:
The sand shall be clean, cohesion-less, free draining and free of all silty, organic or any other deleterious inclusions
Having greater than 80% material passing 19mm sieve
Containing no greater than 4% by weight of soil fractions finer than 0.075mm
Having plasticity index equal to 0% (i.e. no plastic)
The ratio of the maximum density shall be greater than 1.20 the maximum and minimum densities shall be
determined in accordance with test AS1289.5.5.1.
The Contractor shall provide classification and compaction test results on representative samples of the proposed material from a
NATA registered testing authority for approval by the Superintendent prior to the importation of this material to site.
The Superintendent may direct that material unsuitable for embankments be used elsewhere on site or run to spoil. If this should
result in a deficiency of material available for filling, then additional materials shall be obtained as directed at the Contractors
expense.

Placement, Backfilling and Compaction
Place and compact fill to conform to the lines, grades, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Allow for the
thickness of materials, which will be placed in subsequent operations.
Filling shall be carried up in horizontal layers, extending the full width of the works. Fill thickness shall not be more than 300mm,
loose measurements, provided that if the Contractor can demonstrate that its equipment is capable of compacting a thicker layer to
comply with this Specification, the Superintendent may nominate an increased maximum thickness of layer.
If fill is to be placed on a surface which slopes more than 1:4, bench the surface to form a key for the fill. As each layer of fill is
placed, cut the existing ground surface progressively to form a series of horizontal steps at least 1 metre in width. Recompact
excavated material as part of the filling.
The bedding, overlay and back-filling of all pipe work trenches shall be accomplished with material previously excavated from the
site trenches, provided it is free from rock and other hard objects, in accordance with AS-2032 Installation of uPVC Pipe Systems.
If the material excavated from the site trenches is unsuitable or insufficient to accomplish the bedding and back-filling operation to
the satisfaction of Superintendent, then the Contractor shall import clean sand fill for this purpose, at its expense.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment for the backfilling of trenches, compacting and levelling. Excessive
subsidence of trenches during the Defects Liability period shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to rectify at its own expense.
All surplus soil excavation, including rocks removed from backfill material, shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at its
expense.
The Contractor shall ensure that compaction no less than 95% of the modified maximum dry density when tested in accordance
with Australian Standards.
Bulk Earthworks shall be trimmed to a neat and even finish to a tolerance of 100 mm of the design level allowing for a final minor
trim to bring the levels to with +/- 10mm of design levels.
10.27 GEOTECHNICAL TESTING

Geotechnical Verifications
The Contractor shall be responsible for engaging a geotechnical consultant to undertake pre and post geotechnical inspections, to
verify the earthworks, compaction, and achievement of a final site classification. This shall include but not be limited to the following:
Inspect topsoil and vegetation stripping and assess whether sufficient topsoil has been removed, subsurface
conditions are adequate, and level of compaction has been achieved.
Inspect ongoing earthworks in accordance with AS3798
Undertake post earthwork verification testing to assess the level of compaction achieved across the site
Provide a report detailing the earthworks verification studies, including site classification to AS2870- 1996
Quality Control Test on Import Fill Material

The contractor shall obtain 3 (three) Particle Size Distribution Samples and provide test certificates, for every 15,000BCM of
imported fill.
Compaction Testing
The Contractor shall be responsible for the compaction testing of the earthworks. The Contractor shall undertake all compaction
testing required to demonstrate that the Works have been undertaken in accordance with the requirements of this specification and
in accordance with the requirements of AS 3798-1996.
Testing shall be with a Perth Sand Penetrometer in accordance with Australian Standards. The Contractor shall record the
equipment used, date, time, results and location (in plan and level) of all compaction tests conducted on site. If the Contractor uses
its own penetrometer, a calibration certificate showing the mass, drop height and tip diameter shall be provided. The cost of all
penetrometer testing shall be included in the tender rates for preparation and earthworks.
Should difficulty arise in achieving the specified Perth penetrometer blow count the Superintendent may direct that in-situ density
testing be performed to confirm the correlation between blow count and density and ensure that a density index of at least 70 % is
being achieved in accordance with AS 1289 Method 5.6.1.
On a weekly basis, the Contractor shall record the progress of compacted earthworks. The location of quality control tests shall be
referenced on a drawing. The records of all compaction tests shall be submitted to the Superintendent. It should be expected that
the Superintendent will be auditing the Contractors lift compaction tests on a weekly basis.

The Contractor shall notify and allow the Superintendent adequate time to inspect, and test, to confirm that the final Classification is
in accordance with AS2870-1996.
10.28 DISPOSAL OF APPROVED SURPLUS SPOIL ON SITE

Unless otherwise specified, dispose of approved surplus material from excavations where directed on site by:
Uniform widening of embankments, or

Uniform flattening of fill batters, or
Uniform filling of selected areas.
If not already cleared, dumping sites shall be cleared and grubbed to the extent necessary before any additional material is
deposited. Strip topsoil as specified and set aside for later re-spreading over the dumped spoil. Selling of unused surplus spoil
may be examined as approved by the Superintendent with proceeds to be paid to the Principal in full.
10.29 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL AND RUBBISH OFFSITE

Remove from the site any approved surplus excavated material or building rubbish, vegetative refuse and the like and dispose of in
the correct manner at an approved rubbish tip at the Contractors expense inclusive of all charges and fees.
10.30 MINOR GRADING AND TRIMMING

Bulk Earthworks shall be trimmed to a neat and even finish to a tolerance of 100 mm of the design level allowing for a final minor
trim to bring the levels to with +/- 10mm of design levels.
Undertake minor levelling and grading to all earth worked areas after completion of major earthworks to suit final grades indicated
on the plan to the Superintendents approval.
10.31 MATCHING UP
The Contractor shall ensure that all levels neatly tie in and match up with existing work in adjoining areas to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent. This shall include work associated with roads, pathways and paving carried out previously to the areas covered
by this Contract.
10.32 FINAL PRESENTATION

Contractor shall, ensure that all sand, silt and debris is cleared from the site immediately following completion of the earthworks.
The Contractor shall remain responsible for maintaining these works free of sand, silt and debris until the date of Practical
Completion. Presentation of the completed works is of paramount importance and as such the site shall be presented in a neat and
tidy condition.
At completion, the earth worked areas shall be cleared of all refuse, rubble and the like and neatly graded prior to hydro mulching.
Full attention to detail is expected of the Contractor and as such the Contractor shall make allowance for final trim9 hand work if
necessary) to remove all wheel ruts from machinery, the raking of sicks, stones, removal of temporary level stakes etc. to present
a neat and tidy appearance prior to hydro mulching.
The requirements of this clause shall also extend to existing roads used for access and storm water drains which are directly affected
by the works under the Contract.
10.33 HYDROMULCHING
Hydromulching shall be carried out to the entire area or as indicated on the dwgs following completion of the clearing and earthworks
within that area.
Once an area has been hydromulched, no traffic, construction plant or disturbances of the area shall be permitted to occur on the
area. If any such disturbance to a previously hydromulched area takes place it shall be re-hydromulched at the Contractor's
expense.
The hydromulch is to be applied with the following mix:
Soil Tack ST8 at 300kgs per hectare and recycled newsprint at 1,500 kg per hectare or approved equivalent
Once mixed the hydromulch is to be applied in even quantities making sure that the entire area nominated is covered with the
specified mix.
10.34 AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY OF EARTHWORKS

The Contractor shall appoint a registered surveyor to carry out 'as constructed' survey of the earthworks to ensure the levels
specified on the Drawings have been achieved by the Contractor. Both the proof rolled in-situ surface as well as the final
compacted surface level shall be surveyed by the Contractor. The proof rolled in-situ surface shall be surveyed at a grid spacing
not exceeding 5m x 5m. The surveying of as- constructed levels shall not relieve the contractor of its obligation to implement its
own quality control procedure during construction to ensure that the required level and accuracy requirements stated on the
drawings and specifications are met.

11 TIMBER WORK
11.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
Supply, fabricate (where applicable) and install the following as scheduled and detailed on the Drawings:
Treestakes
Bollards as detailed on the Drawings
11.2 STANDARDS
has been revised, amended and/or designated as not current as at the date of close of Tenders, the applicable Standard shall be
the Australian Standard which is current as at the date of close of Tenders.
AS 4785 Timber - Softwood

AS 1604 Preservative Treatment for Sawn Timber
AS 1608 Preservative Treated Farm Fencing Timber
AS 1684 SAA Timber Framing Code
AS 1650 Hot dipped Galvanised Coatings on Ferrous Articles
AS 1214 Hot dipped Galvanised Coatings on Threaded Fasteners
11.3 TIMBER
Supply timber of the types, sizes and finishes as indicated on the Drawings.
All timber shall be first class, free of splits or warps.
Jarrah for timber decking and handrail posts shall be as follows:
Posts - 125 x 125mm green sawn jarrah, Structural Grade 3

Joists and kick rail - 125 x 50mm green sawn jarrah, Structural Grade 3

Decking - 105 x 30mm jarrah, standard grade, pencil round
11.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

All radiata pine is to be dried, pressure treated with CCA or 'Tanalith' preservative and then re-dried prior to installation on site.
Pressure treatment of pine with preservative is to be carried out in accordance with AS 1604 - 1993 to Hazard Level 5 (H5) and
timber shall be clearly stamped to indicate that specified Hazard Level of treatment has been achieved.
When requested by the Superintendent, the Contractor shall supply Certificates, Warranties and the like to confirm the type and
level of pressure treatment applied to the timber delivered to the site.
Where the degree of shaping, routing, bevelling and the like indicated on the Drawings as being required as part of the fabrication
of timber items is likely to reduce the effectiveness of the preservative treatment then these works shall be carried out prior to
preservative treatment.
11.5 TREATMENT OF CUT ENDS

All other cut ends, drill holes and the like which expose timber must be coated with Koppers Hickson 'ReSeal' or equivalent and
approved.
11.6 TIMBER FIXINGS

All bolts, nails, screws and other timber fixings shall be stainless steel, zinc or hot dipped galvanised.
All hot dip galvanising shall conform to the requirements of AS 1650 - Galvanised Coatings and shall be clean, smooth and
continuous, free from acid spots, cracks, laminations, runs and drips. The coating shall have a minimum thickness of 85 microns.
Galvanising of fasteners shall conform to the requirements of AS 1214 - Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Threaded Fasteners.
Fastenings i.e. chemical anchors, lugs, screws, rivets and the like shall be of approved type, appropriate to the work, capable of
transmitting the loads and stresses imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly.
emerge associates TIMBER WORK

11.7 FINISHING: STAINS
Where indicated on the Drawings supply and apply 2 No coats of Wattyl FORESTWOOD oil stain, or equivalent and approved.
Colour to be as directed by the Superintendent.
Prepare timber and apply stain strictly in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
11.8 FINISHING: OIL

All jarrah decking and handrail posts to be treated with COLOURGUARD Jarrah Timber Oil as supplied by Permalux Pty Ltd, or
equivalent and approved. Colour to be as directed by the Superintendent.
Prepare timber and apply stain strictly in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
11.9 SAMPLES
Provide 1 No sample of each of the following items for the approval of the Superintendent:
Timber bollard stained black
11.10 TIMBER BOLLARDS STAINED BLACK

Pine bollards shall be made from Pinus Radiata, logs which have been Tanalith treated in accordance with Treatment level H4 AS
1604. The bollards shall be set vertically and set 600mmm in ground. Backfilling shall be mass 15mpa concrete at 450 deep x 425
x 425mm to each bollard. Spaces between bollards shall be 1500mm centres unless otherwise noted.
Bollards shall have a domed head with routed collars. Bollards shall be uniform 150mm in diameter. All bollards shall be set evenly
in height and alignment, either in straight lines or even curves as indicated on the plans
All pine bollards shall be prepared and painted with 2 No coats exterior quality black paint or an approved stain in accordance with
manufacturers specification
emerge associates
12 METALWORK
12.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
Supply, fabricate (where applicable) and install the following as scheduled and detailed on the Drawings:
Powder coated, galvanised mild steel fencing

Stainless Steel Handrails
Powder coated, Galvanised Mild Steel roof and framing
Powder coated, Galvanised Mild Steel boardwalk structural members
Powder coated, Galvanised Mild Steel Signage to Entry Statement
Powder coated, Galvanised Mild Steel to Concrete Bench Backrest
Powder coated, Galvanised Mild Steel to Feature Windsock
Powder coated, Galvanised Mild Steel to decorative panel to play walls
Powder coated, Galvanised Mild Steel to Iron Filter Enclosure
Street Furniture
12.2 STANDARDS
STEEL
AS 1163 1991 Structural Steel Hollow Sections

AS 1538 1988 Cold-formed Steel Structures Code
AS 1554 SAA Structural Steel Welding
AS 3678 1990 Structural Steel hot rolled plates, floor plates and slabs
AS 3679 Structural Steel
AS 3679.1 Hot rolled bars and sections
AS 3679.2 Welded sections
AS 4100 1900 Steel structures
AS 1170 SAA Loading Code
AS 1170.1 1989 Dead and live loads and load combinations
AS 1170.21989 Wind loads (amended 1993)
AS 3623 1993 Domestic metal framing
AS 1397 Steel sheet and stripHot-dipped zinc coated or aluminium/zinc coated

ELECTRODES
AS 1553 Covered electrodes for welding

AS 1553.1 1983 Low carbon manganese steels
AS 1553.2 1987 Low carbon alloy steels
AS 1553.3 1992 Corrosion-resisting electrodes
BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS
AS 1111 1980 ISO metric hexagon commercial bolts and screws

AS 1112 1980 ISO metric hexagon nuts
AS 1237 1973 Flat metal washers for general engineering purposes
AS 1252 1983 High-strength steel bolts for structural engineering
FABRICATION AND EXECUTION
AS/NZS 1554 Structural Steel Welding

AS 1796 1993 Certification of welders and welding supervisors
SURFACE PREPARATION
AS 1627 Metal finishing Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces
emerge associates METALWORK

AS 1627.1 Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces - Removal of oil, grease and related
contamination.
AS 1627.4 Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces - Abrasive blast cleaning of steel.
AS 1627.5 Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces - Pickling
AS 3884 1991 Etch primers for pre-treating metal surface
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
AS 1214 1983 Hot-dip galvanised coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse thread series)
AS 4680:2006 Hot-dipped galvanised coatings on ferrous articles (ISO Standard, ISO 1461).
AS 2105 1992 Inorganic zinc silicate paint

AS 2312 1984 Guide to the protection of iron and steel against exterior atmospheric corrosion
AS 3750 Paints for steel structures (applicable parts)
AS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire
AS 4791 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on ferrous open sections, applied by an in-line
process
AS 4792 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on ferrous hollow sections, applied by a
continuous or a
specialised process.
AS 2309 Durability of galvanised and electrogalvanised zinc coatings for the protection of steel
in
structural applications Atmospheric
AS 2312 Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the use
of
protective coatings
AS 4312 Atmospheric corrosivity zones in Australia

12.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

Submit artwork and shop Drawings for all works to the Superintendent for approval prior to commencing fabrication.
The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings at his own expense. Submit 2 copies of shop drawings for approval. Allow 14 days
prior to fabrication for return of same. Dimensional accuracy and completeness of the drawings are the responsibility of the
Contractor. The cost of any work which may have to be dismantled or altered as a result of inaccurate shop drawings shall be borne
by the Contractor.
12.4 SITE MEASUREMENTS

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and providing all necessary site measurements to ensure accurate and correct
fabrication of steelwork.
12.5 MATERIALS
Materials Generally
All materials as specified hereunder are to comply with the appropriate Specifications of the Standards Association of Australia:
Stainless Steel
Stainless steel to BHP or similar approved 3mm grade 316 sheet or as noted on the Drawings with an electro-polished finish to
Grade 4 as per AS 1449.
All other Materials shall be of the types, temper and quality most suited to their particular application in this Contract.
Structural Steel
All structural steelwork shall be a minimum of Grade 250 in accordance with the Australian Standards. All structural hot rolled and
welded sections shall be OneSteel Grade 300PLUS, complying with AS 3678 and AS 3679. All structural hollow sections shall be
grade C250LO or grade C350LO, in accordance with AS 1163. Other types and grades of steel shall not be used unless otherwise
approved by the Superintendent
All materials shall be new and of unused stock and free from splices for the full length between joints unless otherwise approved by
the Superintendent.
Compliance
Manufacturers Certificates of Compliance with the relevant Standard shall be supplied for all steel used in the work.
Substitution of Materials
No variations from the sizes, sections or grades of material shown on the design drawings shall be made unless otherwise approved
by the superintendent.

Fixings
Unless otherwise specified, all bolts, nuts, washers and screws connecting materials shall be:
Of at least equivalent strength

Of at least equivalent anti-corrosive properties
Compatible
For fixing metal components, use only stainless steel bolts, fasteners or stainless steel anchors.
The minimum bolt size for any anchor shall be 6mm diameter. Where washers are shown or required, they shall be of the same
metal or coating as the bolt.
12.6 DISSIMILAR METALS (GALVANIC POTENTIAL)

Refer to AS 40362006. The Contractor shall ensure that dissimilar metals are assessed and isolated. If dissimilar metals are
detailed on the Drawings the Contractor shall assess the galvanic potential and ensure that the shop drawings detail a suitable
method of isolation. The proposed methodology must be approved by the Superintendent. If the Contractor believes a suitable
isolation method is not achievable/practical they shall notify the Superintendent.
Preventive measures
When connecting two pieces of the same material, use a fastener/bolt made of the same material.
If the subjects being fastened are structural, use a fastener/bolt of appropriate strength. For example, when
fastening aluminum and steel in a structural application, use a fastener made of carbon steel with suitable plating.
Use the corrosion potential chart when selecting fastener/bolt material.
If using the same metal is not possible, select combinations of metals close together on the galvanic potential chart.
Avoid small active metal contact with large inactive metal content.

Isolation methods
All dissimilar metals are to be isolated using a non-absorbent insulating plastic (nylon, neoprene or similar and
approved) washer, gasket, sleeve or insert.
The use of insulating tape is generally unacceptable and is only appropriate for light wear situations and the
Superintendents approval must be sought prior to its use. Isolating tape shall be a polypropylene tape of 1.7 mils
minimum thickness with a dielectric strength of 300-400 volts/mil.
Paint or prime the two metals or selected pieces, even if they have protective coatings. This is especially helpful
in joints, if kept in good repair. It is particularly important to coat the active metal.
Avoid threaded fittings with materials far apart in the ranking of galvanic potential.
Design (during the shop drawing phase) for the use of replaceable active metal components or make them thicker
for longer life.
Do not use caulk as an isolation method. Caulk in a joint between dissimilar metals can squeeze out and allow the
two metals to contact.
Consider using sacrificial anodes. The installation of yet a more active metal than the active metal in a joint will
tend to corrode the most active metal and protect the less active metal.
Use one-piece or welded construction versus bolting or riveting when possible.
If the above measures are not applicable for a joint design, care must be taken to ensure that moisture is allowed
to drain.
Apply corrosion-inhibiting material (pastes, washers, compounds, etc.) under heads of screws or bolts inserted into
dissimilar metal, even if they already have been treated.
12.7 FABRICATION
Generally
All fabrication shall comply with the requirements of AS 4100 - Steel Structures.
Fabrication shall be carried out by qualified and experienced tradesmen to produce finished steelwork components that accurately
reflect the design intent as represented on the design drawings.
Fabricate and pre-assemble items in the workshop wherever practical. All members shall be stored and handled so as to reasonably
protect the inherent and specified finishes.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking all as-constructed dimensions of features having a bearing on the final form of
fabricated steelwork and allowing for same in fabrication.
Edges and Surfaces
Keep clean, neat and free from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive radiusing.
Joints
Fit accurately to a fine hairline.
Straightening and Forming

Any straightening of material or bending to produce curvilinear forms shown on the drawings shall be achieved by methods that will
not diminish the material properties of the steel and shall be in accordance with approved procedures. Heating shall not induce
steel temperatures in excess of 600C.
Cutting
Steelwork shall be cut by sawing, shearing, machine, plasma or hand flame cutting methods except that:
Ends of sections or edges of plates required to transmit full contract bearing (e.g. column end to base plate) shall
be cold sawn or milled.
Plates thicker than 16mm where edges are to be welded or galvanised shall not be sheared.

Any cutting operations shall produce clean, true lines and surface, complying with the requirements of AS 1554.1 for surfaces to be
welded and AS 4100 for surfaces not to be welded.
Mitres shall be dressed smooth and neatly fitted. Re-entrant corners shall be notch-free and radiussed at least 10mm.
Holing
Bolt holes shall not be made by gas cutting or by punching full size. Holes may be punched 3mm undersize and reamed to size.
Holes to be tapped shall be first drilled to the tapping size. Holes through tubular members shall be lined with pipe sleeves, seal-
welded in place and ground flush.
Tube Bends
Form bends in tube without unduly deforming the true cross section.
12.8 WELDING
All welding shall be carried out in accordance with AS 1554 Part - Welding of Steel Structures.
After fabrication all weld splatter and slag shall be removed by suitable mechanical means and all sharp edges and rough welds
rounded off.
Finish visible joints made by welding, brazing or soldering by grinding, buffing and the like methods appropriate to the class of work
before painting, galvanising or the like further treatment.
12.9 FASTENINGS
Fastenings, including anchors, lugs, screw, rivets and the like shall be of approved type, appropriate to the work, capable of
transmitting the loads and stresses imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the assembly.
12.10 BOLTS
All bolts, washers and nuts shall comply with the relevant Australian Standards.
All structural bolting shall be hot-dip galvanised in accordance with AS 1214, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
Mild Steel Bolts, Washers and Nuts

The use of 12mm mild steel bolts shall be confined to the fastening of cold-formed purlins and girts, and stair treads. Material for
all bolts shall be at least Grade 4.6. The use of M16 bolts shall be confined to the fastening of handrail stanchions. Nuts for mild
steel bolts shall be in accordance with AS 1112, Class 5, Normal Type, Flat washers and material of tapered washers shall comply
with AS 1237. One flat washer per each assembly shall be provided, unless design drawings show otherwise. Tapered washers
shall be provided where necessary.
High Strength Bolts, Washers and Nuts

All structural connections have a minimum of 2 No. M20 Grade 8.8 high strength bolts in accordance with AS 1252. Bolt sizes to
be used for the works shall be limited to M20, M24 or M30 and all connections shall be designed as bearing type joints unless
design drawings show otherwise.
One hardened washer per each assembly shall be provided when bolt tightening procedure is 8.8/S (snug-tight condition).
One hardened washer per each assembly shall be provided when the bolt tightening procedure is 8.8/TB (fully tensioned, bearing
type) and 8.8/TF (fully tensioned, friction type) where the tensioning procedure is nominated as part turn method to AS 4100 cl.
15.2.5.2.
One hardened washer and one approved load indicating washer per each assembly shall be provided when the tightening
procedures are 8.8/TB and 8.8/TF, where the tensioning procedure is nominated as by use of a direct-tension indication device to
AS 4100 cl. 15.2.5.3.
Where a bolt head or nut bears on a tapered flange it shall be provided with a washer of corresponding taper.
After tightening a bolt, at least one thread and not more than three threads shall project beyond the nut.
12.11 COLD FORMED STEELWORK

Cold formed members including purlins and girts shall comply with AS 1397.

Holes in purlins and girts shall be punched by the manufacturer to suit fixing to supports, laps, bridging and miscellaneous items
such as fly bracing. Fasteners shall be minimum M12 bolts, grade 4.6, unless design drawings show otherwise.
12.12 GALVANISING
Complete welding, cutting, drilling and other fabrication before coating.
Unless otherwise stated on the Drawings, all steel items shall be hot dip galvanised. All hot dip galvanising shall conform to the
requirements of AS 4680:2006 - Hot-dipped galvanised coatings on ferrous articles (as aligned with ISO Standard, ISO 1461).
Galvanised Coatings and shall be clean, smooth and continuous, free from acid spots, cracks, laminations, runs and drips. The
thickness of the galvanised coating shall conform with Table 1 in AS 4680
Galvanising of fasteners shall conform to the requirements of AS 1214 - Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Threaded Fasteners.
Inspection
Inspection shall be carried out at the galvanisers works by the Contractor, or at some other place as agreed between Contractor
and galvaniser.
Certificate
When requested by the Superintendent, a certificate shall be provided stating that the galvanising complies with the requirements
of AS/NZS 4680.
Transport And Storage

Galvanised components shall, wherever possible, be transported and stored under dry, well-ventilated conditions to prevent the
formation of wet storage staining following the recommendations contained in AS 4680 Appendix F.
A passivation treatment after galvanising may be used to minimise the wet storage staining which may occur on articles unable to
be stored in dry, well-ventilated conditions.
Any wet storage staining shall be removed by the galvaniser if formed prior to leaving the galvanisers plant, unless late pick-up or
acceptance of delivery has necessitated the material being stored in unfavourable conditions. Provided the coating thickness
complies with the requirements of AS 4680, no further remedial action is required to the stained areas.
Welding
Where galvanised steel is to be welded, adequate ventilation shall be provided. If adequate ventilation is not available,
supplementary air circulation shall be provided. In confined spaces a respirator shall be used.
Grinding of edges prior to welding may be permitted to reduce zinc oxide fumes formed during welding and eliminate weld porosity
which can sometimes occur.
All uncoated weld areas shall be reinstated see Coating Reinstatement or Clause 8 of AS 4680.
Coating reinstatement
Areas of significant surface that are uncoated shall, following approval by the Superintendent, be reinstated by following the
recommendations contained in AS 4680 - Repair after Galvanising, or by other methods nominated by the Contractor and approved
by the Superintendent. Similar repair methods shall be used for areas damaged by welding or flame cutting, or during handling,
transport and erection.
The size of the area able to be repaired shall be relevant to the size of the object and the conditions of service but shall normally be
in accordance with the provisions of AS 4680 - Repair after Galvanising.
Sweep (Brush) Blast Cleaning Of Galvanised Steel Prior To Painting

Refer AS 4680 Appendix I
All items to be powder coated are not to have chromate passive coating on surface.
12.13 REPAIR TO DAMAGED FINISHES

General
After erection and/or site welding make good any damage to shop finish.
Where damage has occurred, the damaged areas shall be thoroughly power wire brushed or ground back to bright metal, cleaned
and degreased.
Immediately following surface preparation, apply two coats minimum 50 micron dry film thickness each coat of approved organic
zinc rich epoxy in accordance with this specification and AS 2312.
Area to be treated such that there is minimum 50mm overlap with sound surface coating.

Immediately following surface treatment the selected paint shall be applied with a brush in two coats to give a minimum total dry
film thickness of 100 microns.
Where colour matching is required an approved paint shall be applied over the treated area strictly in accordance with manufacturer
instructions to achieve the required colour match. Unless noted otherwise, colour matching is required, and the Contractor shall
arrange and pay for colour match trials as necessary.
Where colour matching is not required, surfaces treated with an organic zinc-rich paint shall be coated with an approved acrylic or
polyurethane top coat applied over the fully cured surface.
Galvanised Surfaces
Where galvanised steel surfaces have been damaged on site or in transit due to welding or rough handling, corrosion
protection must be restored in accordance with AS 4680 Appendix E Renovation of Damaged or Uncoated Surfaces and AS 2312.
Unless otherwise stated in AS4680, acceptable methods of protection reinstatement include the use of low-melting-point zinc alloy
repair rods or by application of an approved zinc-rich paint.
If an approved zinc-rich paint is to be used, it shall be a single pack organic zinc rich paint, containing 90% zinc by weight in the dry
film (Interzinc 315 or a similar approved) and shall conform to and be applied in accordance with AS 3750.9 Organic Zinc Rich
Primer and the paint manufacturers written instructions.
Note that inorganic zinc rich paints are not considered suitable as touch-up coatings for galvanised products as the surface
preparation requirements specific to uncoated steel will damage the galvanised coating adjacent to any area being repaired.
The damaged area to be painted shall be thoroughly power wire brushed or ground back to bright metal, be clean, dry and free from
contaminants such as oil and grease. Area to be treated such that there is minimum 50mm overlap with sound galvanised coating.
Immediately following surface treatment the selected paint shall be applied with a brush in two coats to give a minimum total dry
film thickness of 100 microns.
Where colour matching is required an approved paint shall be applied over the treated area strictly in accordance with manufacturer
instructions to achieve the required colour match. Unless noted otherwise, colour matching is required, and the Contractor shall
arrange and pay for colour match trials as necessary.
Where colour matching is not required, surfaces treated with an organic zinc-rich paint shall be coated with an approved acrylic or
polyurethane top coat applied over the fully cured surface.
12.14 FINISH
The finish to all stainless steel shall be as follows;
Grade 4 General Purpose Polish as per AS 1449.
The Contractor shall submit a 500mm length sample of the stainless steel finish prior to commencing polish of fabricated steelworks.
The finish to all galvanised steelwork shall be as follows:

Non exposed steel: Hot dipped galvanised finish.
Exposed steel: Polyurethane Paint
12.15 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT

Scope and Standards
The protective treatment is to be as noted in the steelwork notes set out on the structural drawings. This Specification defines the
requirements for the supply and application of surface protection to structural steelwork in accordance with the current issue
including amendments of the following Standards:-
AS 1627 Metal Finishing Preparation and Pre-treatment of Surfaces

AS 3894 Site Testing of Protective Coatings
AS 4848 Application Specifications for Coating Systems

For Galvanising refer to Clauses 11.12 of this Specification.
Surface Preparation
The Contractor shall ensure that the method and finish adopted is adequate to ensure adhesion of the selected paint system in the
particular application conditions and service environment of the work.
Particular attention shall be paid in the vicinity of welds to ensure that all slag, flux residues, and spatter are completely removed.

Wherever the surface preparation leaves a bare metal surface, prime coat must be applied within 4 hours of completion of
preparation.
Hand & Power Tool Cleaning

All weld spatter shall be removed and all burrs, sharp edges, gouge marks and rough welds shall be rounded or smoothed off.
Unpainted surfaces shall be treated with power impact tools to obtain a Class 2 finish except that where the surface is inaccessible
to power tools, hand tools shall be used.
Abrasive Blast Cleaning

All weld spatter shall be removed and all burrs, sharp edges, gouge marks and rough welds shall be rounded or smoothed off. Oil
and grease shall be removed using solvent cleaning.
Steel surfaces shall be cleaned by dry abrasive blasting to achieve a Class 2.5 finish. The abrasive used shall be dry and free of
salt or contaminants and be of sufficient hardness and angularity to produce the specified anchor pattern profile at the intended
blast pressure. Blast products and dust shall be removed from surfaces on completion using compressed air or vacuum cleaning.
Sweep (brush) blast cleaning of galvanised steel prior to painting

Refer AS 4680 Appendix I
12.16 PAINT PREPARATION

Manufacturers product data sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets for each material used shall be kept at the work site for the
duration of the work. Where instructions are unclear or in conflict with this Specification then clarification shall be sought.
Should thinning of paint become necessary for any reason then only thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer shall be
used. Supplies of compatible thinners shall be maintained in the paint shop and at the site.
Paint Finished Steelwork

The Contractor shall ensure that all external steelwork shall be prepared for paint finish.
Compatibility Of Painting Systems

The Contractor shall ensure each paint coat is compatible with subsequent treatments and top coats.
Weather Conditions
Painting shall not commence or continue when rain is falling nor when fog or mist is present, nor when any condensation occurs on
the surface to be painted. If appropriate data is available then no painting should be carried out when the relative humidity exceeds
85% nor when the surface temperature of the steelwork is less than 2C above the dew point. In any case painting shall not
commence or continue when the air temperature is less than 5C, nor when the steel surface temperature is less than 2C.
Painting shall not commence or continue when the steel temperature exceeds 50C unless the paint is specifically formulated for
application at high temperature. Appropriate measures shall be taken when painting in hot weather to avoid dry spray and other
film defects, and to ensure that the specified film thickness is achieved.
Painting in high winds shall be avoided, and shall be discontinued if excessive drift to adjacent surfaces, dry spray film defects, or
wind-blown dust contamination of the wet paint occurs.
12.17 PAINTING METHODS

Paint shall be applied uniformly without sags or runs. Welds, bolts, edges, crevices and other irregularities shall be thoroughly
coated, using extra material if necessary to provide equivalent protection to that obtained on adjacent smooth surfaces at the
specified dry film thickness.
Paint shall be applied by spray wherever practical. Airless spray is preferred and shall be used for high build coatings. Areas
inaccessible for effective spray coating shall be coated by brushing before adjacent work is sprayed.
Paint shall be stirred and mixed strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions prior to and during application. Mixed paint
which has exceeded the pot-life nominated by the manufacture shall be discarded and removed from the site.
Storage, handling and application of paint shall be carried out observing all safety precautions given in the manufacturers
instructions and in the appropriate government legislation and regulations. In particular adequate ventilation and appropriate fire
precautions shall be provided.
Each coat shall be properly cured or dried before the succeeding coat is applied. Application of the succeeding coat shall not cause
any lifting or other film irregularities in the undercoat. Minimum drying times and state of cure shall be those nominated by the
manufacturer.
12.18 SITE PAINTING

Site painting shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification to achieve the same standards as for shop painting.

Previously applied paintwork damaged by site work shall be completely removed and all bare steel surfaces shall be cleaned using
power tools, if possible, or otherwise by hand tools, to achieve a Class 2 finish as defined by AS 1627 Part 7. The edges of the
affected area shall be feathered and painted areas which will be recoated shall be wet-sanded to provide an appropriate key.
All surfaces shall be cleaned between successive coats applied on site to remove all dust and other contaminants immediately prior
to painting.
For touch-up work all coats shall be applied as specified, ensuring that the finished surface is uniformly matched to the adjacent
untouched work.
Where the work includes repair of previously painted surfaces, all paint which has been damaged by heat, smoke, or mechanical
impact shall be removed and the exposed surface prepared as specified above. The edges of the remaining paint film shall be
feathered off and the area to be over-coated with fresh paint shall be wet sanded.
12.19 TESTING
Accurately calibrated testing instruments shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor, and used in accordance with methods
and procedures outlined in AS 3894 as directed by the Superintendent. Tests shall be conducted to determine wet and dry film
thicknesses, and to locate defects and discontinuities.
Any defects and discontinuities detected shall be rectified as directed by the Superintendent.
For each coat the average dry film thickness shall equal or exceed the specified value, and no more than 25% of readings shall be
less than the specified value.
12.20 INSTALLATION OF HANDRAILS/BALUSTRADES

It is critical that the alignment of the handrails and balustrades forms a smooth profile along its length and reflects the design profiles
in elevation. The Contractor shall take every care to ensure that a smooth profile is maintained after all site connections have been
completed.
The finished railings shall be created to the tolerances set out below:
Variation from true plan positions of post 5mm

Variation of dimensions in elevation 3mm
Variation of line of rails from specified vertical and horizontal profile 5mm

12.21 ERECTION
Protect finish during the erection procedures where steelwork is visible in the final structure. Grind welds and use an approved
body filler to leave a smooth, neat and monolithic appearance to such steelwork. Repair blemishes to sections prior to surface
preparation and protective treatment.
12.22 SECURITY DURING ERECTION

During the erection securely bolt or otherwise fasten and if necessary temporarily brace the steelwork to provide safely for all
erection stresses and loading conditions. Allow for loads due to erection equipment or its operation.
12.23 HOLLOW SECTION CONSTRUCTION

Fully seal all hollow sections using nominal 3mm plates where necessary. Provide single rolled lengths of members between end
connections, unless approval to make other joints is given. Dress such joints to make their appearance at the joint indistinguishable
from the remainder of the member.
12.24 INSPECTION AND TESTING

Fabrication Inspection
During fabrication, the Contractor and Sub-Contractor(s) shall permit the Superintendent free access to the fabricators works at all
reasonable times for the purpose of carrying out inspections and shall afford all necessary facilities for the carrying out of such
inspections. Where steel has been checked and approved by the Superintendent at the works before being delivered to site, such
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide correct fitting on site.
Inspection During Erection

The Contractor shall give the Superintendent 24 hours notice for inspections where the Superintendents approval is required for
commencement of any stage of the works.
All field bolting and field welding shall be inspected during erection. All field weld slag shall be removed prior to inspection.
Priming and painting in the vicinity of welds shall not be carried out over any field welding until they have inspected.
No concrete encasing of formwork installation shall be carried out until the Superintendent has inspected and approved the
preparation of the steelwork to be encased.
No grouting may take place until the Superintendent has inspected and approved the preparation of both the steel and concrete.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of partially erected structures and shall design and construct temporary works
such as falsework, guys and bracing to ensure that no permanent structural members are overloaded during the construction phase.
Approval
The Contractor shall obtain approval in writing from the Superintendent before undertaking any welding, drilling, cutting or other
modification to permanent steelwork to accommodate temporary works.
Rectification
The Contractor shall make full rectification to permanent steelwork, including restoration of protective coatings after removal of
temporary works.
12.26 ERECTION TOLERANCES

Steelwork shall be erected to the lines and levels shown on the design drawings within the tolerances nominated in AS 4100.
Shims and Packers

Shims and packers shall be mild steel grade 250 unless shown otherwise on the drawings and shall be clean, flat and free from
burrs or other imperfections. Packers shall be sized to cover as much of the area of the packed joint as possible. Packers may be
notched to facilitate assembly but the number of plies shall be kept to a minimum. Packers and shims shall not be used in joints
using high strength structural bolts unless they are shown on the design drawings. Packers and shims supplied with the steelwork
shall be assembled in accordance with the relevant drawings.
12.27 GROUTING
General
The grout type to be used is as shown on the design drawings and shall be either flowable non-shrink grout or dry pack mortar.
Spaces to be grouted shall be fully cleaned and free of rubbish, polystyrene formers, free water and any other deleterious substances
immediately prior to placing grout.
Flowable Non-shrink Grout

Masterflow 870 or approved equivalent packaged flowable non-shrink grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. Sand-cement grout incorporating site-mixed admixtures shall not be used in these applications. Grout
shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Dry Pack Mortar Grout

Dry pack mortar grout shall be mixed with two parts cement to five parts sand and the minimum possible amount of water. The
grout shall be rammed under the full area of the baseplate, either by ramming from opposite sides simultaneously or by ramming
against a fixed form. The edges of the grout pad shall be neatly tapered at 45 from the edge of the baseplate to the concrete
surface. Grout shall be moist-cured for at least seven days.
12.28 SITE MODIFICATIONS

No modification that may affect the structural integrity of the steelwork or the serviceability of the works shall be made without the
prior written approval of the Superintendent, who may direct where additional strengthening or altered configurations of the proposed
modification shall be made. Any field fabrication shall conform to the requirements this Specification. Procedures and methods of
modification shall be subject to the Superintendents approval.
Cutting
Site cutting shall be by mechanical means wherever practical. Where flame cutting is unavoidable, an allowance shall be left for
grinding off ragged edges to ensure a smooth finish.
Holing
Boltholes shall be drilled, not flame-cut. Correction of mismatching holes may be achieved by reaming or by filling badly misaligned
holes with weld metal, grinding flush and redrilling correctly.
Repositioning
Where welded fitments need to be repositioned, the existing weld shall be removed by chipping, grinding or gouging. When the
fitment has been removed any undercut areas shall be filled with weld metal and the area shall be ground smooth. Fitments
damaged during removal shall be replaced with new items. Fitments shall be replaced using the same fixing as shown in the detail
drawings.
Finishing
Wherever remedial work has been carried out, burrs, slag and weld spatter shall be removed and the surface of the affected area
shall be cleaned. The paintwork shall be made good in accordance with this Specification.

13 SEGMENTAL AND STONE PEDESTRIAN PAVING (NOT USED)
emerge associates SEGMENTAL AND STONE PEDESTRIAN PAVING (NOT USED)

14 CRUSHED STONE/AGGREGATE HARDSTAND (NOTE USED)
14.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
Supply and install the following as detailed on the Drawings:
Exposed Aggregate hardstand
14.2 STANDARDS
AS/NZS 3661.2:1994; Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Guide to the reduction of slip hazards
AS/NZS 4586:1999: Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials
AS/NZS 4663:2002: Slip resistance measurement of existing pedestrian surfaces
HB 197:1999: An introductory guide to the slip resistance of pedestrian surface materials
AS 1141 - 1974 : Methods of Sampling and Testing Aggregates
AS 1289 - 1977 : Methods of Testing Soils for Engineering Purposes
14.3 MATERIALS
The Contractor shall supply and install the following paving types or approved equivalent where indicated on the Drawings:
Exposed Aggregate Concrete

Holcim Australia
18 Brodie Hall Drive, Bentley WA 6102
Phone: (08) 9212 2000
Fax: (08) 9212 2001
Colours:
Holcim Colour: Eucalyptus Holcim Colour: Boab
All material shall be to Superintendents approval.
14.4 SAMPLES
The Contractor shall allow to construct for approval, a sample of the works. This work shall be reviewed by the Superintendent, to
ensure compliance with the Specification and Drawings. Once approved, the Contractor shall ensure that all materials and
workmanship comply with the approved samples. The approved samples may be incorporated into the finished work.
14.5 CRUSHED STONE/AGGREGATE HARDSTAND

Sub-Grade Preparation
Excavate (box out) sub-grade and shape to the required dimensions and levels as indicated on the Drawings and to allow for the
total hardstand thickness.
Prepare sub-grade to provide a consolidated, sound base, free of depressions, soft spots or any deleterious materials such as tree
roots, organic matter, Contractors rubble and the like.
Any section of sub-grade which, in the opinion of the Superintendent, is composed of unsuitable material or is composed of material
which would bread down with ageing or weathering to such an extent that it would then fall outside the limits of the Specification
shall be rejected. Any material thus rejected shall immediately be excavated and removed from site and replaced with conforming
material.
emerge associates CRUSHED STONE/AGGREGATE HARDSTAND (NOTE USED)

Uniformly compact the sub-grade to 95% of the modified maximum dry density when tested in accordance with AS 1289 - 1977 Part
E2.1 for the upper 250mm. Where the material is to be used as the infill to the tree surrounds do not over compact the area
immediately around the tree.
Level and trim sub-grade finished surface to ensure that the completed hardstand surface does not deviate more than 10mm from
the base of a 3.0m long straight edge placed in any direction on the finished surface.
Limestone Base Course

Crushed limestone shall be limestone obtained from an approved source and be crushed to comply with the grading in this
Specification.
The crushed limestone shall be free from:
Roots and other organic matter

Sand, capstone and other deleterious material
The crushed limestone base shall comply with the following grading requirements:
AS Sieve Size Passing (%)

75mm 100
19mm 50-75
2.36mm and less 30-50
Methods of sampling and testing of crushed limestone shall be in accordance with the following Australian Standards:
AS 1141 : Methods of Sampling and testing Aggregates

AS 1289 : Methods of Testing Soils for Engineering Purposes
The crushed limestone shall have resistance to abrasion, when determined in accordance with the Los Angeles Test to show a
weight loss not exceeding sixty percent (60%) by weight.
The Calcium Carbonate content of the crushed limestone shall not be less than sixty percent (60%) by weight.
Notwithstanding this Specification, any sample, which in the opinion of the Superintendent, is composed of unsuitable material or is
composed of material which would break down with ageing or weathering to such an extent that it would then fall outside the limits
of the Specification shall be rejected.
The base course shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density when tested in accordance with AS 1289-1977. Where
the material is to be used as the infill to the tree surrounds do not over compact the area immediately around the tree.
The base course shall be graded and compacted to the required profiles and grades. The material shall be watered during grading
and rolling to achieve the optimum water content for compaction. Generally, compaction shall be by means of rolling with an
approved self-propelled roller.
The surface shall be tested by template to ensure accuracy and any irregularities greater than 10mm when tested with a straight
edge 3m long shall be made good by addition or removal of material and further rolling until the specified cross section is obtained.
A tolerance of levels of + 5mm will be permitted. The thickness of the base course shall not vary by more than 10% of the nominated
layer thickness.
Placement
Once an appropriate base is established install crushed stone and/or stabilised material to the required depth as indicated on the
Drawings.
The top course shall be carefully placed upon the subgrade and compacted to achieve a dense solid surface that is resistant to
scuffing and scouring. The Contractor shall maintain the moisture content at the optimum level for placing and construction
throughout the entire construction period. Any foreign matter such as rock and soil must be removed and re-established. It is
important that the fully compacted depth of material is achieved, and the surface is even, fully compacted and free draining.
Do not over-water any stabilised material before compaction otherwise cement will rise to the surface causing a hard cement surface
layer.
Compaction of Stabilised Material

After installation, the decomposed granite sand shall be immediately compacted and brought to level by not less than three passes
of a vibrating plate compactor. If the granite is too dry, puffs of dust will blow out from beneath the vibrating plate compactor. If this
occurs, lightly water before compacting again.

Compact the decomposed granite to required levels adding more to lower areas. Establish a level surface with a recommended
cross fall of at least 5% as indicated on the Drawings. (Do not allow water to pond on surface). Follow compaction process while
lightly watering with spray nozzle until water slowly soaks into the granite. Surface broom off any excess water and cement fines.
Use water spray to clean off granite surface. Protect area and leave surface for 24-48 hours to dry.
14.6 POROUS RESIN BOUND AGGREGATE PAVING

Sub-Grade Preparation
Excavate (box out) sub-grade and shape to the required dimensions and levels as indicated on the Drawings and to allow for the
total hardstand thickness.
Prepare sub-grade to provide a consolidated, sound base, free of depressions, soft spots or any deleterious materials such as tree
roots, organic matter, Contractors rubble and the like.
Any section of sub-grade which, in the opinion of the Superintendent, is composed of unsuitable material or is composed of material
which would bread down with ageing or weathering to such an extent that it would then fall outside the limits of the Specification
shall be rejected. Any material thus rejected shall immediately be excavated and removed from site and replaced with conforming
material.
Uniformly compact the sub-grade to 95% of the modified maximum dry density when tested in accordance with AS 1289 - 1977 Part
E2.1 for the upper 250mm. Where material is to be used as the infill to the tree surrounds do not over compact the area immediately
around the tree.
Level and trim sub-grade finished surface to ensure that the completed hardstand surface does not deviate more than 10mm from
the base of a 3.0m long straight edge placed in any direction on the finished surface.
Gravel Base Course

Washed blue metal gravel (5mm) shall be
Methods of sampling and testing of gravel shall be in accordance with the following Australian Standards:
AS 1141 - 1974 : Methods of Sampling and Testing Aggregates

AS 1289 - 1977 : Methods of Testing Soils for Engineering Purposes
Notwithstanding this Specification, any sample, which in the opinion of the Superintendent, is composed of unsuitable material or is
composed of material which would break down with ageing or weathering to such an extent that it would then fall outside the limits
of the Specification shall be rejected.
The base course shall be laid to 70mm thickness and compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density when tested in accordance
with AS 1289-1977. Where the material is to be used as the infill to the tree surrounds do not over compact the area immediately
around the tree. Seek Superintendents guidance in this regard.
The base course shall be graded and compacted to the required profiles and grades. The material shall be watered during grading
and rolling to achieve the optimum water content for compaction. Generally, compaction shall be by means of rolling with an
approved self-propelled roller.
The surface shall be tested by template to ensure accuracy and any irregularities greater than 10mm when tested with a straight
edge 3m long shall be made good by addition or removal of material and further rolling until the specified cross section is obtained.
A tolerance of levels of + 5mm will be permitted. The thickness of the base course shall not vary by more than 10% of the nominated
layer thickness.
Placement
Once an appropriate base is established install resin bound aggregate to 30mm depth or as indicated on the Drawings.
The top course shall be carefully placed upon the subgrade and compacted to achieve a dense solid surface. Any foreign matter
such as rock and soil must be removed and re-established. It is important that the fully compacted depth of material is achieved,
and the surface is even, fully compacted and free draining.
Establish a level surface with a recommended cross fall of at least 2% as indicated on the Drawings. (Don't allow water to pond on
surface). Protect area and leave surface for 24-48 hours to dry.
14.7 COMPLETION
Miscellaneous Work
Do all cutting and forming of holes for services to be installed by other trades, secure any membranes where shown to be concealed
under cappings or paving and all other labours required to complete the work.
Protection
Protect work from staining, erosion and damage, use sheeting or other screening as necessary until Practical Completion.

Protect adjoining surfaces during installation. Finished surfaces in the vicinity of work being carried out shall be protected from
staining and impact and all necessary precautions are to be taken to ensure that protection is provided and maintained.
Cleaning
On completion and following approval by the Superintendent of the work, all stone/surfaces shall be raked/brushed cleaned by
approved means to give a uniform surface free from all foreign matter.
Clean away and remove from the site all rubbish and unwanted materials and leave the area of the works clean and tidy.
14.8 TESTING
The Superintendent reserves the right to take samples of any materials at any time for test or analysis.
Should the results indicate that the requirements of this Specification have not been complied with, action will be taken under the
Contract regarding replacement, re-performance or compensation.
The costs of all failing tests or analysis will in all circumstances be paid by the Contractor.
14.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR HARDSTAND

Initial Acceptance
Initial acceptance and confirmation of Practical Completion will not be approved until the following criteria are satisfied:
The finished works shall conform to the construction tolerances and be free draining at all times. The applicable
finished surface tolerance is a maximum deviation from the bottom of a 3m straight edge shall be 10mm.
The colour of the pavement will be uniform
The surface texture is to be uniform throughout.
Where hardstand is constructed against a kerb and/or edge restraint, the top of the hardstand shall be constructed
to finish 10 mm below the lip of the adjacent edge.
Performance in Maintenance Period

Prior to the expiration of the Maintenance Period the pavement shall be examined to ensure that the requirements for initial
acceptance are still met, together with the following:
The surface and subgrade should be stable and such as not to be eroded under normal conditions.
Resin bound material shall be of uniform appearance across the project and have retained the original surface
tolerances +/- 5% of the tolerance as approved at Practical Completion.

15 SEGMENTAL ROAD PAVING (NOT USED)
emerge associates
16 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (ASPHALT) PAVEMENT (NOT USED)
emerge associates BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (ASPHALT) PAVEMENT (NOT USED)

17 LIMESTONE AND RECONSTITUTED BLOCKWORK
17.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
Construct limestone retaining walls as detailed on the Drawings

Construct diamond cut face natural limestone cladding to walls as detailed on the Drawings
Construct reconstituted limestone retaining walls as detailed on the Drawings
Supply and Install reconstituted stone cappings to walls
17.2 STANDARDS
AS/NZS 4455:1997: Masonry units and segmental pavers

AS/NZS 4456:1997: Masonry units and segmental pavers - Methods of test
AS 3700-2001: Masonry structures
AS/NZS 4517:1998: Abrasive products - Segmented saws for machining of stone and masonry cutting - Dimensions
of
steel blades
BS EN2370:1999: Natural stone test methods. Determination of resistance to salt crystallization
BS EN12371:2001: Natural stone test methods. Determination of frost resistance
BS EN12372:1999: Natural stone test methods. Determination of flexural strength under concentrated load
BS EN12407:2000: Natural stone test methods. Petrographic examination
BS EN13161:2001: Natural stone test methods. Determination of flexural strength under constant moment
BS EN13364:2002: Natural stone test methods. Determination of the breaking load at dowel hole
BS EN13755:2002: Natural stone test methods. Determination of water absorption at atmospheric pressure
BS EN13919:2002: Natural stone test methods. Determination of resistance to ageing by SO2 action in the
presence of
humidity
BS EN1925:1999: Natural stone test methods. Determination of water absorption coefficient by capillarity
BS EN1926:1999: Natural stone test methods. Determination of compressive strength
BS EN1936:1999: Natural stone test methods. Determination of real density and apparent density and of total and
open
porosity
BS EN771-6:2001: Specification for masonry units. Natural stone masonry units
BS EN772-11:2000: Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of water absorption of aggregate concrete,
manufactured stone and natural stone masonry units due to capillary action and the initial rate of water absorption
of clay
masonry units
BS EN772-20:2000: Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of flatness of faces of aggregate concrete,
manufactured stone and natural stone masonry units
BS EN772-4:1998: Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of real and bulk density and of total and open
porosity for natural stone masonry units
17.3 BLOCKS
Stone shall be sound, free from stakes, crakes, vents, pockets, veins, fissures and other like defects.
Limestone shall have a density not less than 1600 kg/m3.
Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all limestone shall be tungsten cut to the sizes indicated on the Drawings and
palletised for delivery to site.
Stone shall be stored on site clear of the ground on pallets and the stacks shall be covered with a waterproof cover to prevent
wetting.
Blocks to be as follows or as notated on the Drawings:
emerge associates LIMESTONE AND RECONSTITUTED BLOCKWORK

Capping Block to be: Natural Limestone 110x500x350mm reconstituted rammed earth available from Easy stone
Pty Ltd or approved equivalent.
Faceblocks to be Reconstituted Limestone 350x350x500mm & 350x350x1000mm available from Blokstone 1300
360 344 or approved equivalent.
Entry Wall faceblocks to be Reconstituted Limestone 165x240x500mm & 165x240x1000mm available from
Blokstone 1300 360 344 or approved equivalent.
Rear and Supporting Blocks not visible to be grey reconstituted limestone blocks.
Cladding to be: Random dietz diamond cut face natural limestone cladding. 30mm thick. No mortar covering the
face of stonework. Recessed mortar joints. Cladding to be fixed with 10mm thick cement based tile adhesive.
The Contractor shall ensure that the nominated blocks meet with the structural requirements of the Specification and the appropriate
Australian Standard.
17.4 MORTARS
General
Mortar shall comply with AS 3700 - 1988 and be used within 30 minutes of initial adding of water.
Materials for Mortar:
Fine aggregate shall be sand

Water shall be clean and of drinking quality, and
Colouring pigments shall be metallic oxides insoluble in water.
Do not use admixtures unless specified. When specified, use admixtures strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. When coloured mortar is specified, mix colouring pigments with cement and use fine aggregate compatible with
the colour required.
Mix mortar as follows:
Measure parts in mixes by volume in calibrated devices

Thoroughly mix any colouring pigments with the cement before adding other ingredients, and
Mechanically mix mortar to an even colour and consistency.
Mix mortar in the proportions as follows:
1 part ordinary Portland cement

1 part lime putty, and
6 parts fine aggregate.
Coloured Mortar
Mortar in face stonework shall match the colour of the specified reconstituted limestone blocks to the approval of the Superintendent.
17.5 WORKMANSHIP
All stone work shall be carried out by tradespersons experienced in limestone work.
Provide all accessories and perform all operations necessary for the proper execution of first class masonry work, including
selecting, cutting, dressing, carving, bedding, setting, fixing, pointing, grouting, caulking and the like.
Build in where indicated and as necessary, all reinforcements, ties and the like.
Cut openings, chases, mortices and the like for other services and fixings. Well wet down stone which is to be laid or grouted in
cement mortar.
Use non-staining softwood wedges or lead or plastic buttons for positioning stones.
Set work out, plumb, level and properly bonded, with no part rising more than 1000mm above adjacent unfinished work.
Corners and other advanced work shall be raked.
Re-lay in fresh mortar any stonework which has been moved or jarred after initial laying.
Construct all exposed areas of walls/piers to face work standard.

17.6 COURSING AND BOND
Stonework shall be to face sizes and pattern shown on Drawings and shall consist of carefully cut and dressed stone with even
joints.
Stone shall be selected on site to ensure that only clean, square edges are visible in top course and facework.
All edges shall be kept true and straight, with jointing running horizontally and vertically and finished to dimensions indicated.
17.7 JOINTS
Form joints uniformly in facework, filled solidly with mortar, rolled to a smooth finish and finished with clean, straight edges against
the stone.
Do NOT fill minor chips or hollows in stone of facework with mortar.
Joint thicknesses shall be 20mm
17.8 SAMPLES
Erect samples of limestone work as follows and obtain the Superintendents approval prior to proceeding. All limestone work shall
match the standard of the approved sample:
2 m2 wall showing capping and bond pattern

2 m2 wall showing diamond cut cladding
17.9 FOOTINGS TO LIMESTONE WALLS AND PIERS

Compaction of Sub-Grade
All wall foundations to be compacted to 95% of the modified maximum dry density when tested in accordance with AS 1289-1977
Part E2.1 for the upper 250mm.
Ducts and Conduits

Provide ducts and conduits as necessary through walls to accommodate the requirements of the irrigation system and any other
services.
17.10 REINFORCEMENT TO LIMESTONE WALLS, PIERS AND FOOTINGS

Provide reinforcement to piers and footings as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
17.11 CLEANING
Upon completion, clean down all new work and adjoining surfaces where necessary, by appropriate methods, which shall be subject
to the Superintendent's approval.
17.12 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Clean off mortar drippings and the like as soon as they occur. Protect all finished stonework from staining or damage. Use sheeting
or casing where necessary.
Do not use hardwoods in contact with stone.
Stained or damaged stonework shall be replaced, not repaired, unless otherwise permitted by the Superintendent. Similarly protect
adjoining surfaces during masonry work.
17.13 GRAFFITI PROTECTION

Supply and apply a graffiti protection system to all walls and signs and structures in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations as follows:
All limestone walls, limestone cladding and cappings
Refer to miscellaneous Specification for product details.
17.14 DAMP COURSE

The damp course shall consist of an approved spray-on bitumen-based waterproofing compound such as Pabco Pabkote 3 or
other similar approved. The Contractor shall apply the waterproofing compound to all surfaces of limestone works in planter boxes
and to the rear face of all retaining walls where proposed to be in contact with soil, to the manufacturers Specifications.
Protect adjoining surfaces during application of the waterproofing compound. Finished surfaces in the vicinity of work being carried
out shall be protected from staining and all necessary precautions are to be taken to ensure that protection is provided and
maintained.

On site application of the waterproofing compound can be carried out only after the Contractor has taken every precaution to ensure
that there is no danger of overspray damaging property or passing traffic.
Application shall not take place when weather conditions are unsuitable such as in high winds or rain.
Application shall occur subsequent to the installation of irrigation lines and all other services.
emerge associates
18 INSITU CONCRETE
18.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
Supply and install the following as detailed on the Drawings:
Construct concrete footing to structures as detailed on the Drawings

Construct concrete footpaths as detailed on the Drawings
Construct exposed aggregate concrete hardstands as detailed on the Drawings
Construct concrete mowing kerbs as detailed on the Drawings
18.2 STANDARDS
AS 3972: Specification and Methods of Test for Portland Cement

AS 1316: Masonry Cement
AS 2758.1: Concrete Aggregate
AS 1672: Building Limes
AS A123: Mortar for Masonry Construction
AS 3600: Concrete Structures
AS 3700: SAA Masonry Code.
AS 1170: SAA Loading Code
AS 1881, Part 5: Methods of Testing Hardened Concrete for other than Strength
AS 1478: Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
AS 1012: Methods for Testing Concrete
AS 3799: Liquid Membrane-Forming compounds for curing Concrete
AS 1379: The Specification and Manufacture of Concrete
AS 1141: Methods of Sampling and Testing Aggregates
AS 1289: Methods of Testing Soils for Engineering Purposes
18.3 INSITU CONCRETE FOOTINGS

Concrete
The concrete shall conform to AS 3600 - 1988 and shall be a mixture of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water
proportioned so that the amount of fine aggregate shall be the minimum that combined with the cement will produce only sufficient
mortar to fill the voids in the coarse aggregate and leave a slight excess for finishing and that the 28 day cylinder strength of the
concrete shall equal or exceed 25 MPa if not detailed otherwise in the Drawings. The cement content of any mix shall not be less
than 270 Kg/m3. No additives shall be used in the concrete, unless otherwise approved by the Superintendent. The slump shall
not exceed 70mm or be less than 30mm. The maximum size of aggregate shall be 20mm.
Cement
All cement used shall be Portland Cement in accordance with AS 3972 and obtained from an approved manufacturer. Cement shall
be delivered to the site fresh and in sealed bags and there stored in a weatherproof shed until such time that it is to be used. Any
bag showing sign of deterioration or setting is to be rejected.
Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall be well graded, clean, sharp and free from clay and organic impurities in accordance with AS 1141 - 1974 and
AS 2758.1 - 1985.
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite or diorite clear and free from all impurities and dust in accordance with AS 1141 - 1974
and AS 2785.1 - 1985.
Water
Potable water shall be used in the concrete mix. The water shall be clean and free of any deleterious matter before use in the mix.
The quantity of water used in the concrete shall be kept to the minimum necessary to ensure adequate workability of the concrete.
Under no circumstances may the water/cement ratio exceed 0.60.
Sand
Sand for mortar will be crushed stone or natural sand free from all deleterious substances and have a uniform grading. Sand for
bedding or backfilling shall be clean sand free from roots, clay or any deleterious matter.
emerge associates INSITU CONCRETE

Steel
Steel reinforcing fabric and steel reinforcing bars for concrete shall comply with the requirements of AS 1302 - 1982, AS 1303 -
1984 and AS 1304 - 1984 and be free from loose rust or matter likely to impair the bond with concrete.
Compaction of Sub-Grade
Uniformly compact sub-grade to 95% of the modified maximum dry density when tested in accordance with
AS 1289 - 1977 Part E2.1 for the upper 250mm.
Mixing and Placing

Concrete shall be mixed in an approved mechanical batch mixer. The aggregate and cement shall be first mixed dry, then after the
addition of water (the quantity of which shall be carefully measured to ensure uniformity consistency of batches), the contents shall
be mixed until there is uniformity in colour and consistency, but in no case shall the mixing continue for less than two minutes after
the addition of water.
The concrete may be mixed in an approved central plant and transported on to the site in a pre-mixed condition in specially
constructed conveyances, or centrally batched and mixed in transit by specially constructed transit mixers. Production and delivery
of the concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements of AS 1379 - 1973.
A plastic surface of concrete shall be maintained until the completion of placing of that part of the work.
Each batch of concrete shall be placed and compacted within 30 minutes of the concrete being discharged from the mixer, or
delivered to the site in a transit mixer and discharged there from. The methods of handling and placing shall prevent segregation
and/or loss of ingredients and shall avoid re-handling. The concrete shall not be dropped by more than 1 metre. Open troughs and
chutes where used shall be made of metal or lined with metal. Barrows and buckets shall be of metal. The concrete shall NOT be
thrown from shovels.
During and immediately after placing, the concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by mechanical vibration or if necessary by hand
in positions agreed by the Superintendent around the reinforcement and shall be properly spaded against the forms to ensure a
good surface free from honeycombing. The concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance after being worked into place.
Concreting shall be carried on continuously between joints. The position of all construction joints shall be subject to prior approval
of the Superintendent. Newly placed concrete shall be adequately shielded from harmful effects of sun, rain and frost.
Curing
All concrete shall be kept continuously damp for at least 7 days or until thoroughly cured. In hot, dry or windy conditions, the
exposed concrete shall be covered and sealed with a PVC membrane, or similar approved material, such that adequate moisture
is retained for proper curing.
Finishing
All exposed surfaces of concrete shall be finished smooth and dense. All honeycombed portions shall be cut out and made good
to the satisfaction of the Superintendent immediately after the formwork has been struck. All projecting imperfections shall be
rubbed down flush with carborundum stone or other approved means and resulting grit and dust thoroughly washed off with clean
water. Then as a separate operation a 1-1/2:1 approved sand and Portland Cement mixture shall be worked into the pores over
the whole surface with a fine carborundum float in such a manner that no material is left on the concrete face than is necessary to
fill the pores completely, so that a uniformly smooth and dense surface is presented.
Formwork
The design and construction of the forms shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The forms shall be removable without injury
to the concrete. The forms shall be made either of approved timber, free from loose knots and other defects, or metal in which all
bolt and rivet heads are countersunk in faces in contact with the concrete, or other approved material.
The forms shall be built true to line, and braced in a substantial and unyielding manner to maintain position and shape. Joints in
forms shall be either horizontal or vertical and the forms and joints shall be mortar tight. Re-entrant angles shall be chamfered and
corners filleted, the bevel in each case having equal angles and sides of 25mm, if not shown otherwise in the Drawings.
The contact face of timber formwork used for exposed concrete surfaces shall be made of either dressed timber or undressed timber
lined with an approved waterproof lining not liable to warp, so that exposed concrete surfaces on stripping shall be smooth and even
and true to the dimensions and slopes given in the Drawings.
Forms shall be provided for all vertical surfaces of concrete to be placed in earth excavation.
Dimensions affecting the construction of other parts of the work shall be checked carefully, after the erection of forms and before
the placing of concrete. The oil, grease or soap used on forms to prevent adhesion of mortar shall be such that no discolouration
of the surface of concrete will result. The oil, grease or soap shall be spread uniformly in a thin film and any surplus shall be removed
prior to the placing of concrete.

No concrete shall be placed until the forms have been approved by the Superintendent. The approval of the Superintendent does
not relieve the Contractor from its responsibility to provide adequate and dimensionally correct formwork at the required location,
level and alignment. If, after the concrete has been placed, the forms show any signs of bulging or sagging, the affected part of the
concrete shall be removed. The forms shall be reconstructed rigidly to the satisfaction of the Superintendent and the removed part
of the work shall be reconstructed to the requirements of this Specification at the earliest opportunity. All this work shall be completed
at no cost to the Principal.
Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be built up exactly as shown on the detail Drawings and supported in position so as to give the correct
cover. Bars and stirrups shall be wired firmly together at all points of intersections and the ends of all wires turned inwards away
from the shuttering. Fabric must be waved up over supports exactly as shown on the Drawings. The use of a fabric bender is
recommended.
The reinforcement shall be accurately bent cold to the shapes shown on the working Drawings and all bends shall conform to the
special details supplied.
The Contractor shall provide at the Contractor's own expense all supports of timber or other material, pre-cast motor spacing blocks,
tying wire and other materials. Fabric reinforcement shall be supplied in flat sheets. Any fabric which has been taken from a roll
will not be allowed to be used on the works.
Testing
The consistency of concrete shall be determined by the slump test in accordance with AS 1012.3 - 1983. The Contractor shall
provide the necessary equipment and conduct the test whenever requested by the Superintendent.
The method of sampling fresh concrete for testing is to be carried out in accordance with AS 1012.1 - 1981.
The Contractor shall provide four (4) standard moulds for the making of strength test cylinders in accordance with methods
prescribed in AS 1012.8 - 1986. Cylinders shall be made when required by the Superintendent and shall be tested after curing and
maturing in accordance with AS 1012.9 - 1986, AS 1012.10 - 1985 and AS 1012.11 - 1985, as appropriate.
The testing shall be allowed for within the Contract Sum, except that the cost of all tests failing to reach the required strength shall
be borne by the Contractor.
18.4 INSITU CONCRETE PAVING(FLATWORK) - STANDARD

Earthworks and Subgrade Preparation
Carry out earthworks and preparation to allow for levels to be achieved to finished grades as specified. Unless otherwise permitted,
excavated material shall not be deposited on existing grass areas. Remove all topsoil containing roots, grass or organic material.
Ensure all service trenches are uniformly backfilled and compacted with the surrounding material. All isolated hollows and soft
spots are to be filled to finished level by compacting in layers of no more than 100mm in depth. All subgrade is to be uniformly
compacted to the required strength using a plate compactor or vibrating drum roller. Compaction shall be to 95% modified maximum
dry density. 100mm thick rises of low volume change material ie. limestone road base or approved equivalent shall be used if
existing site soil is inadequate to achieve the required strength.
Sub-Base Preparation
Sub-Base shall be clean yellow fill sand. It shall be placed and compacted to a minimum depth of 50mm and to 90% modified
maximum dry density.
Colour
Concrete shall be standard grey or approved equivalent.
Samples by Contractor
The Contractor shall supply and lay a sample panel of each concrete colour each 1.5 x 2.0 metres. All samples shall be reproducible
at the price submitted with Tender. The Superintendent shall select one of the sample panels for use to areas as shown on the
plans. The samples panels shall be protected from damage to enable comparison following completion of the works. The Contractor
shall be responsible for maintaining the quality and colour approved in the samples across all relevant works.
Form work
Form work shall be of steel or suitable dressed seasoned timber planks, free of warps, bends of kinks.
Set out of form work to be approved prior to pouring. The Superintendent must approve the path setout and form work prior to
pouring of concrete, give adequate notice (24 hours min) for inspection and approval prior to pouring.
Forms shall be staked with no less than 3 stakes and not more than 1.5m apart to prevent unspecified warps and bends. Forms
shall be in one piece for the concrete pavement thickness specified. Control joints should be straight, even and true.
Concrete

The concrete shall conform to AS 3600 - 1988 and shall be a mixture of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water
proportioned so that the amount of fine aggregate shall be the minimum that combined with the cement will produce only sufficient
mortar to fill the voids in the coarse aggregate and leave a slight excess for finishing.
Concrete shall be grade N20 have a maximum aggregate size of 14mm and include quarry dust.
The cement content of any mix shall not be less than 270 Kg/m3. No additives shall be used in the concrete, unless otherwise
approved by the Superintendent. The slump shall not exceed 70mm or be less than 30mm.
Cement
All cement used shall be Portland Cement in accordance with AS 3972 and obtained from an approved manufacturer.
Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall be well graded, clean, sharp and free from clay and organic impurities in accordance with AS 1141 - 1974 and
AS 2758.1 - 1985.
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite or diorite clear and free from all impurities and dust in accordance with AS 1141 - 1974
and AS 2785.1 - 1985.
Water
Potable water shall be used in the concrete mix. The water shall be clean and free of any deleterious matter before use in the mix.
The quantity of water used in the concrete shall be kept to the minimum necessary to ensure adequate workability of the concrete.
Under no circumstances may the water/cement ratio exceed 0.60.
Steel
Steel reinforcing fabric and steel reinforcing bars for concrete shall comply with the requirements of AS 1302 - 1982, AS 1303 -
1984 and AS 1304 - 1984 and be free from loose rust or matter likely to impair the bond with concrete.
Placement
Lay concrete at widths shown on Drawings and to 100mm depth unless otherwise indicated and finish with a steel hand trowel.
Expansion and Isolation Joints

Provide 15mm wide expansion joints in paving evenly spaced at intervals not exceeding 6 metres apart.
Where Lock Joint or approved equivalent is used in pathways( no wider than 2.5m) expansion joints are required every 50m along
a straight, unhindered path or at the start of a deviation of a curve in the path. Expansion joints are also to be installed along all
edges where the slab abuts either a structure, pier, post, paved surface or similar.
Set into expansion joints a backing of 15mm diameter closed cell polyethylene strip. Set strip back sufficient distance so that sealing
compound will finish flush with paving.
Seal expansion joints with a polysulphide or polyurethane based sealing compound. Depth of sealing compound shall not exceed
the width of the joint. Colour of sealing compound shall blend with colour of concrete.
Where polysulphide sealing compounds are used, coat surfaces of concrete in contact with sealing compound with a sealer
recommended by the sealing compound manufacturer.
Control and Contraction Joints

Provide control joints in paving evenly spaced at intervals not exceeding 2 metres apart.
Control joints shall be formed using a v-notched steel trowel. Trowelling should occur in direct straight lines across the path or as
dictated on site by existing joints.
Finish to control joints shall be approved by Superintendent or to match existing paths on site.
Where Lock Joint or approved equivalent is used as the control joint to pathways these are to be spaced to a maximum of 1.5
times the width of the path. Spacings may be increased when laying on sand with the approval of the Superintendent.
Finishing
After placing and compaction, concrete shall be finished monolithically to a smooth, even surface by means of steel floats or other
suitable equipment. Refer to exposed aggregate clauses below for specialised finishes where required.
On completion of steel floating and before initial set, the surfaces of concrete paths, driveways and minor paving shall be brushed
to a non-skid texture. This shall be achieved by Drawing a moistened nylon broom lightly across the surface at right angles to the
direction of the path or paving.

All concrete indicated as being textured, exposed aggregate or feature panels shall be finished to match approved samples.
Sealant
The Contractor shall allow to supply and install sealant to all concrete paving areas. The sealant shall be a commercially
manufactured, clear, non yellowing, sealant designed to prevent staining from oils, grease and general dirt equal or equivalent as
approved by the Superintendent to Nu Pave by Crommelin Chemicals or Natural Finish by Bondall.
Path Widths
The Contractor shall allow to supply and install footpaths to the dimensions as indicated on the plans.
18.5 INSITU CONCRETE PAVING (FLATWORK) EXPOSED/WASHED AGGREGATE
Note: All Specification Clauses noted above for Standard Flatwork apply equally to Textured and Exposed Aggregate
Concrete unless otherwise noted.
Concrete Mix
Exposed Aggregate Concrete Hardstand Holcim Eucalyptus exposed aggregate concrete, close shave finish or
approved equivalent
Exposed Aggregate Concrete Hardstand Holcim Boab exposed aggregate concrete, close shave finish or
approved equivalent
Holcim (Australia) Pty Ltd

Western Australia State Office
18 Brodie Hall Drive
Bentley WA 6102
Phone 08 9212 2000
Fax 08 9212 2001
Exposed Aggregate
All paths and pads within this contract are to be exposed aggregate. All concrete shall be finished to match the colour and texture
of the approved sample.
Samples by Contractor
The Contractor shall supply and lay a sample panel of each exposed aggregate type each 1.5 x 2.0 metres. All samples shall
be reproducible at the price submitted at Tender. The Superintendent shall select one of the sample panels for use to areas as
shown on the plans. The samples panels shall be protected from damage to enable comparison following completion of the works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the quality and colour approved in the samples across all relevant works.
The Contractor shall refer to the Holcim Best Practice Placement Guidelines when installing all Holcim products. If an alternate
method is proposed this must first be submitted to the Superintendent for approval prior to proceeding with the works.
Indicative image of exposed aggregate concrete.
Holcim Colour: Eucalyptus Holcim Colour: Boab
Placement
The concrete shall contain an integral mix of the specified aggregate to the entire depth of the slab. Concrete shall be placed,
screeded and bull floated to the finished level ensuring an even cover of approximately 2mm of cement mortar to the aggregate at
the surface.
Exposing Aggregates
Aggregates shall be exposed through the water wash-off technique. The slab shall be brushed and flushed with water soon after
the concrete has stiffened. Aggregate exposure shall commence when the surface can bear the weight of the pavior without making
surface impressions deeper than 2-3mm.
A medium-bristle broom together with a continuous water spray shall be used to wash away the surface cement matrix. The water
spray is to be sized to avoid dislodging smaller aggregate particles. To avoid weakening the mortar and dislodging aggregate the

surface shall not be broomed repeatedly. Re-trowelling of the surface may be necessary to tightly pack the aggregate particles for
an improved finish and then the washing process repeated.
Smaller sections are to be hand worked with a sponge and brush where necessary.
If washing larger areas the Contractor shall ensure water runoff is not concentrated into defined areas and thereby removing
additional mortar.
No aggregate is to be exposed more than one third of their individual depth. Aggregate shall be exposed uniformly across each slab
and consistently over the entire project to match the approved samples.
Inconsistent or unevenly exposed panels will be rejected and are to be relaid at the Contractors cost.
Finishing
All cement film is to be washed from the finished surface.
Details for the use of surface set retardants are to be submitted to the Superintendent at the time of sample panels being laid.
Following exposure of aggregates the surface shall be kept free of all traffic for a minimum of 7 days.
The surface shall be acid washed with a mix of 1 part hydrochloric acid to between 10-20 parts water to remove any remaining
cement film. The surface shall first be thoroughly wetted to prevent acid soaking into the surface. The surface shall then be rinse
with clean water to remove residual acid. If a curing compound has been used the use of acid shall be delayed until the curing
compound has degraded.
All surfaces are to be sealed as noted under the Standard Flatwork Section.
18.6 INSITU CONCRETE MOWING KERBS

Setting out of the Works
Construct mowing kerbs to areas shown on Drawings or as determined on site by the Superintendent.
Materials
Concrete shall be minimum strength 32 MPA, 20mm aggregate & a max slump of 65mm.
Colour
Concrete shall be standard grey concrete using cement to match footpaths.
Earthworks
Carry out earthworks and preparation of surfaces to achieve eve grades to the final approval of the Superintendent. Compact
kerbing sub-base to 90% of modified maximum dry density.
Installation
Kerbing shall be constructed using machine formed extruded insitu concrete to have dimensions as indicated on the drawings.
Kerbing is to be free from imperfections and irregularities in width and thickness and must be constructed in good straight line and/or
smooth even radius curves, to the approval of the Superintendent.
Construct control joints at 3.0 metre maximum centres and at least one quarter of the depth of the kerb section.
Hand constructed mowing kerbs must be done using good quality framework capable of producing uniform, well finished kerbs in
either straight and even lengths or smooth, even curves.
Top surface of all kerbing must finish flush with surrounding surfaces and/or ground level.
Finish all kerbing monolithically to a smooth, even surface by means of a steel trowel or other surface equipment.
Provide surface protection to kerbing as necessary to prevent cracking of the concrete due to temperature changes during curing
periods. Make good to all poorly constructed and/or damaged lengths of kerb.
On Completion
Remove all excess concrete from site and backfill with soil flush with top of kerb.
18.7 SHOTCRETE / BLINDING TO WATERCOURSES & LAKE EDGES

As described on the Drawings, place Shotcrete / Blinding over the geotextile fabric to the full depth and extent shown on the Contract
Drawings.
The Shotcrete mix to be used shall achieve 35Mpa within 28 days of being laid (submit proposed mix formula for approval prior to
commencing work on site). Shotcrete shall be applied carefully to provide a minimum 75mm layer over all surfaces. It shall be

applied in a fashion to prevent any stress to the geotextile fabric and with no slumping. Should slumping occur it shall be eliminated
before the concrete has set. The geotextile fabric shall be re-positioned in a relaxed state and the Shotcrete re-applied as specified.
The finish on all Shotcrete areas is to be equivalent to (or no rougher than) a standard wood float finish. The outer edging is to be
struck-off as detailed and given a smooth rounded edge.
emerge associates
19 CONCRETE AND BRICK MASONRY
19.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations
in connection with Concrete Masonry walls.
Construct Concrete Masonry and Brickwork walls as detailed on the Drawings

Construct Concrete Pre-Fabricated walls as detailed on the Drawings
This section covers the construction of masonry, including unreinforced brickwork and blockwork wall, piers and lintels. It also
includes the construction of reinforced hollow blockwork.
19.2 STANDARDS
has been revised, amended and/or designated, or is not current as at the date of close of Tenders, the applicable Standard shall
be the Australian Standard which is current as at the date of close of Tenders.
AS 3972: Specification and Methods of Test for Portland Cement

AS 1316: Masonry Cement
AS 2758.1: Concrete Aggregate
AS 1672: Building Limes
AS 3700: SAA Masonry Code
AS 3700 Masonry structures
AS 4773.1 Residential masonry Part 1: Design
AS 4773.2 Residential masonry Part 1: Construction
AS/NZS 4455 Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units - Masonry units
AS/NZS 4456 Masonry units and segmental pavers and flags Methods of test
AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings
AS/NZS 2699.1 Built-in components for masonry construction - Wall ties
AS/NZS 2699.2 Built-in components for masonry construction - Connectors and accessories
AS/NZS 2699.3 Built-in components for masonry construction - Lintels and shelf angles (durability
requirements)
AS A123: Mortar for Masonry Construction
AS 3972 Portland and blended cements
AS 1316 Masonry composite cement
AS 1672.1 Limes and Limestone - Limes for building
AS 2758.1 Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes - Concrete aggregates
AS 3660.1 Termite management New Building work
AS 3660.2 Termite management In and around existing buildings and structures - Guidelines
AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles
AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire
AS 2837 Wrought alloy steels stainless steel bars and semi-finished products
AS/NZS 4792 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on ferrous hollow sections, applied a continuous or
specialised process
AS/NZS 4791 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on ferrous open sections, applied by an in-line process
AS/NZS 4671 Steel reinforcing materials
AS 1397 Steel sheet and strip
AS 3600 Concrete structures
AS 2870 Residential slabs and footings Construction
19.3 SUBMITTALS
Manufacturer's Literature
Manufacturer's printed literature indicating product Specification and installation instructions for each product required by this
Section.
Manufacturer's Data
Manufacturer's certification that the following comply with the requirements specified:
Portland Cement
Hydrated Lime
emerge associates CONCRETE AND BRICK MASONRY

Mortar Aggregates
Concrete Masonry Units (all types specified)
Samples
Samples to be submitted if requested as follows:
Hollow concrete blocks: one of each size

Solid concrete blocks: one of each size
Samples will be reviewed for colour and/or texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor.
Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings indicating details of anchors, inserts, joints, connections to adjoining work or materials including elevations indicating
setting out and placement of all joints, openings, cut-outs, etc.
Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of reinforcing bars for concrete masonry work:
Comply with Australian Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures unless more stringent
requirements are specified.

Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies
as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for concrete masonry work.
19.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION

Co-ordination with Inserts
Ensure co-ordination between masonry work and concrete work such that all inserts and flashing reglets required for the proper
installation of masonry work are correctly pre-installed.
Pre-Installation Inspection
Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the masonry work is to be installed. Notify the
Superintendent in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
installation of masonry work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Superintendent.
19.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Do not change brands or sources of supply for masonry materials during the course of the work.
Deliver concrete masonry materials other than bulk materials to site in manufacturer's unopened containers, bundles, pallets or
other standard packaging devices, fully identified with name, type, grade, colour and size.
Protect all concrete masonry material during shipment, storage and construction against wetting and soilage or intermixture with
earth or other types of materials.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent all masonry items from chipping, cracking or other damage during transportation,
unloading and storage on site.
Damaged units will not be allowed to be installed.
Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings that will reduce or destroy bond.
Outside storage of masonry units and reinforcement shall be on plank platforms, off the ground, in dry locations.
19.6 PROTECTION
Protection During Progress of Work
When the ambient air temperature is more than 30OC in the shade and the relative humidity is less than 50% protect the masonry
from direct exposure to the wind and sun for 48 hours after installation.
Protect partially completed concrete masonry walls against weather when work is not in progress by covering top of walls with strong
waterproof, non-staining membrane.
Extend membrane at least 600 mm down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place ensuring that there is free air flow sufficient
to prevent heat build-up.
Protection of Completed Work

Keep completed walls clean and protect from staining.
Use suitable corner guards to protect the corners of exposed masonry walls.
19.7 CO-ORDINATION
The Work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the work of other sections.

Verify dimensions and work of other trades which adjoin materials of this Section before the installation of items herein.
19.8 PRODUCTS / MATERIALS

Bricks/blocks shall be as described on the dwgs. Specifically
Bricks to shelters shall be recycled red commons(solids) nom 230x110x76
Bricks to face playground retaining walls shall be recycled red commons(solids) nom 230x110x76
A sample of all products noted above are to be inspected by the Superintendent for approval.
19.9 MORTAR
For general applications (except as listed for M4), Type M3 mortar shall be used, and shall consist by volume of:
1 part GP or GB cement, 1 part lime, 6 parts sand (water thickener optional)
1 part GP or GB cement, 5 parts sand plus water thickener
1 part masonry cement, 4 parts sand.
For the applications listed below, Type M4 mortar shall be used, and shall consist by volume of:
1 part GP or GB cement, 0.5 part lime, 4.5 parts sand (water thickener optional)
1 part GP or GB cement, 4 parts sand plus water thickener
1 part GP or GB cement, 0-0.25 parts lime, 3 parts sand (water thickener optional)
1 part masonry cement, 3 parts sand.
This applies to:

Elements in interior environments subject to saline wetting and drying
Elements below a damp-proof course or in contact with ground in aggressive soils
Elements in severe marine environments
Elements in saline or contaminated water including tidal splash zones
Elements within 1 km of an industry producing chemical pollutants.
19.10 DAMP-PROOF COURSE

Damp-proof-courses shall be built into the masonry in accordance with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard
(AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2). Unless stated otherwise, damp-proof-courses shall be:
Placed under walls to provide a continuous damp-proof barrier around the building
Lapped not less than 150 mm at joints
Projecting through the entire width of the masonry and project beyond the external face of the masonry
Stepped at changes of floor level
Positioned (if applicable) under the coping of any parapet more than 300 mm above adjoining roof cladding
Positioned (if applicable) in chimney stacks, 150 mm to 300 mm above the highest junction of roof and chimney
At least 75 mm above finished surface level of adjacent paved, concreted or landscaped areas that slope away
from the wall
At least 50 mm above finished paved or concreted areas sloping at least 50 mm over the first 1 m from the building
and protected from the direct effects of the weather by a carport, verandah or similar
At least 150 mm above the adjacent finished ground in all other cases.
19.11 FLASHINGS
Flashings shall be built into the masonry in accordance with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700,
AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2). Unless stated otherwise, flashings shall be:
Fixed with clouts to timber studs or built into an inner leaf of masonry as applicable
Built into the external leaf of walls exposed to weather, extending across the cavity,
Turned up 150 mm and nailed to the frame or built 30 mm into an inner leaf of masonry,
Positioned at openings (unless they are protected by an overhang), where they shall extend 100 mm past the end
of opening and be turned up to prevent leakage.
19.12 TERMITE PROTECTION

Termite protection measures shall comply with the Building Regulations and the relevant Standard (AS 3660.1)
The aim of most termite barriers is to force the termites to the surface of the structure, where they are visible and can be easily
eradicated. Some termite barriers also include chemicals that deter the termites from passing. Other systems, involving chemical
dosing and graded stone barriers may be applicable, but must be properly maintained. Refer to the relevant materials specifications.
Termite protection shall provide a continuous barrier that prevents termites from entering the building undetected. The critical areas
for termite entry, including the external perimeter, construction joints and plumbing penetrations, shall be protected and treated by
a termite management system. The system installation shall conform to the manufacturers guidelines.

A manufacturers warranty for a minimum of fifty (50) years shall be provided. The warranty shall be renewable on an annual basis,
base on annual inspection by the system installation organisation. Such a warranty shall provide for timber replacement should a
system breach occur.
A certificate permanently fixed to the building in a prominent location, such as a meter box, kitchen cupboard, or similar, shall
indicate the following:
Method of protection.
Date of installation.
Life expectancy of any termiticide and the required re-injection date.
Installers or manufacturers recommendations for the scope and frequency of future inspections for termite activity,
not greater than 12 months.
Sheet material acting as a termite barrier within the masonry and their joints shall be constructed of termite-resistant materials, such
that termites are unable to pass through them. The maximum aperture size of a perforated sheet material barrier shall be sufficiently
small as to deny access to foraging termite species of the region. Combinations of materials likely to cause electrolytic reaction shall
not be used, e.g. stainless steel mesh shall not be used in contact with mild steel reinforcement.
19.13 SLIP JOINTS

Slip joint material shall be placed between unreinforced masonry walls and any supported concrete slab.
19.14 WALL TIES

Wall ties shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS
4773.2).
19.15 JOINT REINFORCEMENT

One layer of joint reinforcement shall be incorporated into concrete or calcium silicate masonry at points of potential cracking such
as at the corners of door or window openings.
19.16 LINTELS AND ARCH BARS

Lintels and arch bars shall be built in over openings in excess of 1.0 metre accordance with the Drawings, Building Regulations and
relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2).
19.17 ANCHORAGES
Anchorages, including those to tie down roof structures, shall be installed at specified locations, and in accordance with the
Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2).
19.18 MORTAR JOINTS

Mortar joints shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2). Unless
stated otherwise, mortar joints shall comply with the following:
Mortar joint shall be 10 mm thick.

Mortar joints in solid or cored face masonry shall be fully bedded. Joints shall be as specified on the drawings.
Mortar joints in solid or cored backup or non-face masonry shall be fully bedded and flush jointed.
Mortar joints in hollow blockwork, shall be face shell bedded and shall be ironed, unless a flush joint is specified for
aesthetic reasons.
19.19 WEEPHOLES
Weepholes shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2). Unless
stated otherwise, weep holes shall be built into the external leaf of cavity walls or veneer walls at centres not exceeding 1.2 metres
in the course immediately above a DPC or flashing, except where the head or sill opening is less than 1.0 metre wide.
19.20 PROVISION FOR TIMBER SHRINKAGE

In masonry veneer construction, a gap in accordance with schedule below shall be left between the timber frame and the top of the
masonry, and at window sills, to accommodate timber shrinkage.
Location in timber framed buildings Minimum Clearances (mm)

Unseasoned hardwood frame Other timber frame
Sills of lower or single storey windows 10 mm 5 mm
Roof overhangs of single storey buildings 16 mm 8 mm
Sills of second storey windows 20 mm 10 mm
Roof overhangs of two storey buildings 24 mm 12 mm

Vertical control joints or articulation joints shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700,
AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2). Unless stated otherwise, vertical control joints or articulation joints shall be built into unreinforced masonry
at the following locations:
Centres not exceeding the following in straight continuous walls without openings
For sand and rock sites (Class A), and slightly reactive sites (Class S), with little or no ground movement from moisture changes:
Articulation is not required.
For moderately reactive clay or silt sites, which can experience moderate ground movement from moisture changes (Class M or
MD) and highly reactive clay sites, which can experience high ground movement from moisture changes (Class H or H-D)
External masonry face finish, rendered or painted 7.0 m

Internal masonry sheeted and/or face finished 6.0 m
Internal masonry rendered and/or painted 5.0 m
Not closer than the height of the wall away from corners
Not more than 5 metre centres in a wall with openings more than 900 x 900 mm, and positioned in line with one
edge of the opening
At the position where a wall changes height by more than 20%
At a change in thickness of a wall
At control joints or construction joints in supporting slabs
At the junctions of walls constructed of different masonry materials
At deep rebates
At a distance from all corners not less than 500 mm and not greater than 3000 mm.
Articulation and control joints shall not be placed adjacent to arches. Control joints in concrete masonry arches shall be saw-cut to
half the depth of the masonry unit and positioned at the centre of the arch.
Control joints and articulation joints, shall be 10 mm wide and shall consist of a polystyrene backing rod and a polyurethane material
gunned into the joint to form a 10 x 10 mm flexible seal. The backing rod shall be placed into the masonry at a depth, which permits
the finish of the control joints to match the mortar joints.
For control joints or articulation joints in cavity walls (i.e. not in veneer walls), extendible masonry ties shall be built into every fourth
course.
Where an articulation joint is adjacent to a door or window frame, a 10 mm gap shall be provided between the edge of the frame
and the masonry to allow for movement.
19.21 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED MASONRY CONSTRUCTION (EXCLUDING RETAINING WALLS)
All construction of reinforced concrete masonry shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS
3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2). Unless stated otherwise, the following shall apply:
Vertical steel reinforcement shall be tied using tie wire to steel starter bars through clean-out holes in each
reinforced core and fixed in position at the top of the wall by plastic clips or template. Starter bars shall be tied into
position to provide the specified lap above the top surface of the footing. The starter bars shall be held in position
on the centre line of a reinforced blockwork wall by a timber member or template and controlled within a tolerance
of +,- 5 mm through the wall and +,- 50 mm along the wall.
Horizontal steel may be laid in contact with rebated webs of Double U or H blocks. It shall be held in position by steel ties or plastic
clips. Cover to horizontal steel in lintel blocks shall be maintained by the use of wheel type plastic clips.
The minimum cover (from the edge of the steel reinforcement to the inside face of the block core) shall be 20 mm, except where
specified otherwise. In severe marine environments, saline or contaminated water including tidal and splash zones, and within 1 km
of an industry in which chemical pollutants are produced, the minimum cover to the inside face of the block core shall be 30 mm.
Control joints shall be built into reinforced concrete masonry at all points of potential cracking and at the locations shown on the
drawings. The spacing of control joints should not exceed 8.0 metres, except that the spacing of control joints may be increased in
reinforced masonry walls meeting the following criteria:
Consisting of at least 190 mm hollow concrete units, and

Built less than 3.0 metres high, and
Incorporating a top reinforced bond beam, and
Incorporating N16 horizontal reinforcement at not greater than 400 mm centres
On a site with rock or slightly reactive foundations, and
With a reinforced concrete footing of adequate stiffness.

19.22 MASONRY UNITS
Masonry units shall be fired clay, concrete or calcium silicate units complying with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant
Standard (AS/NZS 4455.1). Unless stated otherwise, properties shall be not less than:
Masonry units shall comply with Dimensional Category DW1, except that split or irregular faces may be DW0.
Concrete units usually comply with Dimensional Category DW4 , which is more stringent than for DW1.
Masonry units shall meet General Purpose Salt Attack Resistance Grade, except for applications requiring
Exposure Grade. Applications requiring Exposure Grade are:
o saline wetting or drying,
o aggressive soils,
o severe marine environments,
o saline or contaminated water including tidal or splash zones, or
o within 1 km of a industry producing chemical pollutants
Masonry units shall have a Characteristic Compressive Strength not less than a value specified by the Engineer. In the absence of
such specification, masonry units shall have Characteristic Compressive Strengths not less than the following values.
Minimum Characteristic Compressive Strength of Masonry Units 1
Application Hollow units2 Solid, cored or horizontally

cored units3
Reinforced masonry 15.0 MPa
Loadbearing masonry 15.0 MPa 10.0 MPa
Non-loadbearing masonry 10.0 MPa 3.0 MPa
Notes
1. Values of minimum characteristic compressive strength specified by the Engineer over-ride the values given in
this table. Designers and specifiers should check with the manufacturers the availability of particular strength grades.
2. For hollow units, compressive strength is measured using face shell bedding.
3. For solid, cored or horizontally cored units, compressive strength is measured using full bedding.
Masonry units intended for face applications and exposed to the weather shall have:
Permeability not more than 2 mm/minute
Efflorescence Potential of Nil or Slight
Colour and texture within an agreed range.
Masonry units intended for exposure to lateral loads in excess of 0.5 kPa shall have a Characteristic Lateral Modulus of Rupture
not less than 0.8 MPa.
Concrete masonry units shall have a Mean Coefficient of Residual Drying Contraction not more than 0.6 mm/m.
Masonry units for reinforced masonry applications shall have the following properties: If units are intended to incorporate both
horizontal and vertical reinforcement and are not protected both sides by a waterproof membrane, they shall be H or Double U
configuration;
Units may be fully grouted and may be reinforced both vertically and horizontally;
Grout may flow easily around and enclose the reinforcement in all cores; and
Cover is consistent with the requirements for durability, strength and fire resistance as appropriate
19.23 DEFINITIONS
Dimensional Category DW0

No Requirements
Average deviation of a sample of 20 units; +,- 2.5 mm (dimensions under 150 mm); +,- 4.5 mm (dimensions 150 to
250 mm); +,- 5.0 mm (dimensions over 250 mm)
For a sample of 20 units, the standard deviation of work sizes shall be not more than 2 mm, and the difference
between the mean and the work size shall be not more than 3 mm. For split faces, the dimensional deviations shall
not apply to the width of the unit, provided the average width is not less than 90% of the work size.
General Purpose Salt Attack Resistance Grade
Performance such that it is possible to demonstrate that the product has a history of surviving under non-saline
environmental conditions similar to those existing at the site considered, but not expected to meet the mass loss
criterion for Exposure Grade Salt Attack Resistance Grade.

Exposure Grade Salt Attack Resistance Grade
Performance such that it is possible to demonstrate that the product has a history of surviving under saline
environmental conditions similar to those existing at the site considered; and less than 0.2 grams mass loss in 40
cycles in AS/NZS 4456.10, Method B test.
19.24 CEMENT
Cement shall be Type GP portland cement or GB blended cement complying with the relevant Standard.(AS 3972).
19.25 MASONRY CEMENT

Masonry cement shall comply with the relevant Standard (AS 1316).
19.26 LIME
Lime shall be hydrated building lime complying with complying with the relevant Standard (AS 1672).
19.27 WATER THICKENER

Water thickener shall be methyl-cellulose based.
19.28 SAND
Sand shall be well graded and free from salts, vegetable matter and impurities. Sand shall not contain more than 10% of the material
passing the 75 micron sieve. Sand within the following grading limits complies with this requirement and is deemed suitable for
concrete masonry.
Sieve Percent Passing

4.76 mm 100
2.36 mm 95100
1.18 mm 60100
600 n 30100
300 m 1050
150 m 010
75 m 04
19.29 CONCRETE GROUT

Concrete grout shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2).
Unless stated otherwise, properties shall be:
a minimum portland cement content of 300 kg/cubic metre;

a maximum aggregate size of 10 mm;
sufficient slump to completely fill the cores; and
minimum compressive cylinder strength of 20 MPa
19.30 JOINT MATERIAL

Joint material shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2). Unless
stated otherwise:
Backing rod for control joints, expansion joints and articulation joints shall be expanded polystyrene tube or bead
or, rigid steel backing profile with closed cell foam adhered to the metal profile face.
Joint sealant shall be gun grade multi-purpose polyurethane sealant.
Control joints and articulation joints shall incorporate de-bonding tape.
Intumescent seals shall be acrylic co-polymer sealant capable of providing the requisite fire performance as specified in the
Drawings and/or Building Regulations as appropriate.
19.31 DAMP PROOF COURSE

Damp-proof courses (DPCs) shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS/NZS 2904).
Unless stated otherwise damp-proof courses (DPCs) shall consist of one of the following options.
A material complying with the Standard AS/NZS 2904;

Embossed black polyethylene film of high impact resistance and low slip, with a nominal thickness of 0.5 mm prior
to embossing, and meeting the requirements of the relevant Standard (Clause 7.6 of AS/NZS 2904);
Polyethylene coated metal damp proof courses with an aluminium core not less than 0.1 mm thick, shall be coated
both sides with bitumen adhesive enclosed in polyethylene film not less than 0.1 mm thick on each face, and has
a nominal total thickness of not less than 0.5 mm prior to embossing;
Bitumen impregnated materials of not less than 2.5 mm thickness, that meet the requirements of the relevant
Standard (Clause 7.5 of AS/NZS 2904), when used in walls that are not higher than 7.8 m above the level of the
DPC;
Termite shields (with no penetrations) continuous throughout the wall or pier.

Notes:
Metal and metal-cored damp-proof courses and termite shields shall not be used in locations with saline ground water or subject to
rising salt damp.
19.32 FLASHINGS
Flashings shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS/NZS 2904).
Metal and metal-cored flashings shall not be used in locations that expose them to saline ground water or rising
salt damp.
Metal flashings shall be compatible with the materials with which they are in contact, and shall not give rise to
electrolytic action. If there is potential for electrolytic action to occur, flashings shall be isolated by inert materials.
Flashings intended to hold their shape shall be manufactured from rigid material. (e.g. metal cored material)
Unless stated otherwise flashings shall consist of one of the following options:
Flashing in Concealed Locations (e.g. cavity flashings) shall be one of the following:
Uncoated annealed lead having a mass not less than 10 kg/m2 in lengths not exceeding 1.5 m, but shall not be
used on any roof that is used to catch potable water;
Uncoated copper having a mass not less than 2.8 kg/m2 and having a thickness of 0.3 to 0.5 mm;
Bitumen coated metal (normally aluminium) with a total coated thickness of 0.6 mm to 1.0 mm;
Zinc coated steel with a thickness not less than 0.6 mm;
Embossed/quilted polyethylene sheet with an average thickness not less than 0.5 mm
Flashings in Exposed Locations (e.g. flashings from the roof to masonry wall) shall be one of the following:
Uncoated annealed lead having a mass not less than 20 kg/m2 in lengths not exceeding 1.5 m, but shall not be
used on any roof that is used to catch potable water;
Uncoated copper having a mass not less than 2.8 kg/m2 and having a thickness of 0.3 to 0.5 mm;
Bitumen coated metal (normally aluminium) with a total coated thickness of 0.6 mm to 1.0 mm;
Zinc coated steel of thickness not less than 0.6 mm.
19.33 TERMITE BARRIERS CONSISTING OF WOVEN STAINLESS STEEL MESH

Woven stainless steel mesh acting as a termite barrier shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard
(AS 3660.1). Unless stated otherwise, properties shall be not less than the following:
Mesh shall be woven wire from a fine wire loom.

Wire shall be stainless steel grade 304 or 316 (AS 1449).
Wire diameter shall be not less than 0.18 mm.
Aperture size shall be not greater than 0.66 mm 0.45 mm, except in those locations where a very small species
of heterotermes vagus is present (e.g. parts of northern Australia), the aperture shall be reduced to a maximum of
0.40 0.40 mm
Pipe collars, manufactured from woven stainless steel mesh with a 50 mm annulus, shall be attached to any
penetrating service by a stainless steel clamp. Such collars shall be:

Embedded in the concrete; or
Clamped and parged to the top surface of the slab, and protected from damage by covering with a tile mortar bed
or a false floors of cupboards or vanities. The clamp shall be sealed with the parging mix.
19.34 TERMITE BARRIER PARGING MATERIAL FOR WOVEN STAINLESS STEEL MESH
Parging material, for woven stainless steel mesh acting as a termite barrier, shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations
and relevant Standard (AS 3660.1). Unless stated otherwise, parging material shall be a highly modified cementitious grout of a
water-dispersed copolymer with a dry mixture of Type GP portland cement and sieved aggregate of a size that passes readily
through the woven stainless steel mesh. Hardened parging material shall provide:
Termite resistance, when in contact with soil and termite workings;
Bond strength (mesh to substrate) of not less than 1 kN/m at 28 days for a temperature range of 10C to 30C at a relative humidity
range of 10%RH to 70%RH; and for at least 60 freeze-thaw cycles in saline solution between 15C and 18C.
19.35 TERMITE BARRIERS CONSISTING OF COMPOSITE FIBRE BLANKET AND PLASTIC MEMBRANE WITH TERMITICIDE
IMPREGNATION
Termite barriers, consisting of composite fibre blanket and plastic membrane with termiticide impregnation, shall comply with the
Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3660.1). Unless stated otherwise, properties shall be not less than:
Internal non-woven fibre blanket, not less than 200 grams per square metre,
Impregnated with termiticide of pyrethroid deltametherin crystals to a loading of not less than 1 gram per square
metre (low toxicity to warm blooded animals which both strongly repels and kills termites),
Bonded to a top moisture vapour barrier of low density polyethylene (LDPE), not less than 200 microns thick,
Bonded to a bottom membrane of low density polyethylene (LDPE) not less than 50 microns thick, to prevent the
termiticide leaching into soil.

19.36 SLIP JOINT MATERIAL
Slip joint material shall comply with the following requirements. Metal slip joint materials shall not be used in locations that are
subject to rising salt damp.
Bitumen-coated aluminium
Embossed polyethylene
Polyethylene-and-bitumen coated aluminium.
19.37 WALL TIES

Wall ties shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS/NZS 2699.1). Unless stated
otherwise, wall ties shall comply with the following:
For elements in a mild environment, elements in an interior environments above a damp-proof course and enclosed within a building
except during construction, elements above the damp-proof course in non-marine exterior environments,
elements above the damp-proof course in other exterior environments, with a waterproof coating, properly flashed junctions with
other building elements and a top covering (roof or coping) protecting masonry, elements below a damp-proof course or in contact
with ground, that are protected from water ingress by an impermeable membrane; ties shall be:
Galvanised steel or polymer designated R2 (or greater), or

Manufactured from Z600 galvanised sheet steel, or sheet steel ties galvanised after manufacture with 300g/m2 of
zinc on each side.
For elements in marine environments (1 km or more but less than 10 km from breaking surf ; or 100 m or more but less than 1 km
from salt water not breaking surf); ties shall be:
Sheet steel ties galvanised after manufacture with 470g/m2 of zinc on each side, or
Galvanised wire ties with 470g/m2 of zinc coating, or
Stainless steel designated R3 or greater; or
Polymer ties designated R3 or greater.
For elements in interior environments that are subject to non-saline wetting and drying, elements below the damp-proof course in
contact with non-aggressive soils, or elements in fresh water; ties shall be:
316 or 316L stainless steel ties designated R3 or greater; or

For elements in severe marine environment (less than 1 km from breaking surf ; or less than 100 m from salt water not breaking
surf), interior environments subject to saline wetting and drying, elements below a damp-proof course or in contact with ground in
aggressive soils; or elements in severe marine environments (less than 1 km from breaking surf ; or less than 100 m from salt water
not breaking surf), ties shall be:
316 or 316L stainless steel ties designated R4 or greater; or

For elements in saline or contaminated water including tidal splash zones or elements within 1 km of an industry producing chemical
pollutants, ties shall be:
316 or 316L stainless steel designated R5; or

Polymer ties designated R5.
Wall ties shall comply with AS 3700, AS 4773.1 and AS 4773.2, based on the classifications set out in AS 2699.1.
Extendible masonry ties for control joints and articulation joints shall restrain the wall against out-of-plane movement, but permit in-
plane movement such as expansion and contraction. Extendible masonry ties shall be capable of correct operation, even when
misaligned by up to 10 mm over the length of the tie.
19.38 STEEL LINTELS AND ARCH BARS

Steel lintels and arch bars shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773., AS
4773.2, AS/NZS 2669.3 as defined in the following schedule.
Note: Although most lintels are not below a damp-proof course or in contact with ground, these cases have been included in the
schedule for completeness and because it is possible for them to occur.
For elements in a mild environment, elements in an interior environments above a damp-proof course and enclosed within a building
except during construction, elements above the damp-proof course in non-marine exterior environments, elements above the damp-
proof course in other exterior environments, with a waterproof coating, properly flashed junctions with other building elements and

a top covering (roof or coping) protecting masonry, elements below a damp-proof course or in contact with ground, that are protected
from water ingress by an impermeable membrane, steel lintels and arch bars shall be designated R2 or greater.
For elements in interior environments that are subject to non-saline wetting and drying, elements below the damp-proof course in
contact with non-aggressive soils, elements in marine environments, elements in fresh water; steel lintels and arch bars shall be R3
or greater.
For elements in external applications 1 km or more from breaking surf or 100 m or more from salt water not subject to breaking surf
(Classified Moderate), BCA Vol 2 Clause Table 3.4.4.2 permits the following protection:
2 coats alkyd primer, or

2 coats alkyd gloss, or
Hot dip galvanised to 300 g/m2, or
Hot dip galvanised to 100 g/m2 plus 1 coat solvent based vinyl primer or 1 coat vinyl gloss or alkyd.
For elements in interior environments subject to saline wetting and drying, elements below a damp-proof course or in contact with
ground in aggressive soils, elements in severe marine environments; steel lintels and arch bars shall be designated R4 or greater.
For elements in saline or contaminated water including tidal splash zones, elements within 1 km of an industry producing chemical
pollutants; steel lintels and arch bars shall be designated R5. For external applications in heavy industrial areas (Classified Severe),
steel lintels may be hot dip galvanised to 600 g/m2.
Maximum Opening for Steel Lintels and Arch Bars (mm) 1 2
Span mm Load Type A 3 Load Type B 4 Load Type C 5 Load Type D 6 Load Type E 7
Supporting Supporting Supporting Supporting Supporting
masonry only Tiled Roof Metal Roof Timber Floor Brickwork Only
(up to 3000 mm)
75 x 8 FMS 640 250 640
100 x 10 FMS 820 250 250 250 820
90 x 90 x 6 EA 3060 1550 1930 1680 2640
90 x 90 x 8 EA 3310 1670 2100 1820 2800
100 x 100 x 6 EA 3400 1730 2160 1870 2870
100 x 100 x 8 EA 3660 1870 2340 2020 3040
150 x 90 x 8 UA 4200 2710 3380 2840 3920
150 x 100 x 10 UA 4330 3490 3610 3010
150 UB 14.0 4200 3140 3840 3270 4200
150 UB 18.0 4200 3480 4140 3590 4200
180 UB 22.2 4200 4000 4200 4050 4200
1. The spans tabulated are clear opening widths. To determine the overall length of a lintel, add at least 300 mm to the clear
opening, thus providing at least 150 mm bearing length at each end.
2. For openings up to 1000 mm, the required bearing length may be reduced to 100 mm at each end.
3. Load Type A applies to a lintel supporting a masonry leaf up to 600 mm high without roof or floor loads.
4. Load Type B applies to a lintel supporting up to 600 mm of masonry and a tiled roof up 6.6 metres load width.
5. Load Type C applies to a lintel supporting up to 600 mm of masonry and a metal roof up 6.6 metres load width.
6. Load Type D applies to a lintel supporting a masonry leaf over 2100 mm high with or without tiled roof or metal roof up 6
metres load width and/or timber floor up 3.0 metres load width.
7. Load Type E applies to a lintel supporting a masonry leaf up to 3000 mm high without roof or floor loads.
19.39 REINFORCED CONCRETE LINTELS
Reinforced concrete lintels shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 3600).
19.40 REINFORCED HOLLOW MASONRY LINTELS

Reinforced hollow masonry lintels shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1,
AS 4773.2).
19.41 REINFORCED MASONRY BED JOINT LINTELS

Reinforced masonry bed joint lintels shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS
4773.1, AS 4773.2). For applications in external walls, reinforcement shall be Grade 316 austenitic stainless steel, 6 mm diameter
(or 8 mm or 10 mm for heavy duty applications in wide joints).
19.42 ANCHORAGES
Anchorages shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2).
Mechanical expansion anchors shall not be used where the expansion action is likely to damage the masonry.
19.43 ACOUSTIC ISOLATION TIES

Acoustic isolation ties shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS/NZS 2699.1).
Unless stated otherwise, acoustic isolation ties, intended to acoustically isolate one leaf of plasterboard from a frame shall provide

the specified sound attenuation. They shall consist of galvanised steel or stainless steel (with additional powder coated finishes as
required), and incorporate cellular urethane foam inserts. The ties shall have the following features:
Stiffness of 0.7 kN/mm (linear) up to 0.16 kN

Maximum deflection of resilient material of 2.3mm.
19.44 JOINT REINFORCEMENT

Joint reinforcement shall comply with the Drawings, Building Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS/NZS 2699.1)
For external walls, in applications requiring structural enhancement of wall strength or for significant crack control,
joint reinforcement shall be Grade 316 austenitic stainless steel, 6 mm diameter (or 8 mm or 10 mm for heavy duty
applications in wide joints).
For non-structural applications in protected internal walls, external walls, joint reinforcement shall be stainless steel
(as per external / structural applications) or two 3.0 mm galvanised wires joined at intervals by cross wires.
19.45 STEEL MULLIONS

Steel mullions used to provide resistance to wind and earthquake loads in masonry walls shall comply with the Drawings, Building
Regulations and relevant Standard (AS 3700, AS 4773.1, AS 4773.2, AS 4100, AS 2699.2).
19.46 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

All new work shall remain open until it has been inspected and approved by the Superintendent.
The following inspections shall be performed.
19.47 EXECUTION
Item or Product Inspection Required Accept Criteria Hold/Witness
Masonry units
Type Spot check* As specified Hold
Dimensions Spot check* As specified Hold
Strength Spot check* delivery As specified Hold
docket
Mortar
Mix As specified Hold
Bond strength Spot check As per AS 3700 (0.2 Witness
Not required unless mix is MPa)
Termite barrier suspect Hold
In position
Flashings & DPCs Visual Hold
In position
Control Joints Visual spot check Hold
As specified
Joint reinforcement Visual spot check Witness
In position
Ties Visual spot check Witness
As specified
Lintels Visual spot check Witness
As specified
HD Bolts and straps Visual spot check Witness
As specified
Cleaning Visual spot check Witness
As specified
Reinforcement (if Visual
applicable) Hold
Type and diameter As specified Hold
Position Spot check As specified Hold
Laps Visual As specified
Spot check
* delivery docket
Inspection
Examine Surfaces.
Inspect existing surfaces and ensure that they are satisfactory for work to proceed as specified.
Report unsatisfactory conditions to the Superintendent.
Do not proceed until rectified to satisfaction of the Superintendent.

19.48 WORKMANSHIP
Blockwork shall be constructed in accordance with BS 5628 or equivalent Australian Standard and laid in a workmanlike manner
with true and regular horizontal courses and staggered vertical joints with walls and partitions bonded to one another at junctions
and angles.
All joints shall be 10 mm nominal thickness.
Horizontal joints shall be properly level.

Vertical joints shall be properly lined and jambs and other angles plumped as the work proceeds.
Not more than five courses of blocks shall be laid in any one day within any section of walling.
Cut blocks shall only be used where required for bonding purposes or to facilitate building in of other components.
Hollow blocks, where required by the Superintendent, hollows shall be filled with concrete at ends of walls and jambs to openings
below lintels, beams and slabs which bear on the wall.
Filling with mortar or material other than that specified will not be acceptable.
Walls shall be carried up uniformly without leaving any part more than 4 courses lower than adjacent sections unless the permission
of the Superintendent is first obtained.
Any work left at different levels shall be evenly stepped back.

In cavity wall construction one skin shall not be taken more than 3 courses above the adjacent skin.
Blocks shall be soaked with water for 24 hours before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be well wetted immediately prior
to recommencement of work.
The faces of walls shall be kept clean and free from mortar dropping and splashes.
Blockwork abutting concrete columns shall be tied with 32 x 6 mm thick galvanised steel cramps shot fired to the concrete and built
in every third course of blockwork and shall be debonded from the blockwork by painting with bitumen.
Chases
Form chases and recesses as shown and as may be required for the work of other trades.
In select instances, the Contractor may be allowed to chase hollow blocks, if approved by the Superintendent.
Do not cut horizontal or diagonal chases in load bearing work.
Provide not less than 200 mm between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.
Construction Openings
Leave openings for equipment as shown or required to be installed at later date.
Complete masonry work after equipment is in place using materials identical with those immediately adjacent to the opening.
Construction Joints
Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Toothing will not be permitted.
Before new work is started, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry.
Wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted).
Remove loose blocks and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
Cutting Blocks
Use motor driven saw designed to cut blocks with clean sharp corners.
Cut blocks as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full blocks without cutting wherever possible.
Avoid the use of less than half size blocks at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
Do not use chipped or broken blocks.
Age of Blocks
Do not build in concrete blocks until at least 28 days after manufacture and until they are fully cured.
19.49 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING

Replace blocks which are chipped, broken stained or do not match adjoining units as intended or are otherwise damaged.
Provide new blocks promptly to match adjoining blocks.

Point up mortar or grout joints to eliminate evidence of replacement.
Cleaning
During masonry installation and the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar.
Point up all joints at corners, openings and adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat appearance, properly prepared for the
application of sealant compounds and other work to follow.
Clean the exposed masonry surfaces as follows:

All exposed work shall be cleaned without the use of acid. Cleaning shall not be done until mortar is thoroughly set and hard.
Before wetting wall, remove large particles of mortar by means of wood scraper, or if necessary by means of citsel or wire brush.
Pre-soak the wall saturating the masonry with clean water and flush off all loose mortar and dirt.
Using a stiff fibre brush only, scrub down the wall with a solution of 0.25 litre household detergent and 0.25 litre of trisodium
phosphate dissolved in 4 litres of clean water.
Thoroughly wash off all cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean pressurised water.
If after this cleaning procedure is completed, the wall or portion of the wall is not clean in the judgment of the Superintendent, the
Contractor shall clean with an acid solution by means and methods acceptable to the Superintendent.
If cleaned with an acid solution, all sashes, metal lintels and other material shall be thoroughly protected.
Particular care shall be taken to prevent smearing mortar on surfaces of concrete masonry units.
If mortar smearing occurs, it shall be removed while soft, when possible; if dry and hard, it shall be removed by rubbing with a small
piece of concrete masonry.
All mortar smears, drippings, etc. on expanded faces of concrete masonry units shall be removed.

20 STABILISED / RAMMED EARTH WALLS (NOT USED)
emerge associates
21 LAKES AND HYDRAULICS (NOT USED)
emerge associates
22 WATER FEATURES (NOT USED)
emerge associates WATER FEATURES (NOT USED)

23 STREET FURNITURE AND PLAY EQUIPMENT
23.1 PLAY EQUIPMENT

The Supply and Installation of the play equipment as nominated in the Contract is to be undertaken by the Nominated Sub Contractor
inclusive of delivery. The nominated Provisional Sum for supply and install of the play equipment is as per the Tender Schedule.
The Contractor shall make allowance for all co-ordination and construction of the playground surrounds as per the plans and details
as required. This is inclusive of earthworks, drainage and supply and compaction of the subgrade to the playground.
The nominated Sub-Contractor shall assess the adequacy of the Sub-grade material and the levels of compaction provided by the
Contractor. The level of compaction of the subgrade shall be 90% Modified Maximum Dry Density when tested in accordance with
Australian Standards. Any concerns in this regard are to be brought to the Superintendents notice prior to the installation of
equipment or finished surfacing. Upon acceptance of the playground site by the nominated Sub-Contractor they shall be solely
responsible for the adequacy of the compaction. The nominated Supplier/Sub-Contractor is solely responsible for the complete
construction including excavation and backfilling of the footings of the play equipment.
Playground Equipment Supply and Installation:
Playright Australia
Contact Nasser Anastasi
Unit 1, 17 Mordaunt Circuit, Canning Vale WA 6155
Phone: 08 9256 1560
Fax: 08 9256 1561
Custom Play Tower Supply and Installation:
Subject to separate tender
23.2 PLAY EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SAFETY AUDIT REQUIREMENTS

Playground equipment and associated soft fall areas are to comply with the relevant Australian Standards and the requirements of
the Local Government Authority.
A Playground Equipment Safety Audit is required irrespective of size/quantity or type of proposed playground equipment.
A Playground equipment audit is required to be conducted after installation and provided to the Superintendent prior to the award
of Practical completion and the use of the equipment by the public
The safety audit shall cover all aspects of the play equipment and the surrounding play area inclusive of an analysis of fall height
and the adequacy of softfall areas.
An annual audit is required after the post-installation audit, with a final audit completed prior to handover to the local government
authority. Items identified as requiring action are to be rectified as per the audit. All audits are to be carried out by a certified
playground auditor with at least five years experience who has regularly performed audits over the past five years. A copy of the
qualifications of the auditor is to be provided with the audit.
23.3 PLAYGROUND SANDPIT

The Contractor shall supply and install the playground surrounds and sandpit as per the Drawings and details, in conjunction with
the nominated supplier. The Contractor shall excavate for sand pit, construct and backfill walls, as required, to achieve design intent
as per Drawings and details. Supply and install 400mm min clean white washed builders sand to the full extent of playground area
including over all play equipment footings, together with a geo-textile fabric layer below the clean washed sand. A 5Kg sample of
sand shall be supplied and approved by the Superintendent prior to the installation of the sand.
23.4 PLAYGROUND RUBBER SOFTFALL

General
All softfall is to be installed as per the design, falls and levels to the extent nominated on the landscape drawings and the detailed
drawings of the playground equipment as supplied by the playground equipment manufacturer.
Rubber softfall is to be finished to ensure it is free draining without any ponding and to ensure even drainage. The softfall rubber is
to be installed progressively and be fully maintained during the contract period as may be required.
Standards
respective Australian Standard applicable which is current as at the date of close of tenders.
appropriate materials and/or work practices which are required by the Client. Where a nominated Standard or Interim Standard has
been revised, amended and/or designated as not current as at the date of close of tenders, the applicable Standard shall be the
Australian Standard which is current as at the date of close of tenders.
emerge associates STREET FURNITURE AND PLAY EQUIPMENT

AS 4422 -1996: Playground Surfacing Specifications, Requirements and Test Methods

AS 4486.1 1997: Playgrounds and Playground Equipment
23.5 Materials
Base Layer
A highly compacted material such as quarry dust, crushed limestone and / or their equivalents as approved by the Superintendent.
The base material is to provide a secure stratum and be free draining.
Cushion Layer
The cushion layer is to be comprised of recycled shredded tyre rubber to match the manufacturers test specifications. The material
used is to be clean of all contaminants such as nylon and have no loose wire fibres. The cushion layer is to be mixed as per the
top layer in a specified pre polymer polyurethane & rubber ratio to the manufacturers specifications.
Top Layer
The top layer is to be as nominated on the detail drawings and as approved by the Superintendent and be:
15 mm depth Melos (or equivalent and approved) 1 - 4mm EPDM granules applied in a wet-poured, smooth trowel
finished surface. Colours are to be as per the detail drawings or are to be advised.
23.6 Laying
Base Layer
The base layer is to be prepared to a high standard to ensure surface quality and to prevent future subsidence and growth of plant
matter through the surface.
An 80mm thick pad of 4mm diameter compacted quarry dust or equivalent should be installed over an existing prepared sand
surface. The existing sand should be levelled out and all organic matter removed prior to the installation of the compacted base
layer. The compacted base layer must be sufficiently wetted and compacted to a level firm finish.
Compaction of the base is to be 92% minimum. This shall be achieved by dampening the uncompacted material slightly and
compacting using a vibrating plate.
The resultant base shall be smooth and contain no variations in height in excess of +/-10mm.
Cushion Layer
The Contractor shall submit a soft fall plan to the Superintendent prior to the commencement of the works which should reflect the
laid thickness minus the specified top layer thickness.
The cushion layer is to be laid as a single monolithic surface with minimal joins. Thickness may vary in relation to proximity and
location of play equipment or be laid to a single thickness equal to or exceeding the depth required to provide impact attenuation
for the maximum fall height and fall zone. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to liaise with the Playground Manufacturer to
determine the thickness and density required to match the certified softfall requirements.
Top Layer
A 15mm thick top layer is to be hand batched and laid to the manufacturers surface specifications to meet the various surface
thicknesses and various polymer ratios as required to meet the safety criteria as listed in the applicable standards of the playground
design.
The top layer is to be laid as a single monolithic surface if it is of a single colour or colour blend. If shapes or a pattern is indicated
on the landscape drawings, the top layer is to be laid with only the minimum number of joints required to separate the colours or
patterns.
Key Joints
The Contractor is to ensure that all divisional changes of colour, end of pour sections and detailed design edges are formed with
correct key joints. The horizontal planes of the joints are to be a minimum of 100mm in width.
The cured key joint is to be wet primed on its vertical and horizontal faces prior to application of the next rubber pour. Ensure that
the wet prime material is not allowed to cure prior to application of the new rubber. Ensure that the new rubber is well compacted
into the key joint prior to floating off.
Butt joints will not be accepted under any circumstance.
23.7 STREET FURNITURE

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install the following furniture as nominated on the plans:

Mark Cox Urban Furniture
Address: 117 The Boulevard Floreat 6014
Phone: 08 9287 2611
Fax: 08 9287 2622
Street Furniture Australia

Address: Perth Office
PO Box 634 Morley WA 6943
Phone: +618 9471 8101
Fax: +618 9471 8102
Email: wa@streetfurniture.net
Sales Manager: Krystyna Browne
Urban Art Projects (UAP)

Address: Brisbane Office
41 Holland St, Northgate Brisbane QLD 4013
Phone: +617 3630 6300
Email: : andre.loodewijk@uapcompany.com
Sales Manager: Andre Loodewijk
PILA Group
99A South Creek Road, Cromer NSW 2099
Phone: 1300 745 247
Email: info@pilagroup.com.au
Forpark Australia
PO Box 484 Cloverdale WA 6985
Phone: +618 9472 1788
Fax: +618 9472 1789
Email: forpark@forparkaust.com.au
Sales Manager: Shaun Reynolds
Taskers (Windsocks)
38 Daly Street, South Fremantle WA 6162
Phone: +618 9437 9222
Mobile: 0417 991 816
Email: steve@taskers.com.au
Sales Manager: Steve Hartley
23.8 AFL GOAL POSTS

The Principal has nominated Tennis Courts WA to supply and construct the tennis court and fencing with lockable access gates
located as per plans. Note; fencing is to completely surround the Court. Lighting is not required. The tennis court shall be designed
and constructed for removal and reuse at a later date.
PILA Group
99A South Creek Road, Cromer NSW 2099
Phone: 1300 745 247
Email: info@pilagroup.com.au
23.9 PICNIC SETTINGS

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install all bench seating as nominated on the Drawings. Picnic Setting shall be; Cox Urban
Furniture Urban Edge. Model; URB:TBS MB600 DA+2. Colour: Mid Grey. All Tables and Benches shall be securely fixed to a level
100mm thick concrete pad as specified and detailed, finished flush with adjoining levels to grade at 2% for drainage. Concrete pads
shall be 2800mm x 1800mm unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. These mild steel and jarrah fixings are available from:

Phone: 08 9287 2611
Fax: 08 9287 2622
23.10 BENCH SEATING

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install all bench seating as nominated on the Drawings. Benches shall be; Cox Urban
Furniture Urban Edge Bench. Model; URB:SAT M332E. Colour: Mid Grey. Benches shall be securely fixed to a level 100mm thick

reinforced concrete pad as specified and detailed, finished flush with adjoining levels to grade at 2% for drainage. Concrete pads
shall be 2800mm x 1800mm unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Benches are available from:

Phone: 08 9287 2611
Fax: 08 9287 2622
23.11 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install all drinking fountains as nominated on the Drawings. Drinking Fountains shall be
equal or equivalent to Urban Art Projects (UAP) Channel drinking fountain. The Contractor shall be responsible for plumbing a
metered supply to the nearest available connection point within the adjacent road reserve. The meter shall be located in an
underground pit with trafficable lid in a location to the approval of the Superintendent. All Water Authority applications and
connection fees are to be paid for by the Contractor on behalf of the Principal. Drinking fountains are available from:
Urban Art Projects (UAP)

Address: Brisbane Office
41 Holland St, Northgate Brisbane QLD 4013
Phone: +617 3630 6300
Email: : andre.loodewijk@uapcompany.com
Sales Manager: Andre Loodewijk
23.12 RUBBISH BINS

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install rubbish bins as per the Drawings. Contractor shall note that installation is as per the
drawings & manufacturers recommendation. Bins are available from:
GC Sales
9 Bruce Street Leederville WA
Phone: 9248 3726
Contact: Paul Homes
The Contractor shall allow for the supply and installation of the bind stand with a 240 litre Wheelie Bin or similar approved by the
Superintendent. The installation of the Wheelie Bin must occur at the same time as the installation of the bin enclosure.
23.13 BOLLARDS
The Contractor shall allow to supply and install bollards as per the Drawings. Bollards shall be SFA Slim Bollard: B5 Dome & SFA
Slim Bollard: B5 Dome (Removable). The Contractor shall note that installation is below ground bolt-fix to footing and that the finish
shall be standard Stainless Steel to be confirmed. Bollards are available from:
23.14 FITTNESS EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install all fitness equipment as nominated on the Drawings. Benches shall be; Forpark
Parkfit Equipment. Model; Step Up & Cycle Seat. Colour: Blue. Fitness Equipment shall be securely fixed below ground as per
the suppliers specification & details, finished flush with adjoining levels to grade at 2% for drainage. Fitness Equipment available
from:
Forpark Australia
PO Box 484 Cloverdale WA 6985
Phone: +618 9472 1788
Fax: +618 9472 1789
Email: forpark@forparkaust.com.au
Sales Manager: Shaun Reynolds
23.15 WINDSOCKS
The Contractor shall allow to supply and install high quality HD Galvanised powder coated flag poles as nominated on the Landscape
plans and details. All windsocks shall conform to relevant Australian Standards and the details and notation contained within the
Drawings. Final profiles, colours & artwork designs to be approved by the Superintendent prior to manufacture.
emerge associates
24 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
24.1 GRAFFITI COATING
General
The Contractor shall allow to supply and apply a non-sacrificial graffiti coating to all walls, signs and vertical surfaces unless
otherwise specified or directed. Do not apply graffiti coating to any signage unless directed to do so on site, removal of graffiti coating
applied to signage will be at the Contractors expense. The Principal will not be liable for any costs associated with removal of graffiti
during the Construction period.
Materials
Source graffiti coating from an approved supplier and ensure application rate and method meets the
Suppliers recommended standards. Anti graffiti coating shall be equal or equivalent to Dynashield, two-part, clear waterbased
acrylic coating or similar approved by the Superintendent. Application shall be as per manufactures recommendations for individual
surface types.
Safety
All works and product handling shall be undertaken in strict accordance with the approved material safety data sheet and the
manufacturers Specification.
24.2 COMPOSITE TIMBER

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install composite timber decking as per the Drawings. Composite timber shall Modwood
Decking Silver Gum (Brushed). The Contractor shall note that installation for the composite timber is as per manufacturers
specification.
Modwood Decking
Colour: Silver Gum
Finish: Brushed
Sizes: 137 x 23mm & 88 x 23mm. Refer drawings for specific sizes per item.
Fixings: As per manufacturers specification or as noted by structural engineer.
24.3 WINDBREAK FENCE

The Contractor shall allow to supply and install a windbreak fence to the extent indicated on the Drawings. The windbreak fence
shall be designed to prevent sand, rubbish and debris blowing onto completed landscape works. The windbreak fence shall also
screen views to ongoing earth working to areas outside the landscape scope of works.
The windbreak fence shall consist of 1200mm high cyclone mesh fence fixed 3 strand wire trace between standard spaced metal
star picket posts. Black shade cloth is to be fixed to the inside of the fence on the opposite side from the completed landscape
works.
24.4 LIMESTONE BOULDERS

The Contractor shall allow for the supply and installation of limestone boulders as indicated on the plans and details.
The limestone boulders shall be of a size nominated as 3 man rocks to 5 man rocks in size and supplied and placed suitably to
prevent moving by the general public upon completion of the works.
It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure all rockwork is well settled and secure in its position and does not constitute a risk to
the public.
24.5 GEOTEXTILE
Geotextile shall be FILTER WRAP non-woven polyester geotextile as supplied by Geofabrics Australia Pty Ltd, or similar and
approved.
24.6 PAINTING
GENERAL
Standards
Follow the guidance given in AS/NZS 2311 and AS/NZS 2312.
Powder Coating
Aluminium surfaces: To AS 3715.
Steel or zinc coated surfaces: To AS 4506.
Wet Paint warning

Place notices conspicuously and do not remove them until the paint is dry.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Premium Paints
Use only premium paints from approved manufacturers.
emerge associates MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

Paint Manufacturer
Prior to placing orders provide a list showing the brand of the paint proposed for use and the trade names of the paint types referred
to by generic type and APAS specification number in the painting schedule.
Spray Painting - Hold point.

Do not apply by spray without approval.
Combinations
Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.
Delivery
Deliver paints to the site in the manufacturers labelled containers. Ensure containers are marked with the APAS (Australian Paint
Approvals Scheme) specification number.
INSPECTION
Notice - Witness Point
Witness Point: Give sufficient notice so that each of the following stages may be inspected:
substrate immediately prior to commencement of painting.
Prior to application of final coat.

PAINTING
Substrate Preparation
Prepare new surfaces for painting in accordance with Section 3 of AS/NZS 2311.
For repainting of existing surfaces comply with Sections 7 and 8 of AS/NZS 2311. This includes cleaning down with sugar soap,
treatment of mould growth, rubbing back existing painted surfaces with abrasive paper and patching and priming of damaged
surfaces.
Order of work
Complete clear timber finishes before commencing opaque paint finishes in the same area.
Protection
Remove door furniture, switch plates, light fittings and other fixtures before starting to paint, and refix in position on completion of
painting.
Restoration
Clean off marks, paint spots and stains progressively and restore damaged surfaces to their original condition. Touch up damaged
decorative paintwork or misses with the paint batch used in the original application.
Fillers
Provide a filler tinted to match the substrate if the finish is transparent.
Paint application
Apply the first coat immediately after substrate preparation and before contamination of the substrate can occur. Ensure each coat
of paint or clear finish is uniform in colour, gloss, thickness and texture, and free of runs, sags, blisters, or other discontinuities.
Number of coats
Apply additional coats if necessary at no extra cost to achieve the required total film thickness and satisfactory opacity.
Priming before fixing

Timber: Apply a first coat (two coats to end grain) to exposed roof trim, timber doors including tops and bottoms of doors, associated
trims and glazing beads before fixing in position.
Steel: Apply a priming coat of zinc-rich organic binder to APAS - 2916.
Repair of galvanising
If galvanised or zinc-coated surfaces have been cut or welded after galvanising, prime the affected area with a zinc-rich organic
binder to APAS - 2916.
Paint system description

If a system is referred to only by its final coat (for example by the manufacturers brand name, the APAS specification code or the
generic name) provide stains, primers, sealers and undercoats which are suitable for the substrate and are compatible with the
finish coat and each other.
Painting Schedule
Refer to the Project Specific Requirements for painting, where applicable.
emerge associates MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

25 SOFT LANDSCAPE WORKS
25.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
This Specification covers the supply and installation of soft landscape materials including but not limited to:
Soil mixes
Plant material
Mulches
25.2 STANDARDS
AS 4454-1997: Composts, Soil Conditioners and Mulch

AS 3743-1996: Potting Mixes
AS 4454-2003: Standard mark pasteurised mulch
AS 4454-2003: Standard mark composted soil conditioner
AS 4419(int)-1996:Soils for Landscaping Use
ARMCANZ guidelines for Biosolids Management(Draft) 1995
25.3 SOIL CONDITIONER

Soil conditioner shall generally consist of :
5 parts Composted Sawdust

5 parts Composted Treated Sewerage
10 parts Peat
30 parts Gin Gin Red Loam and
50 parts Screened Black Topsoil
Soil conditioner shall be free from pathogens and heavy metals and produced in accordance with AS 4454-2003.
Metro Soil Conditioner as supplied by Amazon Soils (Tel: 08 9302 1288), is acceptable. Alternatives must be submitted as a 5
Kg sample together with a current laboratory certification for approval by the Superintendent.
The Contractor shall supply and incorporate soil conditioner to all planted and grassed areas as follows:
Turf
Import and spread 50mm depth soil conditioner and thoroughly incorporate into top 150mm of topsoil
Garden Beds
Import and spread 75mm depth soil conditioner and thoroughly incorporate into top 300mm of existing soil
Tree Planting (5 to 1000 litre stock)
Import soil conditioner and thoroughly incorporate with backfill to tree pit in the proportions 3 parts backfill to 1 part
soil conditioner
Soil conditioner shall be incorporated using a rotary hoe except in raised planting beds and other areas with restricted access where
the Contractor shall allow for hand digging.
The chemical composition shall be as follows unless otherwise approved by the Superintendent:
emerge associates SOFT LANDSCAPE WORKS

25.4 PLANT SUPPLY
Trees, shrubs and plants
Trees, shrubs and plants shall be supplied by approved suppliers and be in accordance with the Plant Schedule and Drawings.
The following trees have been reserved by the Principal. Contractors are to allow for install only for the trees below;
10 No. Mature Transplants Olea europea Olive Tree

The trees listed above shall be obtained from the Nominated Supplier by the Principal.
The Contractor shall arrange for delivery to site and shall give the nursery at least 3 working days notice of delivery/collection date.
The Contractor shall be responsible for supply and planting of replacements for all dead or failing plants during the period of the
Contract and the subsequent 13 week Consolidation Period and, as such, shall reject any trees reserved by the Principal which, in
its opinion, are not of acceptable quality and shall inform the Superintendent accordingly within two weeks of entering into the
Contract.
Plant quality
Plants shall be vigorous, well established, hardened off, of good form consistent with species or variety, not soft or forced, free from
disease and insect pests, with large healthy root systems and no evidence of having been restricted or damaged. Trees shall have
a single leading shoot.
The Superintendent will reject any trees, shrubs or plants, which do not meet with its approval.
If, in selecting the trees, shrubs and plants as shown on the Drawings or as specified, the Contractor finds the best quality of trees,
shrubs and plants available at the time vary in species and container sizes to those shown or specified, they shall notify the
Superintendent. The Superintendent shall give the Contractor all necessary directions regarding the selection of plant species and
container sizes and such will be the subject of a variation to the Contract.
Plant substitutions
Make no substitutions unless approved in writing. Substitutions will not be approved if the Contractor has not complied with the
Specification. The Superintendent will select and nominate all substitutions.
25.5 PLANTING GENERALLY

Setting out the works
Where underground services, manholes, cable pits, fire hydrants, lamp standards, retaining walls, kerbing, roads, paving and other
obstructions occur, plant trees, shrubs and plants clear of such service and obstructions and protect services and obstructions from
damage by machines and equipment.
Plant labelling
Label at least one plant of each species or variety in a batch with a durable, readable tag.
Plant replacements
Order sufficient quantities to allow for plant failures, Replace with plants of the same specified type, quality and size, and plants
which fail or are damaged during the work under the Contract.
Plant warranty
Furnish a warranty from the supplier attesting that they are true to the specified species and type, and free from diseases, pets,
weeds and the like.
Plant storage on site

Wherever possible, plants shall be planted immediately after delivery to the site. If this is not possible, keep them in good condition
by appropriate storage methods, or as may be directed. Prevent theft, drying out or damage from any cause including frost, wind,
sun, rain, animals and the like. Provide an on-site nursery for holding plant stock on site for more than 48 hours, of sufficient size,
with provision for watering.
Planting generally
Remove trees, shrubs and plants from their containers in such a manner as to do as little disturbance as possible to the roots.
Where necessary tease out root-balls before planting.
Place trees, shrubs and plants in holes in an up-right position and backfill level with top of root-ball. Compact soil by hand watering.
Mass planting areas

Excavate a hole for each plant large enough to provide not less than 150mm all around the root system of the plant, or as shown
on the Drawings.

Individual planting in grassed areas
Excavate a hole 100mm deeper and 600mm wider than plant containers of 5 litre and over, or 450mm diameter x 300mm deep for
pots, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Break up the base of the hole to a further depth of 100mm, and loosen compacted
sides of the hole, as necessary to prevent confinement of root growth to the hole.
25.6 DEPTH OF PLANTING

When the plant is in its final position in its hole or bed the top soil level of the plant root-ball shall be level with the finished surface
of the soil surrounding the hole or bed. Test the depth by measuring the sides of containers. If backfilling is required to correct the
depth, use top-soil as specified.
25.7 PLANT PLACEMENT

When the hole of bed appears to be of correct size and not before, remove the plant from the container with minimum disturbance
to the root-ball, and place it in its final position, in the centre of the hole and plumb.
Fertiliser tablets
Prior to backfilling all plants are to receive approved fertiliser tablets such as Agraform or similar and in accordance with
manufacturers instructions:
500 litre and larger pot size plants to have ten 10g tablets
200 and 100 litre pot size plants to have six 10g tablets
35 and 45 litre pot size plants to have four 10g tablets
15 litre and 200mm pot size plants to have two 10g tablets
130-150mm pot size plants to have one 10g tablet
Backfilling to plants
Backfill with topsoil or approved site soil mixture as specified. Lightly tamp down the mixture and water to eliminate air pockets.
Watering Basins
Construct a watering basin around the base of each individually planted tree or shrub of 200mm pot size and above, consisting of
a raised ring of soil of minimum diameter of 1000mm capable of holding a minimum of 10 litres of water.
Staking and tying

Support each tree as nominated on the plans (and large shrubs where directed) with hardwood stakes of the number and dimensions
nominated on the dwgs. Subject to peculiar or fluctuating site conditions additional stakes may be required; these shall be requested
by the Contractor as a variation to be approved.
Locate stakes parallel to prevailing wind direction on site or adjoining roads as nominated. Do not pierce root ball.
All ties shall be approved flat plastic, rubber or hessian tree ties of minimum width of 10mm. Ties to be located as directed by the
Superintendent in accordance with tree size. All ties shall be placed in a figure of eight around stake and stem allowing adequate
support without constricting plant growth.
All broken ties shall be replaced quickly and adequately to prevent tree damage. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing
any damaged trees as a result of no/slow replacement of tree ties. Stakes to be painted black (2 coats).
Watering
At time of planting provide by hand watering a minimum of 5 litres of water to each tree, shrub and plant. Repeat watering to each
tree, shrub and plant with 5 litres of water on each alternate day up to Practical Completion. Watering of plants by a reticulation
system will not be accepted unless approved by the Superintendent.
The Contractor is responsible for watering all plant material on site during the Contract Period. The following rates are provided as
a general guide only. The Contractor shall provide adequate water to keep plants vigorous, well established, hardened off, of good
form consistent with species or variety. The Contractor shall be responsible for adjustments which may be required according to
specific site conditions, extremes in weather and individual plant requirements:
200mm pots or smaller 5 litres per application

200mm pots 15ltr bags 10 litres per application
15ltr bags 45ltr bags 20 litres per application
100ltr trees 100 litres per application
200ltr trees 200 litres per application
Repeat watering to each tree, shrub and plant on each alternate day up to Practical Completion.
Watering of plants by a reticulation system will not be accepted unless approved by the Superintendent.
Note: Any diseased or dying plants are to be replaced at the Contractors expense.

Cleaning up
On completion ensure that trees, shrubs and plants are in first class, presentable condition by removing dead, damaged and
unhealthy branches and trimming where necessary to result in balanced growth typical of their normal form.
After inspection by the Superintendent and on Practical Completion, remove labels from plants.
Final Inspection
Give the Superintendent at least three (3) working days notice before completing each project so that he may inspect the work upon
completion.
25.8 MULCHING
Supply and place 75mm deep mulch as specified to the extent of each watering basin, minimum diameter 1000mm and to all garden
beds or as indicated on the Drawings.
Mulch shall be Sandgroper Mulch as supplied by Amazon Soils (Tel: 08 9302 1288), or equivalent to the approval of the
Superintendent. Mulch shall be a composted organic material free from pathogens, heavy metals, noxious weeds, seeds and
fungus, insect pests and other deleterious material and produced in accordance with AS 4454-2003. The chemical composition
shall be as follows unless otherwise approved by the Superintendent:

A sample of the mulch will be required for approval by the Superintendent prior to commencement of works on site. Submit a 5kg
sample for approval.
Minor garden bed preparation, including raking and removal of rubbish to produce an even and smooth surface, will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
The mulch will be consolidated, to produce smooth and even grades, finishing 10mm below surrounding hard surfaces.
25.9 MULCHING SHREDDED PINE BARK

Supply and place 75mm deep mulch as specified to the extent of each watering basin, minimum diameter 1000mm or as indicated
on the Drawings. Mulch shall be composed of small nuggets of shredded pine bark which is red/brown in colour, also contains
fibrous material. Equal or equivalent to that supplied by:
Amazon Soils (Phone: 08 9302 1288)
Mulch shall be free from pathogens, heavy metals, noxious weeds, seeds and fungus, insect pests and other deleterious material
and produced in accordance with AS 4454-2003.
The heavier mulch is necessary for this project to minimise wind drift.
Minor garden bed preparation, including raking and removal of rubbish to produce an even and smooth surface, will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
25.10 ADVANCED TREE PLANTING / MATURE TREE TRANSPLANTING

Nominated Sub-Contractor
The Arbor Centre

731 Welshpool Road,
Wattle Grove East, WA, 6107
info@arborcentre.com.au
Note: The Contractor shall make allowance to co-ordinate all Transplant works. The Contractor shall make an allowance for a full
one (1) day inspection of all Transplant sites with the Arbor Centre and the Superintendent prior to planting. The prices issued by
the Arbor Centre shall allow for all guying, imported soil fill as required, fertiliser and maintenance. The Contractor shall confirm the
extent of allowances made by the Arbor Centre and shall allow for all other items as may be necessary to ensure the survival of the
trees.
Nominated Trees
14 x Erythrina indica Coral Tree

12 x Tipuana tipu Pride of Bolivia.
Insurances
The arborcultural company undertaking the work and the landscape head Contractor shall maintain all relevant and required
insurances to undertake this work in accordance with accepted industry standards and statutory requirements. Insurances must
include but not be limited to Workers Compensation and Public Liability.
Guarantees
All works shall be undertaken to relevant Australian standards. The Contractor shall be responsible for the health and well being of
the transplanted trees for the period nominated above. All trees shall have clear trunks to the dimension specified above.
Upon transplanting it is accepted industry practice that any adverse signs regarding the health of the tree will usually be evident
within the first 3 months. Upon adverse growth occurring within the guarantee period the nominated Sub-Contractor shall be required
to advise of the reasons leading to adverse growth or death. Upon rectification of the adverse conditions, replace the tree free of
charge to the satisfaction of the superintendent at any time within the guarantee period as stated above for each species.
The nominated transplanter shall undertake regular inspections to satisfy themselves of the trees condition, irrigation etc and bring
any concerns or issues to the attention of the head Contractor and superintendent in writing immediately.
Guy Wires
The Contractor shall supply and install guy wires as required to adequately support all transplants after planting. Guy wires shall
be maintained in good condition for the duration of the defects liability period. The Contractor shall supply and install all safety
devices required on the guy wires and maintain the devices in good condition for the duration of defects liability period.
Fertilising and Watering

The Contractor shall supply and install 30 approved fertiliser tablets such as Agraform or other approved beside each rootball at
planting. The Contractor shall continue to fertilise the trees for the duration of the defects liability period as recommended by the
Arboriculturalist.
The Contractor shall ensure watering is maintained to the trees as recommended by the Arboriculturalist directly after transplanting
and for the duration of the guarantee period.
Mulching
The Contractor shall supply and place 75mm deep mulch as indicated on the Drawings to the full extent of all advanced tree and
palm transplant holes.
Mulch shall be composed of crushed Karri bark and screened black peat. Equal or equivalent to that supplied by Amazon Soils
from an approved supplier and to the approval of the Superintendent.
Mulch is to be completely free of all noxious weeds, seeds and fungus, insect pests and other deleterious material. A sample of the
mulch will be required for approval by the Superintendent prior to commencement of works on site.
25.11 TURF INSTANT ROLL-ON

Minor Preparation
Clear the areas to be planted of rubbish, roots and stones greater than 10mm in diameter and grade out to true and even grades
all depressions and humps less than 150mm from the general grade.
Grade areas to true and even grades and falls and finish flush with adjoining kerbs to roads, parking and paved areas, and with
footpaths, terraces, verandahs, mowing strips, manholes, pit and the like. Where plumbing disconnector traps and rainwater relief
overflows occur, finish ground level 75mm below overflow level.
All grading works shall be undertaken by hand work or by machine as is appropriate to the work however all grading and earthworks
within a distance of 600m radius of sprinklers or other fixed reticulation apparatus shall be hand worked to prevent damage to
equipment.
Finish shall be smooth rolled, consolidated and smudge boarded to obtain a perfectly even, well consolidated surface. No
irregularities, depressions, hollows or abrupt changes in grades or falls will be accepted. The cost of such minor preparation work
shall be included in the unit rate per square metre Tender price and no extras will be allowed for such preparation.
Before commencing work the Contractor shall inspect the site with the Superintendent to determine that grading can be achieved
without providing additional filling sand from off-site sources. If the Superintendent determines that additional filling sand is required
beyond the levels shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit a written quotation which will be the subject of a variation to
the contract as per the unit rate.
Selected Grass Species

Grass species shall be:
Kikuyu Pennisetum clandestinum Village Green Premium or approved equivalent),
Obtain specified grass species from a specialist grower of cultivated turf. Furnish a warranty from the grower that the grass is true
to species and free from weeds, fungus, inspect pests and other deleterious matter. Turf must be certified as sting nematode free
from a NATA accredited laboratory and must have a declaration that the turf has not been treated with a nematicide in the 12 months
prior to testing.
Grass shall be planted within eighteen (18) hours of being dug and shall be kept continuously moist. Grass shall be delivered to
site in approved covered containers and fully protected from drying out, damage or contact with injurious substances.
Turf deemed unacceptable in quality shall be rejected from site prior to laying by the Contractor and/or the Superintendent. The
Superintendent reserves the right to reject poor quality turf after laying upon inspection. All lifting, removal disposal and replacement
of the rejected turf shall be at the Contractors expense and shall occur as quickly as possible to minimise impact on the presentation
of the works.
without providing additional filling sand from off-site sources. If the Superintendent determines that additional filling sand is required,
the Contractor shall submit a written quotation which will be the subject of a variation to the contract as per the unit rate.

Turf Laying
Lay the turf along the land contours with staggered, close butted joints, and so that the finished turf surface is flush with adjacent
finished surfaces of paving and the like. As soon as practicable after laying, roll the turf with a roller weighing not more than 90kg/m
of width. On slopes too steep for rolling, lightly tamp turf into place.
Watering
The Contractor shall supply all equipment necessary to adequately water the site during the Construction and Consolidation period.
Before commencing planting, ensure adequate watering services and equipment are available and properly functioning. Areas to
be planted shall first be watered to a depth of 100mm and the planting shall be carried out immediately after watering.
Throughout the Contract up to Practical Completion, watering shall be properly undertaken, either by irrigation system or hand as
necessary (including during the failure of any nominated reticulation system), to keep the turf areas moist to a depth of 100mm at
not more than two (2) day intervals excepting Sundays and Public Holidays unless otherwise directed by the Superintendent.
Any faults or defects to the watering service and equipment occurring after the issue of the certificate of Practical Completion and
during the Defects Liability Period shall be immediately reported to the Superintendent.
Making Good
Lift and remove and dispose of failed turf and relay with new turf. Turf of poor quality will be rejected.
Topdressing
When the turf is established, mow closely (in addition to all other Clauses) remove cuttings and lightly top dress to a depth of 10mm
with an approved quality top dressing sand. Rub the dressing well into the joins and correct any unevenness in the turf surface.
Fertilising (1st Stage)

One week after laying turf, apply to the whole area NPK 12:2:6 Cresco Turf Special or Baileys 12:1:6 or such other lawn starter
fertiliser as may be approved. Evenly spread fertiliser at the rate of 50 grams/sq metre or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Thoroughly water in immediately. Fertilising and watering shall be inspected by the Superintendent during each operation.
Give the Superintendent two (2) working days notice before the commencing of fertilising and watering.
Fertilising (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th Applications etc)

The Contractor is to apply a total of FIVE (5) fertiliser applications to grassed areas after initial fertilising. Each application shall be
at a maximum of four (4) and a minimum of three (3) weeks after the previous application.
Each application is to be at the following rate:

50 grams / sq metre of 12:2:6 NPK granulated fertiliser immediately thoroughly watered in.
The Contractor must give the Superintendent two (2) working days notice before the commencement of each fertilising and watering
for site inspection.
Sample of fertilisers
Submit to the Superintendent on request, sample of fertilisers used in the works. The samples may be subjected to analysis by a
laboratory. Fertiliser not in accordance with the Specification may be rejected. Areas found to be not in accordance with the
Specification shall be given an additional application of fertiliser by the Contractor in accordance with the Specification at its own
expense.
Mowing
All newly grassed areas are to receive four mowings using a reel mower or an approved equivalent. When grass growth has
exceeded 60mm a first light cut shall be made carefully avoiding damage to new turf. This cut shall be made in relation to top
dressing Clause C1.09. Cutting shall not remove more than 50% of growth and cuttings shall be caught and removed from the site.
Each additional cut (3 in total) shall be made when turf has again reached 60mm. Repair all failed turf after mowing. Cuttings shall
not remove more than 50% of growth and all cuttings shall be caught and removed from the site.
Weed, Insect and Fungus Control

The control and eradication of all weed growth, insect and fungus infestations shall be the total responsibility of the Contractor.
During the Consolidation Period all areas shall be managed to ensure minimal weed growth either by spraying or manual removal
at all times until Practical Completion.
Where required, spray with insecticide, herbicide or fungicide in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, to all Health
Department and other statutory requirements. Submit proposal for approval prior to starting this work.

Rolling and Surface Finish
After the completion of second mowing the newly grassed areas shall be rolled with a heavy roller and finished to produce true and
even grades and falls free of all wheel marks and ruts, waves, depressions and other irregularities. Maximum weight of roller to be
500 kilograms.
Programme Inspections
Give the Superintendent not less than two (2) working days notice before completing each stage so that he may inspect the work.
Payment will only be made upon a satisfactory grass growth pattern being in evidence with grass in healthy and vigorous condition
at the initial inspection and continuing similar healthy growth being evident with total cover at the expiry of the Defects Liability
period. Make repairs to each stage as are necessary to ensure full cover to the
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all remedial works including patching, to ensure a 100% full cover of healthy grass is
achieved by the expiry of the Defects Liability period.
25.12 GRASS SEEDING & STOLONS

Minor Preparations
Clear the areas to be planted of rubbish, roots and stones greater than 10mm in diameter and grade out to true and even grades
all depressions and humps less than 150mm from the general grade.
Grade areas to true and even grades and falls and finish flush with adjoining kerbs to roads, parking and paved areas, and with
footpaths, terraces, verandahs, mowing strips, manholes, pit and the like.
Where plumbing disconnector traps and rainwater relief overflows occur, finish ground level 75mm below overflow level.
All grading works shall be undertaken by hand work or by machine as is appropriate to the work however all grading and earthworks
within a distance of 600m radius of sprinklers or other fixed reticulation apparatus shall be hand worked to prevent damage to
equipment.
Finish shall be smooth rolled, consolidated and smudge boarded to obtain a perfectly even, well consolidated surface.
No irregularities, depressions, hollows or abrupt changes in grades or falls will be accepted.
The cost of such minor preparation work shall be included in the unit rate per sq metre Tender price and no extras will be allowed
for such preparation.
without providing additional filling sand from off-site sources.
If the Superintendent determines that additional filling sand is required, the Contractor shall submit a written quotation which will be
the subject of a variation to the contract as per the unit rate schedule
Selected Grass Species

Grass shall be:
Kikuyu Pennisetum clandestinum Village Green Premium or approved equivalent),
shredded turf ' or other as specified by the Superintendent.
Obtain specified grass species from a specialist grower of cultivated turf. Furnish a warranty from the grower that the grass is true
to species and free from weeds, fungus, inspect pests and other deleterious matter. Turf must be certified as sting nematode free
from a NATA accredited laboratory and must have a declaration that the turf has not been treated with a nematicide in the 12 months
prior to testing.
Grass shall be planted within eighteen (18) hours of being dug and shall be kept continuously moist. Grass shall be delivered to
site in approved covered containers and fully protected from drying out, damage or contact with injurious substances.
Where specified supply shredded turf (well established fibrous runners) with healthy leaf material, from an approved source.
Application Rate
Application rate shall be 1 metre square of turf, when shredded to cover 5 metres square of area.
Spread the shredded turf in two equal applications in traverse directions over the area to be grassed to form an interlocking mat.
The runners shall then be either:
Planted using an approved disk roller planter in two directions at 90 degrees to each other

Immediately rotary hoed into the topsoil and lightly raked or rolled over the surface to provide even grades, or
Spaded by hand in confined spaces, where either of the above two methods are not permissible or practicable
Depth of runners shall be a minimum of 25mm and a maximum of 60mm below finished surface
Watering
Before commencing planting, ensure that adequate watering services and equipment are available and properly functioning.
Areas to be planted shall first be watered to a depth of 100mm and the planting shall be carried out immediately after watering.
Throughout the Contract up to completion of Consolidation, watering shall be properly undertaken, either by hand or irrigation
system to keep the planted area moist to a depth of 100 mm at not more than two (2) day intervals excepting Saturdays, Sundays
and Public Holidays unless otherwise directed by the Superintendent.
Any faults or defects to the watering service and equipment occurring after the issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion and
during the period for Defects Liability shall be immediately reported to the Superintendent.
Fertilising (1st Stage)

One week after planting, apply to the whole of the planted area a fertiliser mixed in the proportion equivalent to NPK 12:2:6 Cresco
Turf Special or Baileys 12:1:
Evenly spread fertiliser at the rate of 50 grams/sq metre or in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and immediately
thoroughly water in.
Fertilising and watering shall be inspected by the Superintendent during each operation.
Give the Superintendent two (2) working days notice before the commencing of fertilising and watering.
Fertilising (Programme) (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th Applications)

The Contractor is to apply a total of FIVE fertiliser applications to grassed areas after initial fertilising.
Each application shall be at a maximum of four (4) and a minimum of three (3) weeks after initial fertilising.
Each application is to be at the following rate:
50 grams/sq metre of 12:2:6 NPK granulated fertiliser immediately thoroughly watered in
The Contractor must give the Superintendent two (2) working days notice before the commencement of each fertilising and watering
for site inspection.
Sample of Fertilisers
Submit to the Superintendents on request, sample of fertilisers used in the works. The samples may be subjected to analysis by a
laboratory. Fertiliser not in accordance with the Specification may be rejected. Areas found to be not in accordance with the
Specification shall be given an additional application of fertiliser by the Contractor in accordance with the Specification at its own
expense.
Mowing
All newly grassed areas are to receive four mowings using a reel mower or an approved equivalent. When grass growth has
exceeded 60mm a first light cut shall be made carefully avoiding damage to new turf. This cut shall be made in relation to top
dressing Clause C1.09. Cutting shall not remove more than 50% of growth and cuttings shall be caught and removed from the site.
Each additional cut (3 in total) shall be made when turf has again reached 60mm. Repair all failed turf after mowing. Cuttings shall
not remove more than 50% of growth and all cuttings shall be caught and removed from the site.
Weed, Insect and Fungus Control

The control and eradication of all weed growth, insect and fungus infestations shall be the total responsibility of the Contractor.
During the consolidation period all areas shall be managed to ensure minimal weed growth either by spraying or manual removal
at all times until Practical Completion.
Where required, spray with insecticide, herbicide or fungicide in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, to all Health
Department and other statutory requirements. Submit proposal for approval prior to starting this work.

Rolling and Surface Finishing
After the completion of second mowing the newly grassed areas shall be rolled with a heavy roller and finished to produce true and
even grades and falls free of all wheel marks and ruts, waves, depressions and other irregularities. Maximum weight of roller to be
500 kilograms.
Give the Superintendent not less than two (2) working days notice before completing each stage so that he may inspect the work.
Payment will only be made upon a satisfactory grass growth pattern being in evidence with grass in healthy and vigorous condition
period. Make repairs to each stage as are necessary to ensure full cover to the area.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all remedial works including patching, to ensure a 100% full cover of healthy grass is
achieved by the expiry of the Defects Liability period.
Grass Overseeding
Overseed all new stolon grass areas as shown on Drawings. Grass seed shall be as specified by the Superintendent. Grass seen
shall be obtained from a reputable seed supplier and shall confirm to all requirements of relevant seed legislation and viability.
Drill Seeding
Areas to be seeded shall be first cleared of all weeds and other plants and the whole area cultivated to a depth of 100mm.
All weed and plant growth, stone, debris or other extraneous matter shall be removed from the surface to leave a completely clean
surface.
The area shall then be lightly rolled and levelled to receive seed as specified in the Contract.
The rate of grass seeding using an approved drill seeding machine shall be based upon an average of 15gms per square metre of
creeping fescue seed. Sowing should be undertaken on a still day with cover of not less than 6mm of sand after drill seed sowing.
Where areas are too small or are inaccessible for the drill seeding machine, then these areas are to be seeded by mechanical
broadcasting or by alternative approved methods at the specified seeding rate.
Watering
Before commencing planting, ensure adequate watering services and equipment are available and properly functioning.
Areas to be planted shall first be watered to a depth of 100mm and the planting shall be carried out immediately after watering.
Throughout the contract up to Practical Completion, watering shall be properly undertaken, either by hand or irrigation system to
keep the planted area moist to a depth of 100mm at not more than two (2) days intervals excepting Saturdays, Sundays, Public
Holidays unless otherwise directed by the Superintendent.
Any faults or defects to the watering service and equipment occurring after the issue of the certificate of Practical Completion and
during the Defects Liability Period shall be immediately reported to the Superintendent.
Given the Superintendent not less than two (2) working days notice before completing each stage so that he may inspect the work.
Payment will only be made upon a satisfactory grass growth pattern being in evidence with runners in healthy and vigorous condition
period. Make repairs to each stage as are necessary to ensure full cover to the area.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all remedial works including patching, to ensure a 100% full cover of grass is achieved
by the expiry of the Defects Liability period.
25.13 NATIVE SEEDING

Supply and sow to areas indicated on the Drawings native seed mix as directed by the Superintendent. Seed to be sown either
manually or mechanically as recommended by the supplier and to the approval of the Superintendent.
Seed shall be obtained from a reputable seed supplier and shall conform to all requirements of relevant seed legislation and viability.
Supply a certificate of viability prior to commencement of the works for approval.
The Contractor shall allow a provisional sum of $3,500.
25.14 EXISTING TREES TO BE RETAINED

The Contractor shall undertake care and maintenance of any existing trees on site that have been retained. This shall include
Pruning for safety, structural stability and aesthetic purposes,

Supplementary watering as required to ensure tree health is maintained during the construction and consolidation
period
Erection of fencing (for a diameter of 9m around each tree or to the limit of the canopy drip line ) to limit pedestrian
and vehicular access to the trees and subsequent compaction of the root ball.
Safety audit and reporting by a qualified Arborist following pruning.
Pruning shall include the removal of all deadwood, diseased limbs, unsafe limbs and branches, any limbs or branches that impede
views to feature items. All pruning and lopping shall occur to the Superintendents approval or on site direction.
25.15 ARBORIST REPORT

The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive arborists report at practical completion certifying the safety of any existing trees on
site. The report shall be prepared by a certified practicing Arborist.
25.16 CLEARING AROUND EXISTING TREES

The Contractor shall undertake to remove all understorey vegetation from in between closely located existing trees to be retained.
Most clearing will have occurred by the civil earthworks Contractor, however in difficult to access areas between groups of existing
trees, removal of grass, weeds and other deleterious material shall occur by hand or mechanical means as appropriate.
Note: No damage to trees to be retained is to occur either above or below ground.
25.17 TREE AND STUMP REMOVAL

Remove all trees and stumps as indicated on plans and in the schedules.
Grub out stumps and roots over 75mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500mm below subgrade in paved areas or below finished
surface in unpaved areas. Backfill grub holes with suitable spoil from excavations compacted in layers to the density of the
surrounding undisturbed soil.
All debris together with fallen timber shall be loaded, hauled and disposed of in a tip in compliance with statutory requirements or
may if instructed be dumped as directed by the Superintendent.
25.18 ROOT CONTROL BARRIERS

General
Root control barriers (RCB) shall be supplied and installed to all trees and mature transplants located within 1.5m of a paved surface,
kerb or fixed structure and/or to the location and detail as shown on the Drawings.
A sample of the proposed RCB shall be submitted for inspection and approval prior to commencement of planting operations. RCB
material shall be to the width indicated on the details, in either panel or roll form. All joints shall be either heat fused or double sided
butyale tape (double jointed so that both barrier ends are secure), as recommended by the manufacturer.
During instillation the distance to protected surfaces should be as detailed on the detail Drawings. Soils should be compacted
between protected surfaces and RCB to a greater extent than between the root ball and the RCB.
The RCB shall be placed in a square configuration to the dimensions as indicated on the Drawings and finish flush with finished
adjoining pavement levels
NOTE: FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATION REFER TO THE ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT

26 PROJECT CONSOLIDATION
26.1 GENERAL
Scope of Works
This Specification covers the requirements for maintenance of the whole of the works immediately following Practical Completion
and prior to handover to Maintenance.
26.2 STANDARDS
26.3 GENERAL
Consolidation shall mean the continuing care and consolidation of the Contract areas by accepted horticultural practices, as well as
rectifying any defects that become apparent in the works.
The Consolidation Period shall commence from the date of Practical Completion and be for a period of thirteen (13) weeks.
During the Consolidation Period damage to the works due to vandalism and theft shall be the responsibility of the Principal.
26.4 CONSOLIDATION PROGRAMME AND LOG BOOK

The Contractor shall supply a written consolidation programme to the Superintendent for approval and if required amend it until
approved. The Contractor shall then comply with the approved programme.
The Contractor is also required to keep a log book recording when and what maintenance has occurred and what materials have
been used. Make the consolidation log book available on request.
26.5 PLACING OF WORKS ON CONSOLIDATION

Give three (3) working days notice that the works are complete and are ready to be placed on consolidation. The Superintendent
shall inspect the works and, if any defects or deficiencies are found, they shall be rectified within seven (7) days of notification.
26.6 EXTENT OF CONSOLIDATION

The consolidation programme shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following horticultural items where and as required:
Report weekly to Superintendent

Rubbish removal from all areas (including lakes and waterways)
Review, inspection and monitoring of all bores
Review, inspection and monitoring of all pumps and electrics
Watering
Mowing
Slashing and weeding
Apply Herbicide
Re-mulching
Fertilising
Re-planting
Hedge / shrub Pruning
Advanced Tree Maintenance
Maintaining Site Neat and Tidy
Sweeping/cleaning surfaces
Removal of storm debris, bird droppings etc.
Irrigation inspections
26.7 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

Grass Areas
Grass areas shall be mown and maintained to present a high quality, healthy and vigorous grass sward appropriate to the area.
Trees and Shrubs

Trees and shrubs shall show signs of healthy vigorous growth. Trees shall be appropriately staked and, have a suitably sized
watering basin intact and be weed free.
Weekly Report
Report in writing by 12 noon each Friday 1 x A4 summary of works complete as at that date.
emerge associates PROJECT CONSOLIDATION

Watering
Provide sufficient water to all tree and shrubs via the irrigation system. Should the irrigation system fail, hand water all trees and
shrubs to maintain good healthy growth until the irrigation system is repaired.
Mowing
All areas of turf will be mown using cylinder mowers. Edging and line trimming of kerbs, paths and around trees and obstacles will
be completed after each alternate mow. Special care will be taken to ensure the trees are not damaged by mowing operations.
Slashing & Weeding

Maintain site and fence lines free of weeds and invasive plants.
Herbicide
Eliminate all weed growth to landscaped areas using approved non-residual herbicide such as Roundup.
Re-Mulching
At the end of consolidation period top up mulching to all plants to conform to Specification.
Staking Maintenance
Supply and install replacement stakes as required each week.
Re-Planting
Supply and install replacement plants for unhealthy or damaged, or dead plants each week.
As part of a Monthly report, advise the Superintendent of the cost for the supply and installation of replacement plants for those
damaged or stolen through acts of theft or vandalism.
During the Consolidation Period damage to the works due to vandalism and theft shall be the responsibility of the Principal.
All other plant replacement shall be at the Contractors expense.
Pruning
Prune all dead wood or foliage from plants as required each week and maintain hedge planting.
Maintaining Site
Maintain site free of rubbish, rocks, branches etc each week on Friday or Saturday mornings only.
Theft and Vandal Damage

Report on and make good theft and vandal damage as instructed by the Superintendent.
26.8 PUMPS, BORES AND ELECTRICS

The Contractor shall undertake a minimum of one complete and thorough inspection of all bores, pumps and electrics during the
course of the consolidation period. This inspection should occur immediately prior to handover to the annual maintenance period
(at the close of the thirteen (13) week Consolidation Period).
The Contractor shall be required to prepare and submit to the Superintendent a complete report on the state all lake hydraulic, re-
circulation and refilling systems, bores and irrigation systems and all electrics within these systems and its general operation. Any
problems, issues or recommendations shall be made in writing as part of this report for rectification as required prior to handover to
the annual maintenance period.
26.9 IRRIGATION
The Contractor shall undertake the full and complete operation of the irrigation system during the consolidation period in accordance
with the systems design requirements. The Contractor shall supervise and authorise any and all works as may be urgently necessary
to be undertaken by the selected Irrigation Contractor to ensure the full and continuous operation of the system and the watering of
the landscape works.
Consolidation works shall include a complete operational review of the irrigation system prior to handover to the annual maintenance
period. The Contractor shall issue a written report on the irrigation systems operation to the Superintendent prior to the completion
of the consolidation period. Any problems, issues or recommendations shall be made in writing as part of this report for rectification
as required prior to handover to the annual maintenance period.
26.10 BORE METER READINGS

Monthly bore meter readings shall be taken by the contractor during the 13 week consolidation period and reported to
superintendent. The Contractor shall each month check and report to the Superintendent the bore meter reading in accordance
with the requirement of the Local government authority and the Department of Water. The Contractor shall provide a proposed
watering regime for the period of the maintenance contract and relate this to the current Groundwater Licence. Each month the
contractor shall provide the Superintendent with monthly meter readings and track the usage of water in relation to the approved
watering regime.

26.11 CARE OF WORK AND REINSTATEMENT OF DAMAGE
The Contractor shall make themselves familiar and fully aware of their contractual obligations as outlined in Clause 16: Care of the
Work and Reinstatement of Damage under the General Conditions of Contract (AS 2124-1992).
26.12 HANDOVER
Reference is made to the General Conditions of Contract, definition of Practical Completion.
Give the Superintendent five (5) working days notice that the works are complete and that the works are ready for Principal handover
or for the subsequent commencement of the Maintenance Contract/Period.

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATION
SECTION D
emerge associates
27 MAINTENANCE - GENERAL
27.1 GENERAL
This portion of the Contract pertains to the maintenance of the Landscape Works as per the areas nominated within contract CB-
01 and the plans as listed:
F. Landscape Drawings (Emerge Associates)

CB-01-000 REV A COVER SHEET
CB-01-200 REV A OVERALL SITE PLAN
CB-01-502 REV A PLANTING PLAN AVIATOR BLVD
CB-01-600 REV A DETAIL PLAN
CB-01-800 REV A SECTIONS
CB-01-903 REV A TYIMBER DECKING DETAIL PLANS
CB-01-906 REV A WALL DETAIL
CB-01-907 REV A FEATURE WALL DETAIL

CB-01-916 REV A SHELTER B DETAIL
CB-01-926 REV A CUSTOM FURNITURE DETAIL
CB-01-927 REV A TYPICAL FURNITURE DETAIL
CB-01-928 REV A IRON FILTER ENCLOSURE
CB-01-931 REV A PLAYGROUND DETAILS
CB-01-936 REV A TYPICAL SOFTWORKS DETAILS
CB-01-941 REV A GENERAL NOTES
G. Irrigation Drawings (Total Eden)
17367-01 REV A KEY PLAN

The Contractor shall undertake all works and provide all tools, equipment, labour and machinery necessary to maintain the
landscape as designed and in peak condition using best practice and approved horticultural and landscape management
techniques. The Contract Sum shall include but is not limited to the cost of all such machinery, labour, the costs of fertilisers, pest
and disease control materials. Maintenance shall mean the continuing care for the Contract area by accepted horticultural practices,
as well as rectifying any defects that become apparent in the works.
27.2 LANDSCAPE DESIGN OBJECTIVES

As the general public has recently purchased land in this development, the Principal finds it essential that the quality and appearance
of the new streetscapes and public open space be maintained over an extended period. As a result it is necessary to state that the
maintenance of this subdivision be of continually high standards at all times, rubbish collection occurs regularly and any defects
with the landscape or irrigation works be rectified or reported as soon as possible. The Contractor shall note the Principal takes on
a significantly hands-on approach, and the Contractor shall be required on call 7 (seven) days a week.
emerge associates MAINTENANCE - GENERAL

27.3 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
The Maintenance Period for works as nominated in this Specification, the Drawings and the Contract shall be:
Year 1 39 weeks
Year 2 52 weeks
Tenderers should note that appointment to the first year Maintenance Contract does not necessarily mean appointment to Year 2
Maintenance Period. The potential rolling over of the Contract is subject to the Principals discretion and is subject to but not limited
to on-site and off-site performance, cost, staff, programme and capacity to perform the works.
The Contractor shall undertake the maintenance of the nominated landscape areas as per the Drawings for a minimum period of 1
(one) year and maximum period of 2 (two) years. Handover to the Council may occur at some stage during the second year period;
as such the contract is split into two years to be costed separately as indicated within the schedule.
Should the maintenance be handed to the Council at some time during the second year period the Principal shall only be liable to
pay for the maintenance as undertaken by the Contractor up to the Council handover date without penalty.
The Principal reserves the right of option at the close of the first year maintenance period to terminate the balance of the contract
without penalty or to re-Tender the remaining maintenance contract as desired.
The twelve (12) or twenty four (24) month Maintenance Period shall commence either from the date of completion of the
Consolidation Period or alternatively from the date nominated in the Project Timeline.
27.4 SITE ACCESS

Access to the nominated site areas shall be off Aviator Boulevard. Limit all direct access from major roads where possible. All site
deliveries shall be as approved by the Superintendent prior to use and construction. The Contractor shall conform to all relevant
Traffic Management standards and practices as specified and/or relevant Australian Standards.
27.5 SCOPE OF WORKS

The Contract covers maintenance of the hard and soft landscape and specific feature items and shall include but is not limited to
the following:
Mowing of all lawn areas, verges and public areas

Implementation of a fertiliser programme for both lawn and planting areas as specified
Weed, pest and disease control on all plants and lawn
Top up of mulch (to match existing) to all planting areas, also the rotation of mulch in planting areas
Litter removal from gardens, lawns and paths, lakes, creek lines and watercourses
Hand watering of street trees, planting areas and lawn as required to supplement irrigation
Tree stakes to be replaced or fixed (as determined) upon defect
Total maintenance to traffic islands that have been landscaped
Report to the Superintendent any defect or vandalism to entry walls, lighting, paved areas, entry signage or built
structures for action as determined and approved
The cleaning, checking and reporting of any defects to lighting, seating and furniture.
The checking and cleaning/emptying of garbage bins.
The checking of the operation of and cleaning of BBQs, taps and drinking fountains.
Monitoring, maintenance, pruning, replacement of all plants
Maintenance of transplants as specified
Weed control to unit paved traffic islands/medians/roundabouts
Removal of bird droppings/dog excreta/ spider webs from hardscape and furniture
Monitoring and maintenance of irrigation system and lake recirculation system
Monitoring and maintenance of the lake edges and the liner
Monitoring and maintenance of the lake water quality
Monitoring and servicing of the lake pumps and hydraulics
Monitoring and servicing of the bores and iron filters
Monitoring maintenance, pruning, replacement of all the plants
Maintenance of transplants as specified
Maintenance to playground equipment, playground surfacing and surrounds.
The general care and maintenance of any other works as constructed under this contract
Any other work required or as necessary to maintain a healthy, aesthetic landscape

27.6 APPENDIX A TENDER SCHEDULE: MAINTENANCE PERIOD YEAR 1
The following Tender Schedule is to be completed prior to the return of Tender, and shall form part of the Contract scope of works.
All progress and final claims shall be made based on these prices and the following schedule of rates. Works covered here are for
the first 39 (thirty nine) weeks following the completion of the Consolidation Period.
LUMP SUM SCHEDULE

QUAN
TITY
OF RATE TOTAL
EVEN
TS
PRELIMINARIES (as specified)
Traffic Management
Other Specify in the spaces provided below
HARD LANDSCAPE WORKS (as specified)

Pathways & paved area sweep and clean
/events
(as mowing occurs)
SOFT LANDSCAPE WORKS (as specified)

Fertiliser application to trees (15-500 litre) /event
Garden maintenance i.e. pruning/weeding/litter
/event
removal
Fertilising of planting beds as specified /event
Insect and Disease check & control as required /event
TURF AND GRASS WORKS (as specified)

39 per
Mowing and Edging Roll on turf /event
year
Fertilising Roll on turf /events
All grass area weed and pest spraying /events
IRRIGATION (as specified)

As a three [3] monthly inspection allow: 4 /event
Inspect all pumps in pump station for seal leakage 4 /event
Assess motor bearings for wear 6 /event
Inspect suction/delivery for leakage 52 /wk
Inspect electrical connections/cables for damage
Inspect electrical cabinet clean and apply insecticide
dust to base

Remove any debris/weeds from inside pump station
Check Bore pumps for correct operation
Check borehead enclosures clean if required
Inspect Bore electrical cabinet - clean and apply
insecticide dust
As a bi annual routine allow: 4 /event
Inspection and flushing of iron filter equipment
including disposal offsite of iron filter residue.
Inspection and removal of residue/foul from bore
pumps and disposal offsite.
ADDITIONAL WORKS (as specified)
Litter Collection and disposal 52 /wk
Soil Analysis /event
Water Analysis /event
Leaf Tissue Analysis /event
Mulch top up /event
Subtota
l
GST
TOTAL MAINTENANCE PERIOD YEAR 1
TOTAL
Tenderers Name: .......................................................................................................................................................
Telephone No.: .................................................................................... Facsimile No.: .............................................
Signature of Authorised Officer: .................................................................................................................................


27.7 APPENDIX B TENDER SCHEDULE: MAINTENANCE PERIOD YEAR 2
The following Tender Schedule is to be completed prior to the return of Tender, and shall form part of the Contract scope of works.
All progress and final claims shall be made based on these prices and the following schedule of rates. Works covered here are for
the second 52 (fifty two) weeks following the completion of the 1st Maintenance Period.
LUMP SUM SCHEDULE

QUAN
TITY
OF RATE TOTAL
EVEN
TS
PRELIMINARIES (as specified)
Traffic Management /event

Pathways & paved area sweep and clean
/events
(as mowing occurs)

Fertiliser application to trees (15-500 litre) /event
Garden maintenance i.e. pruning/weeding/litter
/event
removal
Fertilising of planting beds as specified /event
Insect and Disease check & control as required /event
TURF AND GRASS WORKS (as specified)

39 per
Mowing and Edging Roll on turf /event
year
Fertilising Roll on turf /events
All grass area weed and pest spraying /events

As a three [3] monthly inspection allow: 4 /event
Inspect all pumps in pump station for seal leakage 4 /event
Assess motor bearings for wear 6 /event
Inspect suction/delivery for leakage 52 /wk
Inspect electrical connections/cables for damage
Inspect electrical cabinet clean and apply insecticide
dust to base
Check Bore pumps for correct operation
Inspect Bore electrical cabinet - clean and apply
insecticide dust
As a bi annual routine allow: 4 /event
Inspection and flushing of iron filter equipment
including disposal offsite of iron filter residue.

Inspection and removal of residue/foul from bore
pumps and dispose offsite.
As a two [2] yearly inspection allow the following:
All of the above plus,
Test pump performance against Specification (Pump
Station)
Remove Bore pumps clean and tank test
Chemically treat bores
Reinstall bore pumps and field test

Litter Collection and disposal 52 /wk
Mulch Top up /event
Subtota
l
GST
TOTAL MAINTENANCE PERIOD YEAR 2
TOTAL
Tenderers Name: .......................................................................................................................................................
Telephone No.: ..................................................................................... Facsimile No.: .............................................


27.8 APPENDIX C SCHEDULE OF RATES
The unit rates submitted shall be lump sum prices for each item of material or component, inclusive of labour and plant hire costs
associated with the installation of each component. This is a lump sum contract and these rates are intended for variation purposes
only.
SCHEDULE OF RATES
RATE
Concrete kerb planting edge replacement /lin m
Graffiti removal /hr
Mulch replacement and top up /m3
Vertimow to turf/ Dethatch /ha
Aeration to turf /ha
5mm top dressing to turf with clean yellow sand /ha
Turf replacement - couch /m2
- kikuyu /m2
Tree Plant replacement complete inc
supply/install & staking as required
- 500 litre /ea
- 200 litre /ea
- 100 litre /ea
- 45 litre /ea
- 15 litre /ea
- 5 litre /ea
Shrub Planting replacement - Complete inc supply,
install as specified
- 200mm /ea
- 140mm /ea
- Tubestock /ea
- Enviro-Cells /ea

Toro Nozzles /ea
Sprinkler 570NOZ Toro 4P /ea
Sprinkler MP Rotator Nozzle /ea
Hunter 120 ADS Geardrive Sprinkler /ea
Riser Poly 15mm x 25mm /ea
Riser Poly 300mm x 25mm /ea
Coupling F/F 15mm Poly /ea
Coupling F/F 20mm Poly /ea
Coupling PVC 25mm /ea
Coupling PVC 40mm /ea
Olsen EZ Elbow /ea
Elbow PVC 40MM /ea
Elbow Poly M/F 15mm /ea

Elbow Poly M/F 20mm /ea
Faucet Elbow PVC 20mm /ea
Faucet Tee Poly 20mm /ea
Faucet Sockets /ea
Faucet Tee PVC 25mm /ea
Faucet Tee PVC 25mm x 20mm /ea
Slipfix PVC 25mm /ea
Slipfix PVC 40mm /ea
Joiner Poly 13mm /ea
PVC Pipe 20mm /lin m
TEE Poly 19mm /lin m
Wire Connectors /lin m
Bubbler Hit Gal 0.5 /ea
Bubbler Hit Gal 1.0 /ea
/ea
OTHER WORKS
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PROVIDE "AS CONSTRUCTED" PLANS
HOURLY RATE FOR DAYWORK /hr
Hand watering Rates
-Manual /hr
-Water cart -900L /hr
-Water cart-1800L /hr
Labour and Plant Rates
-Supervisor/Foreman
/hr
-Labourer /hr
-Bobcat /hr
Percentage mark up on additional work
Tenderers Name: .......................................................................................................................................................
Telephone No.: ..................................................................................... Facsimile No.: .............................................


27.9 QUALITY OF GOODS AND WORKMANSHIP
All goods and workmanship provided to carry out the works will be of the best available quality. The Superintendent will reject any
goods or workmanship which does not meet the specified standard. The Contractor will be responsible for any damages caused by
poor goods or workmanship and will replace or repair the affected area or item at their own expense.
27.10 INSURANCES
The Contractor will be responsible for Public Liability where its services are concerned. Public Liability insurance will be Ten Million
Dollars (AUD$10,000,000) in the event of any one claim.
The Contractor shall also have continuous insurance for and be responsible for Workers Compensation and vehicle Insurances
while on site and shall be responsible for the upkeep of insurances for the duration of the Contract.
27.11 EMPLOYMENT AWARDS

The Contractors personnel, both permanent and casual staff, employed on site will be covered under the relevant Award. The
Landscape Gardening Industry Award being No. 18 of l979 Section 93 (6a).
If, pursuant to Clause 32 of General Conditions of Contract (AS 2124), the Superintendent approves of work outside the customary
working hours or on other than working days, or outside such other working hours or working days as are provided in the Contract,
then the Superintendent may impose on such approval any conditions which the Superintendent, at its discretion, may determine.
Such conditions may include, inter alia, a prohibition or restriction on the performance of work which requires supervision, during
extended working hours.
For the purpose of Clause 32 of the General Conditions of Contract (AS2124).
Customary working hours shall mean 9 hours per day, worked between 7.00 a.m. and 6.00 p.m. and ordinary working days shall
mean Monday to Friday inclusive, but exclusive of proclaimed public holidays or rostered days off. Weekends constitute working
days for urgent tasks or inspections and shall be utilised at the Principals request.
27.12 PERSONNEL
The Contractors work force will be experienced landscape persons. The foreman responsible for daily implementation and
programming of maintenance activities will have a minimum of five years experience in ornamental horticulture and be qualified in
landscape horticulture having achieved a trade certificate in landscape horticulture along with relevant diploma courses.
All personnel will be presented in company uniform and be personally presentable at all times.
A twenty four (24) hour contact number will be available for contact with a company representative should an emergency occur out
of hours.
27.13 VARIATIONS
Labour or materials provided in addition to those specified will be charged as per the Schedule of Rates if listed or otherwise on a
time plus cost of materials basis, and are not included in the Maintenance Contract price.
Daily maintenance routines may vary from that originally specified. No extra cost will be involved in this variation providing the then
present staff levels can provide the necessary service without compromising their primary occupations on site.
27.14 PAYMENT
Monthly invoices will be submitted thirty (30) days in arrears and received by the Superintendent on or before the 28th day of the
month. Submit to the Principal c/o EMERGE ASSOCIATES for certification and approval.
27.15 EQUIPMENT
The equipment required to effect this Contract, supplied by the Contractor at no extra cost to the contract, will range from hand tools
through to trucks, tractor drawn mowers, hydraulic chemical applicators and specialised turf equipment i.e. Trac-air aeration
equipment and vertical de-thatching mowers. Generally equipment shall be used as appropriate for and as best used for conducting
the works as outlined in the contract documents.
27.16 INSPECTIONS
The Superintendent shall conduct periodic inspections at their discretion without notice to the maintenance Contractor. Following
these inspections the Superintendent may organise a meeting on site with the Contractor, to examine any works not completed to
a satisfactory standard.
An initial and a final inspection will be conducted at the commencement and completion of the Contract period and shall form the
hand over to the Contractor and the subsequent hand over to the Local Authority at the end of the Maintenance Contract Period.
27.17 CLEAN UP AND FINISHING

At the end of the Maintenance Contract Period, the Contractor shall ensure that the landscape works as specified are of an
acceptable standard and that all Contractual obligations of the Contractor have been satisfactorily fulfilled. All stockpiles, tools and
machinery, debris, rubbish shall be removed from site and disposed of correctly. All landscape areas shall have a healthy,

presentable appearance according to the design intent and objectives and specified requirements as shown in the Contract
Documents. Upon this being achieved the Contractor shall apply for a Final Certificate as outlined (Clause 42.8 AS 1224 - 1992).
27.18 FINAL CERTIFICATE

At the end of the Maintenance Period the Superintendent shall, upon satisfactory completion and final inspection, issue a final
certificate to the Contractor in accordance with Clause 42.8 AS 1224 - 1992.
27.19 LANDSCAPE REPORTS AND LOG BOOKS

Throughout the Maintenance Period, progress reports will be forwarded to the Superintendent at monthly intervals. The report will
contain details on progress and activities that have been completed throughout the period and activities planned for the months
ahead, as well as any upcoming or outstanding faults, general plant condition, damage or repairs required for the landscape at the
time of writing the report.
The Contractor shall be required to keep a maintenance log book for the purposes of evidence of dates and works completed. This
log book shall be made available to the Superintendent on request to assist in the determination of payments and programmes.
27.20 PERFORMANCE OF CONTRACTORS

Should at any time during the Contract Period it appears to the Superintendent that the Contractor has:
Not proceeded with the work with due diligence or is not performing the works in a good or proper and workmanlike
manner in accordance with the Agreement.
or
That the time has expired within which the works or such part of the works ought to have been completed.
or
The Contractor has failed to remedy defective work as required by the Superintendent.
The Superintendent shall give written notice to the Contractor requiring the default to be remedied within a period of 14 days.
Should the works not be completed within the stipulated period and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent, then the Superintendent
shall have the power to recommend a termination of Contract under Clause 44.2 AS 2124 1992.
27.21 RESIDENTIAL BUILDING WORKS

The Contractor shall be required to monitor and report to the Superintendent any disruption, damage, theft or vandalism to the
Contract landscape areas (including street trees) stemming from residential building works.
The Contractor is obliged to take all reasonable steps to prevent or minimise disturbance or damage to the landscape areas,
including bringing any problems or potential problems stemming from housing construction to the attention of the builder involved
and the Superintendent.
Residential building Contractors shall be held responsible for any damage proven to be of their doing, including spreading of rubbish
materials on landscaped areas. The Maintenance Contractor shall inform the Superintendent of any conflict or problems upon
occurrence and shall seek direction.
27.22 ONGOING CHECKING

Further to the specified maintenance regime outlined in this document (e.g. weekly or fortnightly checks) the Contractor shall also
undertake to notify the Principal of any vandalism, defects or theft to any item as it becomes visible to the Contractor on unrelated
inspections or works during the course of the Maintenance Period.
27.23 CARE OF WORK AND REINSTATEMENT OF DAMAGE

The Contractor shall make themselves familiar and fully aware of their Contractual obligations as outlined in Clause 16 - Care of
the Work and Reinstatement of Damage under the General Conditions of Contract (AS 2124-1992).
27.24 THEFT AND VANDALISM GENERALLY (refer also to softscape and hardscape clause)
Where not the result of Contractor negligence the cost of replacement plants, hardscape and irrigation, parts and materials inclusive
of supply and installation which is necessary due to vandalism, theft or damages not under the control of the Contractor will be
submitted to the Superintendent as a variation to the Contract. Approval of the Variation must be received prior to carrying out the
works.
emerge associates
28 MAINTENANCE WORKS HARD LANDSCAPE
28.1 CONCRETE PATHWAYS AND PAVED AREAS
All paths, paved areas and kerbing etc shall be swept or blown down after each mow or as required. All paths and paved areas will
be maintained free of weeds or unwanted vegetation by the use of non-residual Glyphosate herbicide or approved equivalent and
thereafter physical removal. All paths, paved areas and paved traffic islands shall be swept or blown down and free of weeds or
unwanted vegetation following planting.
Any obstruction or obvious defect in the paving that constitutes a public hazard will be barricaded and reported for repair.
28.2 STREET FURNITURE

All Street Furniture, including but not limited to benches, bins, bollards, bike racks, shelters, pergolas and the like are to be kept
clean and free of spider webs, graffiti or any material that interferes with the design intent.
28.3 SIGNAGE
All estate signage, excluding temporary marketing signs are to be kept clean and free of spider webs, graffiti or any material that
interferes with the design intent.
28.4 LIGHTING
All lighting poles, lenses and luminaires are to be kept clean and free of spider webs, graffiti or any material that interferes with the
design intent of the lighting. All lights are to be tested to ensure they are operating in accordance with the design intent, the
manufacturers Specification and in accordance with warranty conditions. Any electrical adjustments are to be undertaken by a
licensed electrician.
28.5 BBQS
As most usage is anticipated across the weekends the Contractor shall organise to Inspect and clean BBQs early in the week. All
hotplates, benchtops, splashbacks and side panels are to be cleaned weekly. All BBQs are to be tested to ensure they are operating
in accordance with the manufacturers Specification and in accordance with warranty conditions. Any electrical adjustments are to
be undertaken by a licensed electrician.
28.6 TAPS AND DRINKING FOUNTAINS

All taps and drinking fountains are to be kept clean and free of spider webs, graffiti or any material that interferes with the design
intent. All taps and drinking fountains are to be tested to ensure they are operating in accordance with the design intent, the
manufacturers Specification and in accordance with warranty conditions.
28.7 PLAYGROUNDS
Routine visual inspections are to be carried out by the Contractor to check the condition of all features and surfaces; report any
defects or vandalism to the Superintendent immediately. Works to rectify vandalism are to be valued as a variation to the contract.
Other defects stemming from workmanship or quality of materials are the responsibility of the Contractor or for the supplier or
manufacturer to rectify.
All paths and synthetic surfacing are to be kept free of sand or other loose fill mulch. Sand and mulch is to be swept back into play
areas; in particular, it is to be raked back into position around high use areas such as under swings and at slide exits. Sand, mulch
and synthetic surfaces are to be inspected regularly for broken glass, syringes and other hazards that may be buried or embedded;
any items are to be removed immediately and disposed of in an appropriate safe manner. The depth of loose softfall is to be
checked for compaction and to ensure minimum depths are maintained. Softfall measurement lines on play equipment are to be
checked regularly.
All play equipment and features are to be checked for broken and missing components. Any movable or flexible items are to be
intact and move freely. Inspections are required to ensure that equipment is operating in accordance with the Manufacturers design
intent and Specification and in accordance with warranty conditions. Plastic and fibreglass items are to be inspected for damage
or separation of surfaces or sections.
Rubbish bins are to be checked regularly (or as stated elsewhere in this document) to ensure that bins do not overflow. Litter is to
be collected on a regular basis and collected from all areas of the playground, including sand, lawns and garden beds, to ensure a
tidy appearance is maintained at all times.
emerge associates MAINTENANCE WORKS HARD LANDSCAPE

FREQUENCY TYPE OF ITEM CHECK
CHECK
Daily in busy periods; Routine visual General appearance Remove graffiti
otherwise weekly inspection Remove scuffing from slides
Loose impact Check depth and compaction of sand mulch

absorbing surfaces Rake back into position around slide exits, swings,
sand play area and heavily used areas.
Loosen compacted areas of sand
Check for broken glass, syringes and other
hazards.
Synthetic surfaces Check for cleanliness and embedded objects.
Clean sand from surface.
General paths, Check for broken glass, syringes and other
surfaces and enclosed hazards. This inspection may be particularly
spaces important on Monday mornings to check for any
misuse of playground over weekends.
Broken and missing Check that no components have been broken or
components removed
In particular, check that:
no ladders have missing rungs
no hand grips are missing
no horizontal ladder bars or swing seats are missing
no decking or infill is missing or broken
there are no gaps left in structures where
components have been removed.
Routine visual Movable and flexible Check that all parts are intact and move freely
inspection items especially net structures
Missing fittings Ensure that no caps, pins, clamps, covers etc have
been removed. These should all be fixed to prevent
unauthorised removal.
Plastics and fibreglass Check all joints in segmented plastic or fibreglass
products for separation or damage and for inserted
foreign objects
Maintenance Bins Empty rubbish bins additional inspections (i.e.

twice a week) may be required depending on
popularity of playground

CHECK
Weekly in busy periods, Operational Wear Check that no materials or components are
otherwise monthly inspection excessively worn
Check all moving parts for wear, especially:
springs,
chain links on bridges, nets and climbers
flying fox sliding mechanism and start and finish
stoppers
eye bolts
bearings on spinning equipment
Check that timber decking, treads and rails have
not been weakened by abrasion or wear
Loose missing or Check that all bolts and screws are tight and in their
defective fasteners original condition and location and that there is no
movement in joints;
Check in particular that the bolts fixing spring items,
swing bearings, swing seats, and other moving
devices have not worked loose
Tighten any loose fasteners
Covers over chain may need to be removed for
effective inspection.
Check that chain links, split links, joiners, eye bolts
and s-hooks have not deformed or become
ineffective
Ensure no screw heads, nuts and bolt ends, nails
or gang nail joining plates have worked loose and
that there are no sharp protrusions
Plastics Check plastic components for cracks, splits or

wear.
Check plastic slides for deterioration of gel-coat

CHECK
6 monthly Comprehensiv loose surfaces Check effectiveness of retention, borders and
e inspection drainage;
Check for compaction
Replace as required
synthetic surfaces Check for wear and lifting edges
exposed footings Check that no concrete footings have become
exposed and are still 100mm below the upper
surface of the sub-grade
structural strength of Check that the structures are adequate for
structures & expected number of users and type of use
equipment Check that there is no movement in posts of
equipment and structures, guard rails, infill,
decks, rails or other components which are
intended to be fixed
Check that posts are not moving in their
footings
Check that posts, decks and rungs are straight
and plumb, and in their intended points
moving parts Check and lubricate all wheels, bearings and

moving parts where this is recommended by
the manufacturer. Replace any worn or
damaged parts.
general appearance Worn/chipped paint
general review of Check for patterns of wear which may indicate

design unauthorised use (ie climbing on roofs),
structural problems (ie poor installation) or
poor layout.
28.8 PARTICULAR COMPETENCE REQUIRED FOR THE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

It is recommended that structural checks and checks on specialist components be carried out by an engineer or competent
playground specialist.
28.9 SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE FOR PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT ITEMS

Refer to manufacturers maintenance instructions for the following playground equipment items:-
Forpark Australia Parkfit Fitness Equipment

Contact: Mike De Souza Cycle Seat
PO Box 484 Step Up
Cloverdale 6105
Ph: (08) 9472 1788
Fax: (08) 9472 1799
Kompan c/o PlayRight Australia Pty Ltd Custom Play Nets
Unit 1/17 Mordaunt Circuit Glaxy Spica
Canning Vale
Climbing Grab Holds
WA 6155
Tel. 08 9256 1560 Fax. 08 9256 1561
28.10 VANDALISM AND THEFT

The Contractor shall, during the course of their works, take all reasonable steps practicable to minimise the threat and occurrence
of vandalism and theft to the landscape generally. This may include but not be limited to removal of unused equipment after hours,
maintaining lighting, not leaving tools or piles of hard materials, pruned or mowed vegetative material on site / over weekends,
reporting suspicious activities to the Principal, Superintendent or the Police as deemed necessary at the time.
Any wilful damage to the landscape shall be reinstated to equal or equivalent to that shown on the plans as outlined in the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall submit a report and quote for work before commencing work. Prior to commencing work, the
cost and extent of work is to be agreed with by the Principal and written approval obtained. During the Maintenance Period the cost
of repairing vandalised or stolen items will be borne by the Principal.

28.11 GRAFFITI REMOVAL
The Contractor shall inspect the works regularly for graffiti and shall report any to the Superintendent immediately. The Contractor
shall supply a unit rate for Graffiti removal and reapplication of graffiti coating as necessary. All costs associated with the removal
and reinstatement of graffiti affected areas shall be borne by the Principal, except in circumstances arising from negligence on
behalf of the Contractor or Sub-Contractors.
28.12 BIRD DROPPINGS

All hardscape and furniture shall be kept clean and free of any bird droppings / dog excreta / spiderwebs and the like. Regular
inspections are required, in particular adjacent to water bodies, and the method of cleaning shall be appropriate to the material
without causing damage to the underlying surface.
emerge associates
29 MAINTENANCE WORKS SOFT LANDSCAPE
29.1 GENERAL WORKS
All plants shall be maintained in a healthy and vigorous growing condition. Any damaged, dying, dead or diseased plants or section
of plants shall be removed immediately once they become evident. Chemicals used shall be safe to human and household pet
health and the Contractor shall allow for and be prepared to inform local residents in order to alleviate community concerns over
spraying.
Dead plants shall be replaced with those of the same species and size. Plants that die due to the Contractors negligence shall be
replaced at the Contractors cost. A plant list will be provided to ensure replacements match those planted during the landscape
Contract.
29.2 TREES
The Contractor shall maintain, prune, fertilise, water, mulch and spray all plants as required to ensure health, vigorous growth.
The Contractor shall also:
Maintain weed growth and turf grasses away from tree wells. Spray surface vegetation with Roundup or grub out
as required.
Inspect periodically, as necessary, tree trunks and canopies for pathogens. Control with appropriate pesticides
utilising recognised and accepted horticultural practices.
Replenish mulch as necessary to maintain an effective mulched surface of 75mm depth.
Inspect and test irrigation systems regularly to ensure specified volumes are being delivered to the required root
ball area.
29.3 PRUNING
Pruning shall occur to either maintain or encourage healthy plant growth or to allow clear sightlines in both vehicular and pedestrian
access ways.
Prune trees to select and develop a permanent single leader and scaffold branches that are smaller in diameter than the trunk or
branch to which they are attached. The vertical spacing of branches should be 500-1000mm with radial orientation so as not to
overlay each other. Prune to remove any dead or degenerating parts of trees and make repairs to tree wounds wherever possible.
Stripping of lower branches on younger trees will not be performed; instead the branches will be maintained in a pinched back
condition with as much foliage as possible. Only when the plant begins to sucker from the base will the stem (sucker) be removed.
Primary pruning of advanced deciduous trees shall be completed whilst the tree is dormant with a secondary pruning required to
shape the tree after the tree has regenerated foliage.
Any substantial tree surgery should be deferred until mid spring to reduce the risk of disease infesting the wound.
Pruning of evergreens or semi deciduous trees can be performed as required with preference given to the spring summer period.
29.4 STAKING AND GUYING

Regular monthly inspection and maintenance will ensure stakes, guys and ties are kept in sound condition. When trees attain a
trunk calliper of 100mm consideration will be given to removing existing stakes and ties. All stakes and guys will be inspected at
least twelve times per year to prevent girdling of trunks and branches and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds.
Stakes shall be 2 x 2.1 metre treated pine stakes for 200 litre and 100 litre trees and 2 x 1.8 metre treated pine stakes for 45 litre
trees. Guying shall occur with hessian or rubber ties.
29.5 FERTILISING - TREES

All trees up to 4metre in diameter shall receive three [3] applications of fertiliser per year during August, November and December.
Fertiliser shall be a granular fertiliser, Macrocote, Nutricote or equivalent and approved. Fertiliser shall be broadcast lightly and
evenly at ground level within a 2metre radius of the tree stem. Application rates are as follows:
Tree canopy diameter 0-2 metre 150g/tree/application
Tree canopy diameter 2-4metre 500g/tree/application
Periodic checks will be made and wherever a deficiency in plant quality is evident it will be reported immediately.
29.6 FERTILISING - GARDEN BEDS

Garden beds shall be fertilised twice during the year, once in April and again in October. Fertilising shall occur with slow release
Osmocote equal or equivalent with even applications of 20 grams/m2.
29.7 MULCH TOP UPS

The Contractor shall maintain all mulched garden beds in a neat and tidy manner at all times. Mulch shall be kept within specific
garden edges level with the top of kerbed edges and limestone walls. Mulch shall generally be reinstated to a depth of 75mm. Mulch
shall be equal or equivalent to Amazons Enviromulch or approved equivalent.
emerge associates MAINTENANCE WORKS SOFT LANDSCAPE

29.8 GARDEN BEDS
The Contractor shall conduct ongoing maintenance of the garden beds as installed to keep them in a neat and tidy manner at all
times. This shall include but not be limited to:
The removal of any and all rubbish, debris and unsightly material
The removal of any and all dead, dying or diseased plant material
The removal of all weed growth from the garden beds
Ensuring all mulch is contained within the defined mulch areas
Ensure all mulch finishes flush with the top of hard edges
29.9 VANDALISM, THEFT AND PLANT DEATH

The Contractor shall be responsible to take all reasonable steps to minimise and prevent any plant vandalism, theft or death
throughout the site.
Vandalism and Theft

The maintenance Contractor shall monitor, check and report any theft or vandalism of plants and / or material at regular intervals to
the Superintendent. Quotes shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Superintendent for the replacement or reinstatement of plant
and / or materials, upon written approval this work shall be carried out in the appropriate manner and as specified. During the
Maintenance Period the cost of plant replacement due to theft or vandalism shall be borne by the Principal.
Plant Death
The Contractor shall take all steps to prevent plant death, including monitoring plant health and applying remedial measures. Should
plant death or damage occur due to causes under the control of the Contractor the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs
incurred to remove and dispose of dead plant material and the purchase, transporting and installation of replacement plant material
equal to that removed, as per the Contract Documents. Plants shall be replaced by plants at the pot size and dimensions as were
originally planted.
29.10 INSECT AND DISEASE CONTROL

Maintain all plants free from insects or disease (Fungal) using approved methods as required. Where chemicals are required
preference will be given to low toxicity systematically absorbed types. Mechanical applicators will be precisely calibrated and care
taken when applying to minimise the effect on plant or animal. Some plant species will attract frequent pests and will need particular
attention. The Contractor shall allow a price to maintain all plants free from insects and disease inclusive of all works, labour and
materials. Only in extreme cases of infestation (determined by the Principal and Superintendent) will the Contractor be able to claim
additional monies to combat any problem.
Pests and disease can cause significant damage to landscape plants. Because of areas of bush surrounding the site or nearby, the
threat of insect infestations could easily become a problem without the correct diagnosis, cure and prevention. The Contractor is
required to conduct fortnightly inspections of plant material to identify any and all disease and pest problems.
29.11 ADJACENT AREAS

The Contractor shall ensure that all grass and plant species are contained within the limits of the garden beds defined on the
Contract Documents. Any incursion by species into adjacent bush land or residential gardens is to be monitored and cleared at the
Contractors expense. Permission to enter adjacent areas shall be submitted for approval to the Superintendent.
emerge associates
30 MAINTENANCE WORKS TURF AND GRASS AREAS
30.1 MOWING
Instant Turf
All areas of instant turf will be mown using cylinder mowers or other approved means. Any alternative method shall be submitted
to the Superintendent at the time of Tender.
Edging of kerbs, paths will be completed after each alternate mow. Special care will be taken to ensure the trees are not damaged
by mowing operations. Mulch tree wells will be maintained and edged as above. Line trimming around bollards, trees and other
obstacles will be completed in conjunction with each mow.
Mowing will be completed each week during January to April and as required for the remainder of the year. A total of 32-34 cuts
per year are estimated to be required. An indicative turf management calendar is provided, the Contractor shall make their own
assessment of the adequacy of the calendar and advise the Superintendent accordingly.
All mowing will be undertaken with catchers fitted.
If the turf area is deemed unfit for triplex use due to poor turf quality, Superintendent to be advised and alternative turf maintenance
technique submitted for approval.
30.2 FERTILISING
All fertilisers will be applied using a tractor mounted fertiliser spreader for broad acre areas and a 40kg spinner for smaller areas.
Fertilisers to be applied, their rates and frequencies of application are outlined in the Turf Management Calendar below.
Frequent application in low dosage is encouraged particularly during the establishment period.
Fertiliser application adjacent to water bodies

Granular fertilisers are not to be used in the immediate vicinity of lakes and other water courses, foliar fertilising using liquid iron
and manganese are to be applied in these areas only.
Within 10m of Water line
No fertiliser to be applied within 10m of any water body
Within 10-20m of Waterline
50% reduction in fertiliser application. All fertiliser in this zone to be spread by hand
The following recommended rates of application are advised and are reflected in the turf management calendar:
Turf Species: N (Nitrogen) P (Phosphorus)

Buffalo 100-150 kg/ha/yr max 5 kg/ha/application
Couch 100-200 kg/ha/yr max 5 kg/ha/yr application
Kikuyu 50-100 kg/ha/yr max 5 kg/ha/yr application
The requirement for phosphorus is dependent upon the soil type. Soil type can vary across the site and it is a requirement of this
Contract for a thorough investigation of soil types to be conducted. During the Tender period the Tenderer shall familiarise
themselves with the site and ascertain the number of soil tests that are required to cover the range of soil types within the particular
Contract area. As a minimum a single soil test will be required for each POS.
Soil and Leaf Tissue Analysis

Soil and leaf tissue tests shall be conducted to ascertain:
the level of available phosphorus in the soil

The PRI (Phosphorous Retention Index) of the soil and
Leaf tissue analysis

Fertiliser logs to be kept detailing product used, % composition, quantities and dates/areas applied. Detail to be submitted with
monthly reports.
30.3 WEED CONTROL

A complete post emergent herbicide programme shall be implemented to control and eradicate unwanted weeds and grasses.
These weeds and grasses will include:
Crab Grass, Johnson Grass, Onion Grass, Medick Clover and all broad leaf weeds.
Refer to Turf Calendar for further details.
emerge associates MAINTENANCE WORKS TURF AND GRASS AREAS

30.4 TURF / GRASS MANAGEMENT CALENDAR
The following schedule has been provided as a guide to the level of maintenance required across an average area of the project.
The Contractor shall make their own assessment as to the adequacy of the programme and provide a full and comprehensive
schedule of maintenance works specific to the individual requirements of each section of the project area dependent on seasonal
and horticultural variations.
A key aim of the maintenance regime is to minimise water and fertiliser usage and thereby limit the requirement for mowing. Any
methodology that assists in achieving this aim should be forwarded to the Superintendent for approval.
January
Mow each week to maintain a turf height of 15mm. (14 days for Kikuyu)
Water 3 times weekly applying 30 mm
Apply Baileys 3.1.1 at 200kg/Ha
February
Mow each week to maintain a turf height of 15mm. (14 days for Kikuyu till mid Feb)
Water 3 times weekly applying 30 mm
March
Mow each week to maintain a turf height of 15mm
Water 2 times weekly applying 20-30mm
April
Mow each week to maintain a turf height of 15mm
Water 2 times weekly applying 20mm
May
Mow every 14 days to maintain a turf height of 18-20mm. (Weekly for Kikuyu)
Pre-emergent spray for winter grass
Water once per week applying 10-20mm
June
Mow every 14 days to maintain a turf height of 18-20mm. . (Weekly for Kikuyu)
Apply selective herbicide for broadleaf weeds if necessary (rate only) seek Superintendent approval
Reticulation to be run once per week for 5 minutes per station to keep system operational
July
Mow every 14 days to maintain a turf height of 18-20mm
August
Mow every 14 days to maintain a turf height of 18-20mm
Apply selective herbicide for broadleaf weeds if necessary (rate only) seek Superintendent approval
September
Mow every 14 days to maintain a turf height of 15mm
Apply Baileys 4.1.1 with Grosorb @ 200kg/Ha
Water once per week applying 10mm
October
Vertimow to remove excess thatch (if required)
Remove any diseased patches of turf and replace with instant turf
Water 2 times per week applying 20 mm
November
Top dress where needed to address imperfections in levels (if required)
Water 2 times per week applying 20mm
December
Mow every 7 days to maintain a turf height of 15mm. (14 days for Kikuyu from mid Dec)
Water 3 times per week applying 30mm

Notes:
Edging and Brush cutting is to be completed after each alternate mow with clippings blown or swept off paths
Line trimming to be completed in conjunction with each mow with clippings blown or swept off paths
Bare Lawn Spots: Repair any turf loss due to Contractors negligence or shade spots
Meter readings to be submitted monthly with reports, and consumption tracked to ensure compliance with
groundwater extraction license
30.5 VANDALISM, THEFT AND GRASS DEATH

Vandalism and Theft
The Contractor shall monitor, check and report any theft or vandalism to the grass at regular intervals to the Superintendent. Quotes
shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Superintendent for the replacement or reinstatement of the same grass species, upon
written approval this work shall be carried out in the appropriate manner and as specified during the Maintenance Period. The cost
of grass replacement due to theft or vandalism shall be borne by the Principal.
Grass Death
The Contractor shall take all steps to prevent death, including monitoring grass health and applying remedial measures. Should
grass death or damage occur due to causes under the control of the Contractor the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs
incurred to remove and dispose of dead grass material and the purchase, transporting and installation of replacement grass material
equal to that removed, as per the Contract Documents.
The Principal shall be responsible for the above process and costs only if grass death can be proven to be caused by something
other than the Contractors negligence.
The Contractor shall ensure that reticulation remains functioning at all times and to the capacities required. As this is the Contractors
responsibility any death of turf from lack of water shall be rectified at the Contractors expense.
30.6 GRASS, WEED AND PEST CONTROL

Maintain all grass free from insects, disease (Fungal) and weed growth using approved methods as required. Where chemicals are
required, preference will be given to low toxicity systematically absorbed types. Mechanical applicators will be precisely calibrated
and care taken when applying to minimise the effect on grass or animals. Some grass species will attract frequent pests and will
need particular attention. The Contractor shall allow a price to maintain all grass free from insect, disease and weed growth inclusive
of all works, labour and materials.
Pests and disease can cause significant damage to a landscapes grass. Because of areas of bush surrounding the site or nearby,
the threat of insect infestations could easily become a problem without the correct diagnosis, cure and prevention. The Contractor
is required to conduct fortnightly inspections of grass material to identify any and all disease and pest problems.
All herbicides/insecticides/fungicides will be applied according to Manufacturers recommendations

Material Safety Data Sheets and company / operator Health Department licenses to be submitted to the Superintendent prior to
chemical application being undertaken
30.7 ADJACENT AREAS

The Contractor shall ensure that all grass and plant species are contained within the limits of the garden beds defined in the Contract
Documents. Any incursion by species into adjacent bush land or residential gardens is to be monitored and cleared at the
Contractors expense. Permission to enter adjacent areas shall be submitted for approval to the Superintendent.

31 ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE WORKS
31.1 AERATION
Aerate annually using a trac-air or equivalent with 10mm coring tines to a depth of 75 100mm. Areas of turf affected by compaction
due to excessive pedestrian traffic will be aerated as required. The aeration process is designed to open up the ground and allow
valuable water, nutrients and air to access the plants root system. Aeration is to occur annually in March. This item is excluded
from the lump sum price and is to be valued separately in the schedule of rates.
31.2 TOP DRESSING

Top dressing shall occur with five (5) even covers of formulated dressing sand. This is to occur in November or as otherwise
approved. The Contractor shall also allow for an additional 10m3 of top dressing sand to fill or repair or top up any damage or
subsidence to turf areas. This item is excluded from the lump sum price and is to be valued separately in the schedule of rates.
31.3 DETHATCHING
The turf will require a full dethatching annually on October or as otherwise approved. A light verticut is to be scheduled toward the
end of summer. The use of a tractor mounted vertical mower will be used to complete this activity. This item is excluded from the
lump sum price and is to be valued separately in the schedule of rates.
31.4 LITTER
All litter will be removed from pathways and high profile areas including lake edges and water courses on an as required basis. All
other areas such as car parks, lawns, general gardens and roadways will have litter removed twice weekly. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to remove all rubbish from the bins installed under the Contract and ensure all wheel bins are taken to kerb on the
nominated collection day unless an alternate arrangement has been approved by the Superintendent. Alternatively the Contractor
may choose to remove all rubbish from all bins directly from site.
31.5 IRRIGATION
The effective operation of the Irrigation System shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but they shall engage a registered
Irrigation Association of Australia Contractor to CHECK, ADJUST AND REPORT on the system weekly. Any repairs, servicing
and modification to the system (including the bore and associated electrics) as necessary to ensure the landscape is healthy and
developing to achieve the Design Objectives, are the responsibility of the Contractor but at additional cost. Any such repairs,
servicing and modification necessary are to be reported to the Superintendent with a costing for approval by the Principal.
The contract is for inspection, monitoring and adjustment of the irrigation system as below and any major servicing and repairs is to
be priced separately and as required.
The Contractor as a three [3] monthly inspection shall allow:

Inspect all pumps in pump station for seal leakage
Assess motor bearings for wear
Inspect suction/delivery for leakage
Inspect electrical connections/cable for damage
Inspect electrical cabinet clean and apply insecticide dust to base
Check bore pumps for correct operation
Inspect electrical cabinets clean and apply insecticide dust

As a bi annual routine allow:
Inspection and flushing of iron filter equipment including disposal offsite of iron filter residue.
Inspection and removal of residue/foul from bore pumps and dispose offsite.

As an annual inspection allow the following:
Testing of Backflow Prevention Devices

As a two [2] yearly inspection allow the following:
Test pump performance against Specification (Pump Station)
Remove bore pumps clean and tank test
Chemically treat bores
Reinstall bore pumps and field test
The Principal shall not be liable for costs to rectify any and all landscape works damaged as a result of the Contractors negligence
in ensuring the continuous operation of the irrigation system.
As the current operation of the irrigation equipment is essential to achieving a healthy landscape, the engagement of a qualified
Irrigation Contractor to carry out this check and report status, is paramount.
emerge associates ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE WORKS

31.6 IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall obtain a quotation from the irrigation Contractor to undertake the irrigation design, installation and maintenance
work for the nominated works.
Maintenance shall include but not be limited to:
Check, Adjust and Report

Check for irrigation breakage or sprinkler failure after each mow or twice weekly
Adjust spray pattern of sprinklers and the arc adjustment as required
Adjust irrigation controller times as seasonal conditions require
Report on any defects
Refit or repair as necessary after authorisation from Principal to proceed with repairs
Check bore for pressure
31.7 EROSION CONTROL

The Contractor shall be responsible for erosion control in all areas nominated by this Contract. Erosion control shall mean any and
all recognised methods of preventing wind, water or incidental erosion occurring.
Methods of controlling erosion shall include but not be limited to:
Temporary drainage lines

Diversion and dispersal of overland water flow
Silt trap construction and cleaning i.e. Hay bales, hessian barriers
Temporary fencing for wind protection
Contour ploughing disturbed areas
Temporary fencing-off of disturbed areas
Areas where erosion control and prevention do not fall to the Contractor include:
Areas of residential housing construction

Residential lots sold or unsold
Road reserves existing or future not landscaped
Should erosion control be required in areas within the Contract area but the source of the erosion is outside the Contract area, then
the Contractor shall apply to the Superintendent for direction, while taking all reasonable steps to prevent or minimise continuing
erosion.
emerge associates
APPENDICES
SECTION E
emerge associates
32 BULK EARTHWORKS SPECIFICATION
SITEWORKS AND SETOUT

a. GENERAL
Scope of Works
This Specification covers all works included but not limited to:
General Site Clearance

Earthworks, Trimming and Fine grading
Works around Existing Trees
Site Setout
Mobilisation and site establishment
Setting out of the Works
Clearing of the site
Cutting and filling earthworks
Sourcing of sand fill and transportation of the sand to site.
Placement and compaction of sand fill
Construction of retaining walls
Removal of plant and equipment upon completion of works
Supervision, inspection and testing
b. STANDARDS
All equipment, materials and workmanship supplied by the Contractor for incorporation into the Works shall comply with the respective
Australian Standard applicable which is current as at the date of close of Tenders.
Where an Australian Standard is nominated in this documentation, it is provided as a guide to the Contractor for the selection of appropriate
materials and/or work practices which are required by the Principal. Where a nominated Standard or Interim Standard has been revised,
amended and/or designated, or is not current as at the date of close of Tenders, the applicable Standard shall be the Australian Standard
which is current as at the date of close of Tenders.
AS1726 Geotechnical Site Investigations
c. TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FENCE

Within five (5) working days of the Date of Possession of the site, the Contractor shall erect temporary protective fencing to the perimeter of
all Public Open Space areas and to any other areas to be landscaped (verges, drainage basins and the like) that might be vulnerable to
damage as described below.
The temporary fencing shall comply with the requirements of applicable Safety Plans and shall be sufficiently robust and secure to prevent
the following activities occurring within the protected area for the duration of the Contract:
creation and use of informal vehicle access routes;

vehicle parking;
storage of plant, equipment and materials;
dumping of waste; and
any other activities that are likely to be detrimental to the health of existing trees to be retained and/or might cause damage
to undisturbed areas.
emerge associates BULK EARTHWORKS SPECIFICATION

The temporary fencing shall be located to protect the whole of the Public Open Space/verge/basin areas on alignments to the approval of the
Superintendent.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the fence as an effective barrier at all times throughout the Contract.
32.1 MONITORING OF VIBRAT ION AND NOISE

All construction machinery used on Site must be monitored by the Contractor for noise emission and vibration at commencement of the Works
and at all times during the carrying out of the Works to ensure that excessive noise is not generated.
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out this monitoring and associated costs on the instructions of the Superintendent.
The absolute maximum noise level permitted is 67db(A) at the nearest boundary of the nearest property to the Site from Mondays to Saturdays
and nothing greater than ambient noise on Sundays.
If noise levels exceed the above the Contractor shall be required to modify its work methods or plant types so as to comply with the permitted
level.
The Contractor must demonstrate that any plant employed in relation to the Works does not exceed the manufacturer's stated noise levels.
The Contractor shall take account of the contents of AS 2436-1981 Guide to Noise Control of Construction Maintenance and Demolition
Sites.
All plant employed in relation to the Works shall be in good order and repair.
32.2 DUST CONTROL

The contractor shall allow for and implement all necessary provisions and contingency arrangements, as per EPA guidelines for the prevention
of Dust Land Development Sites and Impacts on Air Quality, Nov 1996.
32.3 SITE CLASSIFICATION

The site has been assessed in accordance with the EPA Guidelines and the risk of dust nuisance is rated as Classification 3.
32.4 PROVISIONS FOR CLASSIFICATIONS

Provisions including contingency arrangements for each classification are given in the EPA Dust Control Guidelines and it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to be aware of the required provisions and be capable of implementing both the provisions and contingency
arrangements as directed by the Superintendent.
32.5 PAYMENT FOR DUST CONTROL

The Contractor shall allow for the cost of controlling dust and wind borne material generated by its activities, plant, equipment and personnel.
In this regard the Contractor shall be obliged to keep the Site, including access roads, stockpiles, areas of cut and fill etc maintained to a
reasonable standard so as to prevent nuisance from wind borne material in line with prudent construction practices. Measures to be used
include but are not necessarily limited to the provision of wind fences and water carts and costs are to be borne by the Contractor.
Where dust and wind borne materials are generated from the work Site areas whilst machinery and plant are not working or have not worked
the Contractor shall, at the direction of the Superintendent, implement dust control measures in accordance with the Specification and
Guidelines. The cost of implementing these measures shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the Contractor Sum.
Notwithstanding the allocated Site Classification, if during the Works the suggested dust suppression measures are found to be insufficient
the responsibility for carrying out the necessary measures to achieve the desired level of dust suppression rests totally with the Contractor as
occupier of the Site. Should additional methods of dust suppression implemented, such as wind fencing/watering etc, fail to control the dust
to a satisfactory level under EPA Guidelines then it may be necessary to cease work on the particular activities generating the wind borne
material.
No extension of time will be granted for the implementation of dust control. Should the Contractor or Superintendent deem it necessary to
cease all or part work on the site to control dust, an extension of time without costs may be granted in accordance with the Amended Form of
AS2124-1992 Construction Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good of areas affected by dust and wind borne material
emanating from the site and for the resolution of claims made. Insurances as required by the Contract shall be adequate to cover the risks
assessed in accordance with this Section and shall provide cover to a minimum of $50,000.00.

32.6 WIND FENCING
Wind fencing to be used for dust control shall be a minimum height of 1.5 metres above ground level. Suitable material such as hessian
cloth/shade cloth shall be affixed to the fencing along its full length and height. Structural adequacy of the fence shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
32.7 WATER CART

A suitable water cart is to be provided as required by the guidelines. The water cart shall be able to traverse on site, and be of not less than
10,000 litres capacity per 5 hectares of disturbed site and shall be fitted with a pump and hand held hose and spray to damp down stockpiles.
32.8 ADVISORY NOTICES

For Class 3 sites advisory notices shall be issued by the Contractor to adjoining land occupiers, the local authority and the EPA at least 48
hours before site works commence. The notice shall include details for the contractor, consulting engineer, contract period and site
classification. The notices shall be in a format approved by the Superintendent prior to issue.
32.9 PROCEDURE FOLLOWING DUST RELATED COMPLAINT

Following receipt of a dust related complaint by either the Contractor or Superintendent, assessment and procedure to be followed shall be
in accordance with Appendix 3 of the EPA Guidelines. If it is the Superintendent's opinion that wind borne material has been deposited outside
the site as a consequence of the Contractors failure to undertake adequate control measures the Superintendent may direct the Contractor
to remove this material within 24 hours at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall pay for the rectification of damage resulting from the
windborne material.
32.10 DILAPIDATION SURVEYS

Dilapidation surveys will be conducted on existing buildings in the vicinity of the works by a third party qualified assessor, appointed by the
Contractor. The surveys will be conducted prior to works commencing on site. Reports from the dilapidation surveys will be issued to the
Principal and property owner prior to the commencement of works in the relevant area.
The extent of the dilapidation surveys will be agreed by the Principal and the Contractors Representative, however, direction will be provided
by the Superintendents Representative in order to help identify the properties at risk of potential damage.
Following the dilapidation surveys, a risk assessment will be conducted for all the buildings surveyed. Where the assessed risk of damage to
the building is high, monitoring of vibration will be put in place prior to works commencing, and, protective measures installed to preserve the
building.
32.11 CLEARING
Unless otherwise specified or directed, remove all trees, logs, stumps, boulders, roots and scrub within the limits of clearing. Demolish and
dispose of existing fences, structures and slabs detailed to be removed. Grass and topsoil shall not be removed as part of this initial clearing.
Grub out stumps and roots to a minimum depth of 500mm below Sub-grade in paved areas or below finished surface in unpaved areas.
Backfill grub holes with suitable spoil from excavations compacted in layers to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil.
Give seven (7) days notice of intention to clear any section of the works so that the Superintendent may determine the trees and plants not
already detailed within the limits of clearing which are to be preserved.
Limits of clearing are defined as lines one metre outside the intersection of excavation or embankment slopes with the natural surface or the
outside limits of slope rounding together with any other limits detailed.
d. DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
Unless otherwise permitted or directed, all debris resulting from clearing operations together with all lying and fallen timber and rubbish shall
be removed from the site. All cleared material removed from the site shall, unless required by the Contractor for other purposes, be loaded,
hauled, dumped and disposed of in a tip in compliance with statutory requirements.
The Superintendent may permit the disposal of boulders, concrete fragments and other incombustible materials by burial within the POS
reserves outside paved areas. When buried, the tops of boulders, etc. shall be not less than 500mm below finished surface.
The Superintendent may direct that boulders greater than 0.03 cubic metres in volume be stockpiled on site.
e. BULK EARTHWORKS
Where indicated on the Drawings and itemised in the Tender Schedules, Bulk Earthworks are to be undertaken in accordance with the relevant
Engineers Specification (refer Appendix III).

f. EARTHWORKS - GENERALLY
The Contractors responsibility under this Contract shall extend to all works necessary to transform the existing levels as shown on the
Drawings to those shown as proposed levels on the Drawings.
g. EXCAVATION
Excavate to conform to the lines grades, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the Drawings. The Superintendent may order the removal
of any soft spots, debris or organic material exposed when excavated areas have been trimmed to finished formation levels. Remove all
rocks and boulders which protrude above finished surfaces of Sub-grades.
Separate the best granular materials from excavations for use in the upper layers of fill Sub-grades.
h. STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING OF TOPSOIL

Prior to the commencement of earthworks, strip sufficient topsoil within the limits of earthworks to provide for later re-use as specified. Ensure
that all topsoil is removed from any areas to be covered by paving or structures. Also strip topsoil within the limits of clearing for underground
services beyond the limits of earthworks. Unless otherwise directed, the depth of stripping shall be to the bottom of the grass root zone.
Grass shall be stripped together with topsoil. Avoid contamination by any other material.
Stockpile topsoil on or near the site for later re-use as specified. Topsoil stockpiles shall not exceed 1.5m in height. If to remain unused for
more than four (4) weeks, topsoil stockpiles shall be sown with a fast growing, non-invasive seed with good soil retention capacity.
i. DISPOSAL OF APPROVED SURPLUS SPOIL ON SITE

Unless otherwise specified, dispose of approved surplus material from excavations where directed on site by:
Uniform widening of embankments, or

Uniform flattening of fill batters, or
Uniform filling of selected areas.
All material removed from the pond area is to be disposed of off site to a Class 2 disposal facility unless specified otherwise.
If not already cleared, dumping sites shall be cleared and grubbed to the extent necessary before any material is deposited. Strip topsoil as
specified and set aside for later re-spreading over the dumped spoil. Selling of unused surplus spoil may be examined as approved by the
Superintendent with proceeds to be paid to the Principal in full.
32.12 FILLING AND RESPREADING

Generally
Place and compact filling to conform to the lines, grades, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Allow for the thickness of
materials, which will be placed in subsequent operations.
Before filling commences, the Superintendent may order the removal of any soft spots, debris or organic material exposed when the nominal
depth of topsoil has been stripped in areas where natural surface is within 1m below finished levels. This additional stripping may extend to
a depth of 300mm below the general depth of stripping. Grade all stripped surfaces to prevent accumulation of water.
Where fill is to be constructed on hillsides or against existing fills, slopes which are steeper than 1:3 shall be benched and roughened to allow
placement of filling in layers and to prevent slip failures at the interface.
Materials
Unless otherwise specified or directed, the materials used for filling shall be obtained from cut from site. Filling shall be free from logs, stumps,
weeds and other perishable matter. The best available material, i.e. the most granular and least plastic, shall be used in the upper layers of
road embankments. Material used in the top 150mm below Sub-grades shall be free of particles larger than 75mm. Material used in the top
600mm below Sub-grades shall be free of particles larger than 150mm.
Rocky materials not exceeding 600mm maximum dimension may be used in embankments. Suitable fine materials shall be placed with the
rock to fill the interstices and produce a dense compact embankment.
The Superintendent may permit the disposal of rocks larger than 600m by burial in banks, mounds, or other areas at least 300mm below
finished surface. Alternatively, large rocks may be secondary blasted to suitable size at no additional cost and incorporated in fills.
The Superintendent may direct that material unsuitable for embankments be used elsewhere on site or run to spoil. If this should result in a
deficiency of material available for filling, then additional materials shall be obtained as directed.

j. MINOR GRADING TO POND BATTERS
The Contractor shall undertake minor grading topond batters indicated on the plans to produce a or gently sloping area and tieing in neatly
with the general contours of the adjacent land. Graded areas shall be free of humps and depressions greater than 50mm from the general
grade. Cut and fill humps and depressions by hand or mechanically as necessary incorporating approved site spoil or imported fill as approved
and available under the contract.
k. MINOR GRADING GENERALLY

Undertake minor levelling and grading to all earth worked areas after completion of major earthworks to suit final grades indicated on the plan
to the Superintendent approval.
l. ROCK EXCAVATION
Rock excavation is classed as any excavation material that cannot be undertaken by a hydraulic excavator fitted with a rock bucket at a rate
of three cubic metres per hour.
Rock excavation shall be undertaken as an approved variation to the Contract at the rate specified by the Contractor in the Schedule of prices.
Rock excavation is a provisional quantity and payment for rock excavation shall only be made where the extent has been determined by the
Contractor and Superintendent and an approved variation issued. The remaining dollar balance of any variations issued shall remain with the
Principal to be expended if and as approved.
m. WORK NEAR EXISTING TREES

Protection
Protect trees specified or shown to be retained from damage by site works. Take necessary precautions as described below.
Harmful Materials
Do not store or otherwise place bulk materials and harmful materials under or near trees. Do not place spoil from excavations against tree
trunks, even for short periods. Prevent wind-blown materials such as cement form harming trees and plants.
Damage
Prevent damage to tree bark. Do not attach stays, guys and the like to trees.
Work under trees

Do not add or remove topsoil within the drip line of trees. If it is necessary to excavate within the drip line, use hand methods such that root
systems are preserved intact and undamaged. Open up excavations under tree canopies for as short a period as possible.
Roots
Do not cut tree roots exceeding 50mm diameter unless approved by the Superintendent. Where it is necessary to cut tree roots, use means
such that the cutting does not unduly disturb the remaining root system. Immediately after cutting, apply a bituminous fungicidal sealant to
the cut surface to prevent the incursion of rot or disease.
Backfilling
Do not backfill around tree trunks to a height greater than 300mm above the original ground surface. Immediately after backfilling, thoroughly
water the root zone surrounding the tree.
Compacted Ground
Avoid compaction of the ground under trees. The parking of plant and storage of equipment under trees to be retained is not permitted.
Australian Standards
All works associated with the protection of existing trees shall comply with Australian Standard;
AS 4970 Protection of trees on development sites
n. RETENTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION

Protection of existing vegetation
The Contractor shall note that great importance is placed on retention of any natural or significant vegetation in its current state, and thus the
Contractor shall limit the movement of plant and equipment and stockpiling of materials to within the limit of the works to be cleared.
The penalties for significant damage (as determined by the Superintendent) or unauthorised clearing are as follows:
Type of Existing Vegetation Penalty

Heritage tree (listed by State Heritage Office or Local Authority Cost of comparable replacement
as having heritage value)
Significant tree (8.0m and greater in either total height or canopy $20,000 or the cost of replacement, whichever is the greater

diameter) value
Medium tree (4.0 8.0m in total height) $10,000 each
Minor tree (1.0m 4.0m in total height) $1,000
Shrubs $20/square metre
Existing Bushland $100/square metre
Existing Turf $100/square metre
For the purposes of this Specification a tree is all trees with a 200mm diameter trunk and greater, and one metre or greater in total height.
Contractors should note that if clearing works extend beyond the prescribed limits without the written authorisation of the Superintendent,
these costs will apply and be borne solely by the Contractor by reduction in monies payable under the Contract.
If the Contractor believes that for construction purposes, additional movement areas are required in the form of haul roads and/or access
roads, they shall submit details of the proposed location and extent of these roads to the Superintendent for approval prior to their construction.
In addition to the above penalties the Contractor shall undertake to co-ordinate, manage and achieve any and all necessary approvals in
relation to protecting and /or the rectification of damage to the satisfaction of the Superintendent, Local Authority and relevant agencies.
o. CLEARING AROUND EXISTING TREES TO BE RETAINED

The Contractor shall undertake to remove all understorey vegetation from in between closely located existing trees to be retained as noted
on the Drawings. In difficult to access areas between groups of existing trees, removal of grass, weeds and other deleterious material shall
occur by hand or mechanical means as appropriate.
Note: No damage to trees to be retained is to be caused either above or below ground.
Arborist
When there is no option but to work in the immediate vicinity of existing trees that are to be retained, the Contractor is to organise for a
qualified Arborist to be on site to oversee these works.
The Contractor is to engage, at the Contractors expense, a qualified, experienced and reputable Arborist to oversee the demolition works in
close proximity to any particular tree to be retained. The Arborist is to be contacted a minimum 3 weeks prior to the demolition works
commencing to ensure appropriate scheduling of works.
p. VEGETATION REMOVAL
The Contractor shall note that trees to be removed and/or retained shall be tagged on site as follows. The Principal, Contractor and
Superintendent shall agree to either;
Tag trees to be retained, OR

Tag trees to be removed, whichever is the lesser.
The Contractor shall not remove any trees or vegetation without seeking absolute clarity from the Superintendent in writing as to which option
above has implemented.
All tree removal shall comply with the relevant Australian Standards and accepted industry standards, particularly but not limited to safety,
adjoining property, insurance and pedestrian and traffic control. The Contractor shall be liable for any and all costs associated with damage
or injury resulting from tree removal.
Grub out stumps and roots over 75mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500mm below Sub-grade in paved areas or below finished surface in
unpaved areas. Backfill grub holes with suitable spoil from excavations compacted in layers to the density of the surrounding undisturbed
soil.
All debris together with fallen timber shall be loaded, hauled and disposed of in a tip in compliance with statutory requirements or may if
instructed be dumped as directed by the Superintendent.
q. WEED ERADICATION
All weed growth shall be eliminated throughout the landscape areas prior to commencement of any soil preparation or planting or grassing
works. Weed eradication shall be undertaken by use of an approved non-residual herbicide such as Roundup or equivalent. Apply such
herbicide only on windless days strictly in accordance with the manufacturers written directions and any relevant health regulations.
Following the application of the herbicide, the treated areas shall be left undisturbed for a minimum of seven (7) days ingestion period prior
to undertaking any further work in such areas.

r. STAGING OF VEGETATION REMOVAL
At the Superintendents discretion the removal of vegetation may be staged in order to temporarily retain shade, screening, habitat, buffers
and the like until future construction works occur.
The Contractor shall not remove any vegetation until instruction from the Superintendent in writing is provided as to the extent of staged
clearing.
s. SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND INSPECTION

The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out the works from the points given on the Drawings and for constructing the works to the
required line and level.
The Contractor will provide:
White painted timber stakes to define the position of trees, paths, paving, garden beds and other construction elements as
specified and or on the Drawings
Bench marks for reduction of levels (if required)
Stakes to define lot boundaries
Setting out shall be approved by the Superintendent prior to the commencement of construction.
Permanent survey pegs that have been damaged or moved during construction shall be reinstated by a Licensed Surveyor nominated or
approved by the Superintendent and the cost of such work shall be paid for in full by the Contractor.
Should survey pegs or marks be in the line of construction operations, the Contractor shall advise the Superintendent prior to commencing
work to enable their temporary removal or relocation of the works. Co-ordination shall include necessary approvals from Main Roads
Department, Council, Service Authorities, other Contractors and the like.
Due to the nature of landscape construction works, minor changes in the layout of the works may be instigated by the Superintendent on
site.
The Contractor shall allow in their price for changes in the setout of the works. A variation to the contract shall only be issued where any
changes results in a change in the Bill of Quantities.
t. DISPOSAL OF SPOIL AND RUBBISH OFFSITE

Remove from the site any approved surplus excavated material or building rubbish, vegetative refuse and the like and dispose of in the correct
manner at an approved rubbish tip at the Contractors expense inclusive of all charges and fees.
u. MATCHING UP
The Contractor shall ensure that all levels neatly tie in and match up with existing work in adjoining areas to the satisfaction of the
Superintendent. This shall include work associated with roads, pathways and paving carried out previously to the areas covered by this
Contract.
v. CLEAN FILL
Material to be used for fill shall consist of materials approved by the Superintendent, free from timber, stumps and weeds, or other perishable
matter, and shall be obtained generally from the excavation.
Any material imported to be used as suitable fill shall satisfy the following criteria:
The sand shall be clean, cohesion-less, free draining and free of all silty, organic or any other deleterious inclusions
Having greater than 80% material passing 19mm sieve
Containing no greater than 4% by weight of soil fractions finer than 0.075mm
Having plasticity index equal to 0% (i.e. no plastic)
The ratio of the maximum density shall be greater than 1.20 the maximum and minimum densities shall be determined in
accordance with test AS1289.5.5.1.
The Contractor shall provide classification and compaction test results on representative samples of the proposed material from a NATA
registered testing authority for approval by the Superintendent prior to the importation of this material to site.
w. PLACEMENT, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

Filling shall be carried up in horizontal layers, extending the full width of the works. Fill thickness shall not be more than 300mm, loose
measurements, provided that if the Contractor can demonstrate that its equipment is capable of compacting a thicker layer to comply with this
Specification, the Superintendent may nominate an increased maximum thickness of layer.

The bedding, overlay and back-filling of all pipe work trenches shall be accomplished with material previously excavated from the site trenches,
provided it is free from rock and other hard objects, in accordance with AS-2032 Installation of uPVC Pipe Systems.
If the material excavated from the site trenches is unsuitable or insufficient to accomplish the bedding and back-filling operation to the
satisfaction of Superintendent, then the Contractor shall import clean sand fill for this purpose, at its expense.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment for the backfilling of trenches, compacting and levelling. Excessive subsidence of
trenches during the Defects Liability period shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to rectify at its own expense.
All surplus soil excavation, including rocks removed from backfill material, shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at its expense.
The Contractor shall ensure that compaction no less than 95% of the modified maximum dry density when tested in accordance with Australian
Standards.
x. TESTING AND COMPACTION

The Contractor shall be responsible for the compaction testing of the earthworks and testing shall be with a Perth Sand Penetrometer.

33 SETTING OUT
33.1 CONTRACTOR TO CHECK BENCH AND REFERENCE MARKS AND OTHER SURV EY MONUMENTS AND PEGS
The Contractor shall check horizontal and vertical values of all established or identified benchmarks, reference marks and boundary and
location pegs and compare them with the values and measurements given on the Contract drawings and with other information and data such
as pre-cal plans that may be made available by the Superintendent to the Contractor from time to time. In case the values given differ from
the values so ascertained or established in the field, the work shall not proceed until the Superintendents assessment and approval has been
given. Copies of the recorded survey and setting out information shall be made available to the Superintendent on site when so requested.
For the avoidance of doubt, the responsibility for set-out is the responsibility of the Contractor at all times.
33.2 PROJECT SURVEYOR

The Principal, through the Project Surveyor, will arrange for the following survey information to be provided:-
a) A copy of the pre-calculation plan, marked up to show the pegs placed and bench mark level information;
b) An electronic data set, for set-out by the Contractor.
As specified in the Amended Form of AS2124-1992 Construction Contract, it shall be the Contractors responsibility to re-establish, recover
or transfer any of the above survey pegs which will be, or are, disturbed in the course of construction.
The Contractor shall give the Project Surveyor 48 hours notice of when information is to be provided to the Contractor.
33.3 LEVELS AND ALIGNMENT

All levels shown on the Drawings refer to Australian Height Datum (AHD). Existing surface levels refer to the surface at the time of survey. All
vertical control for the work shall be established from the temporary bench marks provided by the Project Surveyor. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to set out accurately all work according to the Drawings or figured dimensions thereon.
Pipe and RCB drains, End Treatments, Access Chambers, Open Drains and all Earthworks shall be set out in accordance with the alignments
and levels shown on the working drawings. Setting out tolerances are:
Horizontal 0.020 m Vertical 0.005 m.
The concept of the works and the alignments (both vertical and horizontal) shown on the drawings shall not be altered in any way without the
prior approval of the Manager, Asset Management in Perth Region.
33.4 PROTECTION OF SURVEY STATIONS

Survey stations and bench marks shall be preserved and adequately protected from disturbance for the duration of the Contract by the
Contractor.
Any disturbance of a survey station or bench mark shall be reported to the Superintendent without delay. The Contractor shall not attempt to
reinstate the station or mark without an instruction from the Superintendent and shall accept full liability for damage, however caused.
33.5 CONTOURS AND LEVELS
Contours and levels provided on the Drawings to show existing levels shall be deemed to be the levels used in preparation of the Tender.
If it can be shown on the date of Possession of Site by the Contractor, or within 48 hours of that date, that the existing levels differ from the
levels shown on the Drawings by an amount which would change the quantity of any of the work to be executed under the Contract by more
than 10% of the quantity calculated from the levels shown on the Drawings, the Contract sum shall be adjusted accordingly.
33.6 FINISHING AND PRESENTATION O F THE WORKS
Following completion of the works the Contractor shall, prior to the practical completion inspection, ensure that all sand, silt and debris is
cleared from the site. The Contractor shall remain responsible for maintaining these works free of sand, silt and debris until the date of Practical
Completion. The site shall be presented in a tidy condition.
At completion, the earthworked areas shall be cleared of all refuse, rubble and the like and neatly graded prior to hydromulching.
Top quality presentation of the completed works is of paramount importance and the Contractor shall make full allowance for:-
Removing wheel ruts of plant

emerge associates SETTING OUT

Hand raking of all sticks, stones etc; and
The requirements of this clause shall also extend to existing roads, existing roads used for access, and storm water drains which are directly
affected by the works under the contract.
33.7 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS S OIL, RUBBISH AND FIN AL CLEANING UP

The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of surplus spoil and rubbish and for the final cleaning up of all areas covered by the
Contract. All material which cannot be disposed of on the site in accordance with the requirements of the Specification shall be loaded, hauled
and disposed of at the Local Government Authority (Council) tip at the Contractor'sexpense.
All rubbish disposal shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Environmental Protection Authority, the Local Council and conditions
imposed by the Superintendent.
The Contractor is wholly responsible and liable for the design and construction of all temporary works in relation to the Works.
When requested by the Superintendent, the Contractor shall forthwith supply full details of any proposed temporary works.
The submission of calculations or details shall not in any way limit the liability of the Contractor nor be seen as an admission of liability on the
part of the Principal or the Superintendent.
33.9 DRAWINGS
Unless instructed in writing by the Superintendent no drawing issued by the Principal shall be used for the purposes of construction of the
works unless it is marked as Issued for Construction.
33.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Pursuant to Clause 37 of the Amended Form of AS2124-1992 Construction Contract, the defects liability period shall be twelve calendar
months from the date of issue of a Certificate of Practical Completion.
33.11 NOMINATED SUB- CONTRACTORS
Where a part of the Works under the Contract is indicated to be carried out by a Nominated Sub- Contractor the provisions of Clause 9 of the
Amended Form of AS2124-1992 Construction Contract shall apply.
The Nominated Sub-Contractor shall be required to enter into the Sub-contract on the same terms and conditions as this Contract with the
additional requirement that it carries out the Work the subject of the Nominated Sub-contract within the time periods indicated by the Program,
as updated from time to time.
The actual start date shall be that upon which the Contractor makes available the section of work to the Nominated Sub-Contractor.
33.12 LATENT CONDITIONS

Pursuant to the provisions of Clause 12 of the Amended Form of AS2124-1992 Construction the Contractor, the Contractor is deemed to have
made allowances in the Contract Sum for all materials encountered in excavation including, but not limited to rock, all quantities of
groundwater, surface water, ingress of water from any source which are required to be removed in order to carry out the Works and any
possible difficulty in transporting, placing or compacting materials obtained from excavation. For the avoidance of doubt, the parties agree
that the following are not latent conditions for the purpose of this Contract:
All rock of whatever nature;
Water, including groundwater or surfacewater;
Aboriginal artefacts.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or costs under the Contract in respect of the matters above.
emerge associates SETTING OUT

34 EARTHWORKS
34.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall complete the earthworks to this specification and adhere to the tolerances as set out herein and as depicted in the
drawings.
34.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

The following documents shall apply to this section:
AS 1289 Methods of Testing Soils for EngineeringPurposes
AS3798 Guidelines on Earthworks for Commercial and Residential Developments
WA GOV Construction Safety Act 1972 and Regulations1973
34.3 NOTICE
If the following are encountered, give notice immediately and obtain instructions before carrying out any further work in the affected area:
Bad ground
Discrepancies
Rock
Springs
Underground tanks/structures.
34.4 DEFINITIONS
Bad ground Ground unsuitable for the purposes of the works, including fill liable to subsidence, ground containing cavities, faults or fissures,
ground contaminated by harmful substances and ground which is or becomes soft, wet or unstable.
Discrepancy - A difference between contract information about the site and the conditions encountered on the site, including but not limited
to discrepancies concerning:
The nature or quantity of the material to be excavated or placed
Existing site levels
Services or other obstructions beneath the site surface.
Rock Excavation in rock shall comprise excavation of material in place whether solid or not that cannot be ripped and excavated by a
tracked excavator (Caterpillar 330B or equivalent) in good condition. The excavator shall be capable of exerting a minimum breakout force of
180kN at the bottom of the excavation with a 600 mm wide bucket fitted with rock teeth. Excavation in all other classes of material shall be
termed common excavation.
Material which can be loosened with a pick, frozen materials, soft laminated shale and hardpan, which for convenience or economy is loosened
by drilling, blasting, wedging or the use of pneumatic tools, removal of concrete pavement and retaining walls, shall not be classified as rock
excavation.
34.5 STOCKPILE SITE

A designated stockpile site for screened topsoil, mulched vegetation and surplus sand material will be made available by the Principal.
Topsoil is to be separated from all other spoil material. Stockpiles are to not exceed 3.0m in height.
emerge associates EARTHWORKS

35 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
35.1 GENERAL
Clearing and grubbing shall extend over the cut and fill areas of the site as shown by the limit of earthworks on the drawings. The whole width
and length of road reserves shall also be cleared and grubbed except where designated on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract, or as
designated by the superintendent. Where trees have been identified to remain undisturbed in road reserves or elsewhere, the Contractor
shall clearly demarcate the tree(s) on site and ensure that they remain undisturbed for the duration of the contract. Areas designated on the
drawings or elsewhere in the Contract or as directed by the Superintendent shall be undisturbed.
Clearing shall consist of clearing areas of all fallen trees, brush, shrubs and other vegetation, and rubbish and boulders and shall include the
grubbing out (removal) of all stumps and roots larger than 80 mm diameter to a depth of 300 mm below either the natural surface or the
finished sub grade surface, whichever is the lower, and disposing of all spoil resulting from the clearing and grubbing. Any grub holes left after
the grubbing out of roots and stumps shall be filled with sand and compacted in accordance with the requirements of the specification. All
standing trees shall remain unless directed otherwise by the Superintendent.
Machines used for pushing and heaping operations shall be fitted with root stakes or similar equipment and operated in such a manner that
as little soil as possible is removed and heaped with the cleared material. No material from clearing is to be pushed beyond the limit of the
site.
All cleared vegetation shall be mulched, transported and stockpiled at the designated stockpile site. Spoil from grubbing out; unsuitable
material, uncontrolled fill and rubbish etc shall be removed from site to an approved Local Authority tipping site at the Contractors expense.
Access tracks, borrow areas, storage areas and the like shall be kept in a condition acceptable to the Superintendent. Access tracks shall
only follow proposed roads. The Superintendents permission shall be obtained prior to any other access tracks being placed which may
destroy vegetation.
35.2 CARE OF TREES

Trees to be retained are to be adequately protected at all times and particular care shall be taken to avoid any damage to the roots, trunks
and branches. If directed, equipment shall be kept clear of trees and hand methods of excavation shall be adopted.
Where the Contractor inadvertently clears bushland or trees to be retained without approval of the Superintendent, the following costs will be
deemed as an amount owing to the Principal by the Contractor:-
significant tree (over 200L) $5,000.00 each
minor tree $2,000.00 each
35.3 TOPSOIL
After the completion of clearing operations all topsoil shall be stripped to a minimum depth of 150mm of soil and roots. Topsoil shall be
screened and stockpiled on designated site. The contractor may be instructed by the Superintendent to remove excess topsoil from site
The method of and designated area for stockpiling shall be discussed with the Superintendent prior to commencement of construction
During the removal of topsoil the Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to any retained vegetation within or
adjoining the limits of clearing.
35.4 EXCAVATION
Excavate over the site to give correct levels and profiles as the basis for construction, paving, filling and landscaping. Make allowance for
compaction or settlement.
No explosives are to be used at any time.
Before commencing any excavation, the Contractor shall locate all utility services which cross or run parallel to the site of excavation and
associated spoil or excavation operations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the locating and protection of such services and shall meet all costs associated with any necessary
repairs thereon to the satisfaction of the Statutory Authority concerned.
During the process of the work the Contractor shall take all precautions against damage to adjacent structures including roads, paths, drains
etc. Should damage occur it shall be reinstated by the Contractor at his own expense and shall be to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.
emerge associates CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Where excavations are to be undertaken in the vicinity of existing services they shall be supported in a manner approved by the Superintendent
and the relevant Utility Authority until backfilling of the adjacent excavation has been satisfactorily completed. The cost of supporting such
services shall be deemed to be included in the Lump Sum Price.
The excavation and other works along any public or private road shall be carried out in such a manner as to avoid as far as possible any
obstruction to traffic or inconvenience to the public. All soil or other material thrown up from the excavation and all tools, plant, pipes and other
materials shall be made to occupy the least possible space to ensure that maximum width of safe road for vehicles, and the Contractor must
maintain pedestrian and vehicular access to all properties at all times.
emerge associates CLEARING AND GRUBBING

36 BACKFILL AND BULK EARTHWORKS
36.1 GENERAL
All bulk earthworks shall be clean free draining sand and shall not be polluted with roots or other rubbish. Earthworks shall be trimmed to a
neat and even finish to a tolerance of 50 mm of the design level.
The Contractor shall record the equipment used, date, time, results and location (in plan and level) of all Perth Sand Penetrometer tests
conducted on site. If the Contractor uses its own penetrometer, a
calibration certificate showing the mass, drop height and tip diameter shall be provided. The cost of all penetrometer testing shall be included
in the rates for foundation preparation and earthworks.
Should difficulty arise in achieving the specified Perth penetrometer blow count the Superintendent may direct that in-situ density testing be
performed to confirm the correlation between blow count and density and ensure that a density index of at least 70 % is being achieved in
accordance with AS 1289 Method 5.6.1.
The Contractor shall undertake all compaction testing required to demonstrate that the Works have been undertaken in accordance with the
requirements of this specification. Compaction testing shall be undertaken in accordance with the requirements of AS 3798-1996.
The results and records of all compaction tests shall be submitted to the Superintendent.
If fill is to be placed on a surface which slopes more than 1:4, bench the surface to form a key for the fill. As each layer of fill is placed, cut the
existing ground surface progressively to form a series of horizontal steps at least 1 metre in width. Recompact excavated material as part of
the filling.
The backfill shall be trimmed to a neat finish to a tolerance of 40 mm so that the surface shall be even.
36.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

Following Clearing and Grubbing and prior to the placement of bulk earthworks fill, the contractor shall proof roll the existing surface to
satisfaction of the Superintendent. The in-situ sub-grade shall be adequately watered and consolidated with a power drum roller of 8 to 10
tonnes. The roller shall run over the sub-grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as elastic mass. The roller shall
pass a minimum of but not limiting to 5 runs on the sub-grade.
The approved subgrade preparation shall be surveyed by the Contractors licensed surveyor, and shall be independently spot checked by
the Principals surveyor. This survey data shall be use as a base in determining/checking the quantity of Forward Earthworks.
The contractor shall notify and allow the superintendent adequate time to inspect, review the contractors compaction test sheets, and confirm
sub-grade has been compacted to the requirements stated in this technical specification and geotechnical report.
36.3 IMPORTED FILL

Prior to the placement of imported fill, the contractor shall proof roll the affected area to achieve a minimum compaction of 8 blows per 300mm
layer to a depth of 450mm (ie 150mm to 450mm)
Import fill material shall be naturally occurring material, free draining, free from Unsuitable Material and Contaminate. This material shall have
not more than 4% by weight passing the 75m sieve, and shall be approved by the Superintendent.
emerge associates BACKFILL AND BULK EARTHWORKS

To comply with the site subsoil drainage design requirement, material placed within the upper 1.5m of the profile must have a
minimum hydraulic conductivity (permeability coefficient) of not less than 4m per day when compacted to a minimum density ratio
of 98% standard compaction and tested in accordance with AS1289 6.7.1.
The imported fill material shall have a soaked CBR of not less than 10%.
All fill material shall be placed in layers no greater than 300 mm thick and compacted to a Perth Sand Penetrometer test (AS 1289
Method 6.3.3) result of not less than 8 blows for the 300 mm interval 150 mm to 450 mm, 10 blows for the 300 mm interval 450
mm to 750 mm, and 11 blows for 750 mm to 1,050 mm, and deeper. Place and compact fill to the designated dimensions, levels,
grades, and cross sections so that the surface is always self draining. When filling at structures place and compact fill in layers
simultaneously on both sides of structures, culverts and pipelines to avoid differential loading. Where necessary to achieve the
required density or moisture content, adjust the moisture content of the fill before compaction.
36.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING

Geotechnical Verifications
The Contractor shall be responsible for engaging a geotechnical consultant to undertake pre and post geotechnical inspections, to
verify the earthworks, compaction, and achievement of a final site A classification. This shall include but not be limited to the
following:
Inspect topsoil and vegetation stripping and assess whether sufficient topsoil has been removed, subsurface
conditions are adequate, and level of compaction has been achieved
Inspect ongoing earthworks in accordance with AS3798
Undertake post earthwork verification testing to assess the level of compaction achieved across the site
Provide a report detailing the earthworks verification studies, including site classification to AS2870- 1996
Quality Control Test on Import Fill Material

The contractor shall obtain 3 (three) Particle Size Distribution Samples and provide test certificates, for every 15,000BCM of
imported fill.
Compaction Testing
During the process importation and compaction of fill material, the contractor shall provide compaction test sheets to the
Superintendent on weekly bases, confirming lifts have been compacted to the requirements stated in this technical specification.
The contractor shall also provide Calibration Certificates.
It should be expected that the superintendent will be auditing the contractors lift compaction tests on a weekly basis.
The contractor shall notify and allow the superintendent adequate time to inspect, and test, to confirm that the final individual Lot
Classification is in accordance with AS2870-1996.
Tracking
On weekly bases, the contractor shall record the progress of compacted earthworks, on drawings, and make this information readily
available to the Superintendent. The location of quality control tests shall be referenced on this drawing.
36.5 HYDROMULCHING
Hydromulching shall be carried out at the direction of the Superintendent while works are on the way.
Hydromulching shall be carried out to the entire area following completion of the clearing and earthworks within that area.
Once an area has been hydromulched, no traffic, construction plant or disturbances of the area shall be permitted to occur on the
area. If any such disturbance to a previously hydromulched area takes place it shall be re-hydromulched at the Contractor's expense.
The hydromulch is to be applied with the following mix:
Soil Tack ST8 at 300kgs per hectare and recycled newsprint at 1,500 kg per hectare.
Once mixed the hydromulch is to be applied in even quantities making sure that the entire area nominated is covered with the
specified mix.
emerge associates BACKFILL AND BULK EARTHWORKS

37 AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY OF EARTHWORKS
37.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall appoint a registered surveyor to carry out 'as constructed' survey of the earthworks to ensure the levels
specified on the Drawings have been achieved by the Contractor. Both the proof rolled in-situ surface as well as the final compacted
surface level shall be surveyed by the Contractor. The proof rolled in-situ surface shall be surveyed at a grid spacing not exceeding
5m x 5m. The surveying of as- constructed levels shall not relieve the contractor of its obligation to implement its own quality
control procedure during construction to ensure that the required level and accuracy requirements stated on the drawings and
specifications are met.
37.2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITY

The work under the Contract shall be subject to certain "as constructed" information that must be provided by either:
A Licensed Surveyor duly licensed in the State of Western Australia or
The Contractor.
All costs associated with (a) shall be paid by the Principal whereas all costs associated with (b) shall be paid by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall give timely notice to the Superintendent in respect of (a) so that arrangements with the appropriate Licensed
Surveyor may be made by the Superintendent commensurate with the job requirements. Irrespective of the various sources of the
specified "as constructed" information, all information shall be satisfactory to the Superintendent and shall be available before the
issue by the Superintendent of the Certificate of Practical Completion. Additionally, and together with the Contractor's statements
for payment claims, interim information shall be submitted as specified.
emerge associates AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY OF EARTHWORKS

38 IRRIGATION SPECIFICATION
38.1 IMPORTANT
Include this in the irrigation spec under Pipework - Backfill and Compaction : The Contractor shall ensure that compaction of
trenches is no less than 95% of the modified maximum dry density when tested in accordance with AS 1289-1977.
38.2 GENERAL
Scope of Works
The Contract for the irrigation works is to include the construction, installation, testing & commissioning of:
Groundwater bore into the superficial aquifer at POS 8030

Automatic irrigation system for all Stage 25 Works
Monitoring and Reporting of water usage in accordance with DoW requirements.
38.3 MONITORING AND REPORTING

The Contractor is responsible for the continuous monitoring and monthly reporting of water usage from the bore(s) that are the
source of water for the landscape works within this Contract. Monitoring and reporting shall occur for the full period of the Contract
including Construction, Consolidation and Maintenance Periods. All monitoring and reporting shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the WA Department of Water and the local government authority.
38.4 ANTICIPATED WATER USAGE

The Contractor shall complete the following table as part of the Tender submission indicating the estimated volume of groundwater
that will be required for construction, and during the Consolidation and Maintenance Periods.
Landscape Type Volume of Water for Volume of Water Volume of Water for
Testing and per week during Testing and
Commissioning Construction Period Commissioning
Mature Transplants
Trees
Turf
Shrub Planting
Other ( list below )
38.5 STANDARDS
38.6 APPENDED SPECIFICATION

The following Specification Items are appended:
Total Eden Irrigation Specification Document dated 29 Sep 2016

Prepared by: Joseph Strauss
Total Eden
1 Altona Street
Bibra Lake WA 6164
Contact: 9434 7500
Any ambiguity perceived or otherwise between the appendices and the main Specification document shall be immediately reported
to the Superintendent.
emerge associates IRRIGATION SPECIFICATION

TOTALEDENPTYLTD
ABN47010118895
1ALTONASTREET
BIBRALAKEWESTERNAUSTRALIA6164
TELEPHONE0894347500
FACSIMILE0894347501
TECHNICALSPECIFICATION
FOR
AUTOMATICIRRIGATIONSYSTEM
CATALINABEACH(STAGE1)
CLARKSON,W.A.
AMENDMENTRECORD
REV REV. REVIEW

PAGE DETAILSOFCHANGE PREP
No DATE BY
A 29/09/16 ALL Issuedforapproval J.S I.B

CatalinaBeach(Stage1) EmergeAssociates
1 AUTOMATICIRRIGATIONSYSTEM...........................................................................................3
1.1 SCOPEOFWORKSANDINTENT........................................................................................................3
1.2 GENERAL.....................................................................................................................................3
1.3 WORKBYOTHERS.........................................................................................................................3
1.4 COORDINATIONOFSUBCONTRACTORSANDOFWORKS.........................................................................4
1.5 SETOUT.......................................................................................................................................4
1.6 ERRORS&OMISSIONS...................................................................................................................4
1.7 TIDYINGUP.................................................................................................................................4
1.8 MATERIALSSTORAGE....................................................................................................................5
1.9 SITESAFETY.................................................................................................................................5
1.10 EXISTINGSERVICES........................................................................................................................5
1.11 CONTRACTVARIATIONS.................................................................................................................5
1.12 ASCONSTRUCTEDDOCUMENTATION...............................................................................................6
1.12.1 IrrigationDrawings..........................................................................................................6
1.12.2 Manual............................................................................................................................7
2 EXISTINGBOREHOLE...............................................................................................................8
3 BOREPUMP............................................................................................................................9
3.1 PUMPSHROUD............................................................................................................................9
3.2 DISCHARGECOLUMN.....................................................................................................................9
3.3 CONCRETEBLOCK.........................................................................................................................9
3.4 DISCHARGEASSEMBLY...................................................................................................................9
4 IRONFILTRATIONUNITFORBORE.........................................................................................10
5 ELECTRICAL............................................................................................................................11
5.1 POWERSUPPLY.LABELINGEARTHING.............................................................................................11
5.2 VARIABLESPEED.........................................................................................................................11
5.3 SINEWAVEFILTER......................................................................................................................11
5.4 ELECTRICALCONTROLCUBICLE......................................................................................................12
5.5 SUBMERSIBLECABLES..................................................................................................................12
5.6 TESTING....................................................................................................................................12
6 IRRIGATIONSYSTEM..............................................................................................................13
6.1 SUPPLYANDINSTALLIRRIGATION...................................................................................................13
6.2 SITEAVAILABILITY.......................................................................................................................13
6.3 SETOUT.....................................................................................................................................13
6.4 SLEEVES....................................................................................................................................13
6.5 PIPEWORKCOVER.......................................................................................................................13
6.6 MAINLINEPIPEWORK..................................................................................................................14
6.7 CASTIRONFITTINGS....................................................................................................................14
6.7.1 Bends.................................................................................................................................14
6.7.2 Tees....................................................................................................................................14
6.7.3 Tappingbands...................................................................................................................14
6.7.4 Reducers............................................................................................................................14
6.7.5 Flangedconnectors...........................................................................................................14
6.8 THRUSTBLOCKS.........................................................................................................................15
6.9 LATERALPIPEWORK.....................................................................................................................15
6.10 PVCPIPEFITTINGS.....................................................................................................................15
6.10.1 CrossStackingofFittings...............................................................................................15
1
6.10.2 PipebetweenFittings....................................................................................................15
6.10.3 BendingofPipe.............................................................................................................15
6.11 SOLVENTCEMENT.......................................................................................................................15
6.12 PRIMINGFLUID..........................................................................................................................16
6.13 PLASTICTHREADEDFITTINGS........................................................................................................16
6.14 TAPPINGBANDS.........................................................................................................................16
6.15 EMBEDMENT&BACKFILLING........................................................................................................16
6.16 COMPACTION.............................................................................................................................16
6.17 EXCESSSPOIL.............................................................................................................................17
6.18 SOLENOIDCONTROLVALVES.........................................................................................................17
6.19 AIR/VACUUMRELEASEVALVE.....................................................................................................17
6.20 ISOLATIONVALVES......................................................................................................................17
6.21 VALVEBOXES.............................................................................................................................18
6.22 SPRINKLERHEIGHT&ADJUSTMENT...............................................................................................18
6.23 SPRINKLERS...............................................................................................................................19
6.23.1 TurfArea........................................................................................................................19
6.23.2 GardenArea..................................................................................................................19
6.23.3 TreeBubblers................................................................................................................19
7 SENSORS...............................................................................................................................20
7.1 FLOWSYNC...............................................................................................................................20
7.2 ETSENSOR................................................................................................................................20
8 CONTROLSYSTEM.................................................................................................................21
8.1 CONTROLLERS............................................................................................................................21
8.2 TWOWIREPATH........................................................................................................................21
8.3 FLOWSYNCWIRES.....................................................................................................................21
8.4 FIELDDECODERUNITS.................................................................................................................21
8.5 SURGEPROTECTION....................................................................................................................21
8.6 CONDUIT...................................................................................................................................21
8.7 WIRECONNECTORS....................................................................................................................21
8.8 CABLEPITS................................................................................................................................21
APPENDIX1EXISTINGBOREINFORMATION................................................................................22
APPENDIX2PUMPCURVE..........................................................................................................25
1 AUTOMATICIRRIGATIONSYSTEM
1.1 ScopeofWorksandIntent
Theworkstobecompletedaspartofthiscontractincludebutarenotlimitedto:
1. Supplyandinstallationofasubmersiblepumpandheadworksasspecified.
2. Supplyandinstallationofanironfilterasspecified.
3. Supplyandinstallationofanelectricalcubicleasspecified.
4. Supplyandinstallationofanewcontrollerasspecified.
5. Supply and install of turf spray, garden spray, tree bubblers, pipework, valves and all
associatedcomponents.
6. The supply, installation, commissioning and testing of the automatic irrigation system
componentstothesatisfactionofthesuperintendent.
Thethree(3)portionsofworkstobecompletedaspartofthiscontractincludebutarenot
limitedto:
1. EntryandMainPOS
2. AviatorBoulevardStreetscapes
3. MarmionAveVerges
Thisspecificationandassociateddrawingshavebeenaccomplishedforthepurposeofoutlining
tothecontractortheextentoftheworks,whicharerequiredbytheclientandtherouteand
approximateposition,and/orlocationofit.
1.2 General
ThecontractoristocarryoutworkasdetailedandinaccordancewiththisSpecificationand
Drawings,thewholeofwhichshallbedeemedtoconstituteonedocument.Thisspecificationis
tobereadinconjunctionwiththecurrentCityofWannerooIrrigationSpecificationsNovember
2015andwherethespecificationsvarytheCityofWannerooIrrigationSpecificationshalltake
precedence.
1.3 WorkbyOthers
TheContractorshallliaisewiththeothercontractorsundertakingassociatedworkstowhichthe
Contractormustconnectfortheprovisionofservices,asfollows;
Service Contractor
Powersupplyforbore Principal
Sleevesunderroads CivilContractor
Sleevesunderpathsorhardscapes LandscapingContractor
FutureconnectiontotheNBN CityofWanneroo
1.4 CoordinationofSubcontractorsandofworks
Theirrigationcontractorisresponsibleforcoordinatingtheactivitiesofhisinstallersorsub
contractorsandresolvinganyconflictsthatmayarise.Theirrigationcontractorisrequiredto
liaisewithexternalpartiesfortheprovisionofservicesthataretobesuppliedbyothersandthat
isessentialfortheinstallationoftheirrigation.
Theirrigationcontractorisrequiredtocoordinatewithotherdisciplineseitherduringthe
progressionoftheworksorbeforethestartofthework.Theirrigationcontractorisrequirednot
todamageotherpartiesworksandotherpartiesarerequirednottodamageirrigationworks.
Paymentofdamagesbyeitherpartymayberequiredwhenresponsibilityfordamagecanbe
clearlydetermined.
Coordinationforfinalelevation/sitegrading,drainageandforthelocationofwalkways,
footpaths,lightposts,mowingkerbsandkerbsisrequired.
1.5 Setout
Theirrigationcontractorshallprovideforapropersetoutofhisworks.Markingoutoftheworks
mayrequireapprovalbythesuperintendentbeforetheinstallationcanproceed.
Theirrigationcontractorisrequiredtofollowtheirrigationlayoutasshownonthedesign
drawingwherepossible.Whenadeviationfromtheirrigationdrawingisrequiredforanyreason,
itistobepromptlyrecordedwhiletheconstructionisproceedingsothatthedeviationcanbe
reflectedintheasconstructeddrawings.Majordeviationfromtheirrigationdesignwillrequire
theapprovalofboththesuperintendentandtheirrigationconsultantpriortoinstallation.
PracticalCompletionmaynotbegrantedifthisinstructionisnotfollowed.
Thecontractorisrequiredtoallowinhispriceforanysurveys(includingcontractswithexternal
surveyingcontractors),whichhedeemsessentialsforthecompletionofthescopeofworks.
1.6 Errors&Omissions
Duringthetenderprocess,theirrigationcontractoristonotifytheirrigationconsultantofany
errorsoromissionsnotedinthetenderdocumentation.Avariationordermaynotbegrantedif
variationworksstemfromsucherrorsoromissionswithoutpriornotification.
1.7 TidyingUp
Theirrigationcontractorisrequiredtotidyuptheworksiteoncompletionofeachdays
installationworks.Surplusspoilmaybemovedtoanagreedstoragelocationpriortodisposalat
thecompletionofallworks.Theirrigationcontractoristosupplyasuitableskiporbinforother
constructionrubbish.Tidyupwillbecompletedtothesatisfactionofthesitesuperintendent.
Theirrigationcontractorisresponsiblefortheremovalanddisposalofsurplusspoiland
constructionrubbishtoanaccreditedlandfillsite.
Worksafetyisparamountandhousekeepingofthesiteduringtheprogressoftheinstallation
workshouldbedonemaintainasafeworksite.
1.8 MaterialsStorage
Dependingonthetypeofworksrequired,thecontractormayneedtoprovideforhiscrewor
subcontractorsandinstallersanonsitestorageformaterials,tools,supplies,equipmentor
machinery.Dependingonthetypeofsite,theonsitestorageprovidedmayneedormaynot
needtobeofthesecuretype.Materialstorageshouldbeallowedforinthequotationforthe
works.Lossofmaterialduetotheftshouldbeasmuchaspossiblepreventedorminimizedby
takingsensibleprecautionswererequiredtoalleviateordecreasesuchrisks.
1.9 SiteSafety
Theworksafetyisofutmostimportance.Thecontractorwilldoeveryreasonableendeavourto
ensurethesafetyofeveryoneincludinghisowncrew.Thecontractorwillhavetocomplywith
thelatestAustralianstandardsandregulationsincludingbutnotlimitedtoOccupationalSafety&
HealthAct(1984)andtheOccupationalSafety&HealthRegulations(1996).Whereasituation
arisesthatmaygiveaworkhazard,thesituationwillberectifiedimmediatelyorassoonas
possible,evenifthismeantastoptotheworkprogressandadelayindelivery:thesafetyofthe
workscomesatahigherpriority.
1.10 ExistingServices
Theirrigationcontractorisrequiredtoseekthepositionofexistingserviceswhereapplicableto
preventdamagesforthoseservices.Thismayincludeliaisingwithothercontractorsorthe
principaltoseekthelocationofsuchutilities,calldialbeforeyoudig,orevencontactother
externalpartiestoseekthepositionofexistingutilitieswherethereisachanceofdamageorrisk
ofencroachingonotherutilitiescorridors.Whenresponsibilitycanbeclearlydetermined,the
contractorwillneedtorepairthedamageorotherwiseprovideapaymentforthedamagestobe
repairedbyspecialistservicescompanies.
OtherpartiesandservicesincludebutarenotlimitedtoPower&GasSupplies,WaterMains,
Telephone(voice,data&communications),Sewerage,Drainage,Lotboundarypegsetc.
1.11 ContractVariations
Athisdiscretion,theprincipalhastherighttoissueworkvariationorderswithoutbeing
penalizedforthosevariationsunlessagreedotherwisebetweentheprincipalandtheirrigation
contractor.
Variationsmayberequiredforthefollowing:
Thedeletionofworks/materialstothescopeofworks.
Thesupplyofworks/materialoutsidethescopeofworks.
Forunforeseendifficulties,thatmightbeexperiencedonsite.
1.12 AsConstructedDocumentation
TheintentofAsConstructeddocumentationistoprovidetheClientwithaccurateinformation
ontheconstructionandlocationofvariouselementsoftheconstructedworks.
1.12.1 IrrigationDrawings
DrawingsaretobeprovidedonaCDthatisstoredineachofthemanuals.
DrawingaretobeprovidedinAutoCAD2007(DWG)formatandAdobe(PDF)formaton
theCD.
All solenoid valves, isolation valves, flush valves, air valves and cable pits are to have
triangular valve measurements (3 measurements) off fixed object including sprinklers,
paths,buildingsetc.
AllirrigationitemsformingpartofthescopeofworksaretobesurveyedaspartofO
Spec.Thistoincludebutnotlimitedto:
1. Eachdecoder,whichisnotanirrigationvalvedecoder.
2. Anyandallsurge/lightningprotectiondevicesinstalled.
3. Anyandallroadcrossings.
4. EachandeverymainlineandlateralTjoint,bendandvalve.
SurveydatacollectedistobealsoprovidedinaseparateAutoCADfileaspartofOSpec.
AllsurveydatacollectedistobeprovidedinPerthCoastalGrid1994(PCG94).
1.12.2 Manual
Uponcompletionoftheproject,theIrrigationContractorshallprovidetwo(2)setsofOperation
andMaintenancemanualstoincludethefollowinginformation(butnotlimitedto)onthe
systemasapplicabletothescopeofworks;
Project title, Head Contractor and Installation Contractor details including addresses,
telephonenumbersandcontactnames.
AsConstructeddrawingsindigitalformat(CDorflashdrive).
SurveyDatatobeprovidedindigitalformat(CDorflashdrive)forOSpecpurposes.
DetailsofRoutineandbreakdownmaintenancecalloutprocedure.
DateofPracticalCompletionanddetailsofwarranty/guarantees.
Generaldescriptionofthesystem.
Maintenanceinstructions.
Faultfindingprocedures.
Listofspecialtoolsrequired.
Listofspareparts.
HardCopy(A1size)ofAsConstructedirrigationplan.
Themanualsshallbeprovidedinhardcover,A4Dringfolders,witheachpageofinformation
beinginsertedintoaclearplasticA4sheetprotector,andshallbeaccomplishedtothe
satisfactionoftheSuperintendent.AllwrittendocumentationshallbeprovidedinMicrosoft
Wordformat.
2 EXISTINGBOREHOLE
Belowisatableshowingtheinformationontheexistingbore.
Items Information
CasingSize DN200CL.12PVC
203mmI.D.
CasingDepth 0mto53m
ScreenDepth 53mto62m(9mofscreen)
TotalBoreDepth 62m
StaticWaterLevel 33.05m
TotalIronContent 2.0PPM
Formoreinformationontheboreconstruction,testpumpingresultsandwateranalysisreferto
Appendix1.
3 BOREPUMP
ThecontractoristosupplyandinstallasubmersibleborepumpofnoncorrosiveConstruction,
havingaperformanceofapproximately10.3litrespersecondatatotalheadof102metreTDH
or12litrespersecondatatotalheadof91metreTDH.
Forthepurposesoftenderingthepriceistobebasedonthesupplyandinstallationofa
GRUNDFOSmodelSP4611,28kWthreephasesubmersiblepumpwithanMS6000motor(Refer
toAppendix2).
3.1 PumpShroud
Thepumpmotorshallbefittedwithastainlesssteelmotorcoolingshroudwheretheminimum
irrigationflowratesresultinanannularwatervelocitypassingoverthepumpmotorwhichis
lowerthantheminimumvelocityasspecifiedbythemotormanufacturers
3.2 DischargeColumn
TheContractorshallinstalltheborepumpsonscrewed100mmclass18PVCcolumnor
Permaglasswhichhashadallscrewedjoints,sealedwithasuitablesealingagentinaccordance
withCityofWanneroospecification.
Sufficientcolumnshallbeinstalledsothatthebaseofthepumpmotorisapproximatelyone(1)
metrefrominthetopofthescreeninstalledinthebore,butfortenderingpurposes,the
Contractorshallallowfor52metresofpumpcolumnandancillaries.
3.3 ConcreteBlock
Thepumpdischargeassemblyistobesupportedbyaconcreteblockwithminimumdimensions
of750mm750mmwithadepthof600mm.
Thetopoftheconcreteblockshallfinish100mmabovefinishedgroundlevel.
Allelectricalconduitsshallbesetintotheconcreteblock.
3.4 DischargeAssembly
ThedischargeflangeanddischargeassemblyshallbemanufacturedentirelyofDN100steel
(Schedule40)Pipeandfittingsandshallbehotdipgalvanisedafterfabrication.
Thedischargeassemblyshallbeinaccordancewiththeboreheaddetailsshownonthe
drawings.
Thedischargeassemblyshallinclude(butnotlimitedto):
Sniffervalve.
100mmdiameterwafercheckvalve.
100mmdiameterhandleoperatedbutterflyisolationvalve.
100mmdiameterflangedtestteewithablankmatchingflange.
100mmAradOctaveultrasonicwatermeter inalockablegalvanisedbox.
4 IRONFILTRATIONUNITFORBORE
Thegroundwaterforirrigationhassignificantironlevelsthatwillcausestainingtohardsurfaces.
ThecontractoraspartofthiscontractistoinstallanElliotsorLandandWaterIronfiltration
unit.Thisunitistohavea12lpscapacityandhavetheabilitytotreataminimumof2.0partper
millionironasperthewateranalysisreferencedinAppendix1.
Theironfiltrationunitwillbackwashtheirondischargeintoasoakwellsthataretobelocated
neartheironfilter.
ThefencingfortheIronFiltercompoundistheresponsibilityofotherstobenominatedandco
ordinatedbytheLandscapeArchitect.
10
5 ELECTRICAL
TheContractorshallensurethatallmaterialsandworkmanshipshallbeaccomplishedin
accordancewiththeregulationsandrequirementsofWestern'Power,industryCodesofPractice
andwithcurrentS.A.A.wiringrules.TheCityofWannerooSpecificationforcubiclesizeand
layoutistobeused.
5.1 PowerSupply.LabelingEarthing
Thepowersupplytothisinstallationwillbe415voltthree(3)phase.
Allmaterialsandequipmentsuppliedunderthiscontractshallbedesignedforthissupply,unless
otherwisespecified.
ThecontractoristoliaisewithWesternPowerandmakesallapplicationsonbehalfoftheclient
allfeeswillbepaidbytheclient.
Installtheearthingsysteminaccordancewiththemultipleearthedneutral(MEN)system
requirements.Useearthingconductorsofhighconductivitycopperunlessotherwisespecified.
ThecablepitadjacenttotheElectricalCubiclemaybeutilisedfortheMENearthinginstallation.
TheEarthshallbeinstalledfromthepitelectrodeviaaconduittothecubicle.
Connectanelectrodewithapprovedcopperorbrassbandtypeclamps,orproprietary
madeclampassemblies.Ensurethatsteelclampingboltsaregalvanisedorstainless
steel,paintexposedpartsoftheconnectionwith'Roval'orsimilarmetallicpaint.
Earthelectrodeshallbe3000mmlongcoppercladsteelcoredtype,of16mmdiameter
anddriventoadepthof2900mmintotheground.
ProvideadditionalearthelectrodesasnecessarytoachieveS.A.A.wiringrulesearthing
resistancerequirement.
5.2 VariableSpeed
Avariablespeeddriveshallbesizedtosuittheproposedsubmersiblepump(GrundfosSP4611
28kW).ThevariablespeedshallbeaDanfossorequivalent.
5.3 SineWaveFilter
Sinewavefilterspreventdisturbingpulsestobetransmittedtodownstreammotors.Whereitis
recommendedbythemanufacturerofthepumpmotortouseasinewavefilterwiththeVFD
thenthecontractorwillsupplythemanufacturesrecommendation.
11
5.4 ElectricalControlCubicle
Thesupplyandinstallationoftheelectricalcontrolcubicleistobeundertakenbyanexperienced
switchboardmanufacturer.
Thiselectricalcontrolcubicleisrequiredtohousetheequipmentrequiredfor;
WesternPowermetering.
Ironfiltercircuitbreakersandisolators.
Borepumpcontrols.
Irrigationsequencingcontroller.
Alockable,waterproof,concretepadmountedelectricalcontrolcubicleshallbesuppliedand
installedtomeetCityofWannerooIrrigationSpecificationsNovember2015withinfive(5)
metresoftheboreheadtohousealloftheelectricalcontrolsrequiredfortheoperationofthe
irrigationcontrollerandlockoutrelay.Thepowerdomefromwerepoweristocomeforthe
boreandironfilterisapproximatelyonehundredmetres(120m)fromtheexistingbore.
Thecubicleshallbeconstructedofamarinegradealuminiumalloyandshallbeof'deadfront'
constructionwithallmetersetcbeingpanelmounted,andthecubicleshallbeventilatedin
accordancewiththerecommendationsofthemanufactureroftheequipmentwhichistobe
installedinthecubicle.
5.5 SubmersibleCables
AllsubmergedcablesfortheaeratorandsubmersiblepumpsmustbeHYDROFIRM(orapproved
equivalent).Fulldetailsofanyalternativesofferedmustaccompanythetenderand
authorisationmustbeobtainedbeforetheinstallationofanyalternative.
5.6 Testing
Testingofthecompletedboreandpumpsystemshallbeconductedinthepresenceofthe
irrigationconsultant.
TheContractorshallberequiredtoprovideallnecessaryequipmentrequiredtoverifythe
drawdownandflowrateatadesignpressureoftheboresystemandtodisposeofthetestwater
discharged.
12
6 IRRIGATIONSYSTEM
6.1 SupplyandInstallIrrigation
Thecontractorshallallowforthesupply,installingandtestingoftheirrigationpipeworkto
irrigatethelandscapedareasasshownintheaccompanyingdrawings.
6.2 SiteAvailability
ThesitewillbemadeavailabletotheIrrigationContractor.Itisthecontractorresponsibilityto
ensurethesiteisreturnedtotheprincipalinthesameconditioninwhichissuppliedandthe
levelsarereinstated.Thecontractorshallberesponsibleforadequatelycompactingthetrench
areatoavoidsubsidenceofthetrench.Anyrefillingoftrenchesduetosubsidenceshallbe
repairedbythecontractororrepairedbytheprincipalandpaidforbythecontractoratratesto
beagreed.
6.3 Setout
ThesetoutoftheirrigationsystemshallbeinaccordancewithapprovedirrigationCADplans.
Duetoafactorofscale,drawingcopydeviationsandgroundgradientvariations,thelocationof
emittersandpipeworkmayvaryslightlyfromscalemeasurementsoftheplan.
6.4 Sleeves
SleevesshallbeinstalledinthelocationsbytheCivilContractoraspertheIrrigationPlan.
Allsleevesaretobeclass9PVCpipe.
Allsleevesaretoextendtostartandfinishundernonhardsurfaces(pathsetc).
Allsleevesaretobecappedtostopingressofsoil.
Allsleevesaretobeinstalled600mmunderthefinishedroadsurface.
AllsleevesaretobemarkedandthelocationsmadeknowntoIrrigationContractoron
site.
Note:Ifthesesleevesarenotinstalledatthisdepthspecifiedtheymaybedeemedunusable.
6.5 PipeworkCover
MinimumCoverofPipe
PipeType Landscape Roads
Mainline 450mm 600mm
Laterals 350mm 600mm
13
6.6 MainlinePipework
Allmainlinepipeworkinstalledonthedownstreamsideoftheirrigationwatersupplypointisto
beaminimumofclass12mPVCpipe,andutilisetheRubberRingmethodofjoining(RRJ).
AllmainlineuPVCpipingshallbemanufacturedtoAustralianstandardAS14772006.
Themainlineshallbebedded,overlaidandbackfillinginaccordancewiththisspecification.
WheremainlineisinstalledundersealedroadsordrivewaystheyshallbeinstalledwithinPVC
sleevesbeingaminimumoftwo(2)sizeslargerthanthenominalsizeofthemainline.The
mainlinepipeworkinstalledthroughthesleevesshallutilisetheSolventWeldmethodofjoining
(SWJ).
AllRubberRingJoints(RRJ)aretobeinstalledinaccordancewithmanufactures
recommendations,including:
Chamferingofthespigot.
Useofrecommendedringlubricant.
Pipewitnessmarktoremainvisible.
Caretopreventoverinsertionofpreviouspipejointsbysuccessivejointcompletion.
AllRRJfittingsshallbethrustinaccordancewiththespecification.
6.7 CastIronFittings
Mainlinefittings80mmdiameterorlargershallbeasfollows:
6.7.1 Bends
Allbendsshallberubberringjoint,ductileiron.
6.7.2 Tees
80mmorlargerrubberringjoint,ductileironcementlinedandbitumencoated.
6.7.3 Tappingbands
Singlebranchtappingbandsshallbescrewedbronzeforpipesizesof80mmorlarger.
6.7.4 Reducers
Rubberringjointedductileiron.
6.7.5 Flangedconnectors
AllflangedconnectorsshallbeRRJcastiron,drilledTableE.
14
6.8 ThrustBlocks
ThrustblocksaretobeinstalledonallRRJmainlinefittings,includingelbows,bends,reducers,
teesandisolationvalves80mmandabove,butexcludingselfstrainingtakeoffssuchastapping
bandsforairvalvesandteestosolventweldedbranchesforsubmains.
Thrustblockssizeshallbeinaccordancewiththepipemanufacturer'sinstallationinstructions.
Theconcreteshouldbeplacedaroundthefittinginawedgeshapewithitswidestpartagainst
thesolidtrenchwallandsothatthepipejointwillbeaccessibleforinspectionandrepair.Some
formworkmaybenecessarytoachieveanadequatebearingareaandtheconcretemixshould
beallowedtocurebeforepressurisation.
Concreteshallbethoroughlymixedonthesurfacepriortoinstallation.Dryconcretemixand
watershallnotbemixedinthetrench.
TheIrrigationSubContractorshallallowinhistenderpricetoprovideallmaterialsandconcrete
forthethrustblocks.
6.9 LateralPipework
Alllateralpipeworkinstalledonthedownstreamsideofthesolenoidcontrolvalvesistobea
minimumofclass9PVCpipe,andutilisetheSolventWeldmethodofjoining(SWJ).
AlllateraluPVCpipingshallbemanufacturedtoAustralianstandardAS14772006.
Trenchingforlaterallineswillbeperformedbyeitherhanddigging,achaindiggertypemachine
orbyabackhoewithamaximumbucketwidthof300mm,tominimisedisturbancetothe
surroundingarea.Thesetrencheswillbestraightwiththebedlevelandgraded.
6.10 PVCPipeFittings
AllPVCfittingssuppliedandinstalledbytheirrigationsubcontractoraretobemanufacturedto
AS14771999shallbecompatiblewithPVCpipeproducedinaccordancewiththestandardshall
bemanufacturedtoclass18.
Fittingssuppliedandinstalledinundergroundpipeworkshallbeinaccordancewiththe
following:
Mainlineandsubmainupto50mmdiametershallbestandardClass18mouldedprefittings,
solventcementjointed.
6.10.1 CrossStackingofFittings
Crossstackingoffittingswillnotbeaccepted
6.10.2 PipebetweenFittings
Aminimumlengthof300mmofpipeshallbeinstalledbetweenfittings.
6.10.3 BendingofPipe
Bendingofpipeswillnotbeaccepted.
6.11 SolventCement
SolventcementsuppliedforweldingofPVCpipeworkshallbeinaccordancewiththe
manufacturersrecommendationsfortheclimaticconditionsthatprevailduringtheinstallation
ofthesystem.
15
6.12 PrimingFluid
PrimingorcleaningfluidssuppliedforcleaningofPVCpipeworkshallbeusedasrecommended
bythepipemanufacturers.
6.13 PlasticThreadedFittings
Allplasticthreaded(BSP)pipefittingsaretobeutilisedforconnectionofthemainlinetapping
bandstothesolenoidvalvesshallbemanufacturedfromglassfibrereinforcednylonor
polypropylenematerial.Theyshallberatedatamaximumworkingpressureof1600kPa(PN16)
astestedbythemanufacturerinaccordancewithAS1460
6.14 TappingBands
TappingBandsshallbeusedfortheconnectionofvalveassembly,totheirrigationmainlines.
TheyshallbemanufacturedofDezincificationResistantGunmetal(bronze)material,witha
minimumpressureratingof2000Kpa,havingatappingsizeof50mmBSP.
TheIrrigationContractorshalltakecareintheinstallationoftappingbandsandensurethatall
holesareaccomplishedutilizingasharpandappropriatelysizedholesaw.
6.15 Embedment&Backfilling
Thebedding,overlayandbackfillingofallpipeworktrenchesshallbeaccomplishedwithmaterial
previouslyexcavatedfromthesitetrenchesprovidingitisinaccordancewithAS2032and
shouldbeofthefollowing:
1. Sandorsoil,freefromrocksgreaterthan10mm,andanyhardclaylumpsgreater
than75mminsize.
2. Crushedrock,gravel,orgradedmaterialsofevengradingwithamaximumsizeof
15mm.
3. Excavatedmaterialfreefromrocksorvegetablematter.
4. Claylumpswhichcanbereducedtolessthan75mminsize.
Wheretrenchworkencountersunsuitablebeddingmateriala100mmbedofsandwhichisnot
availableonthesiteshallbeplacedbelowpipeinthetrenchpriortopipelying.Thispolicywill
applytooverlayingandbackfillingofalltrenches,wherethepipewillbecoveredwitha
minimumof100mmofsandtopreventsimilardebriscomingincontactwiththepipeorcontrol
cables.Undernocircumstanceswillconstructiondebrisofanykindbeincludedinanybackfill
material.Allowancesshouldbemadefornotbackfillingduringtheheatofthedaytominimise
theeffectsofthermalexpansionandcontractionofpipealreadylaid.
6.16 Compaction
Compactionshouldtakeplaceonlyaftersuitablebeddingandbackfillinghasbeencompletedto
thesatisfactionoftheprincipal.Compactioncanbeachievedbyeitherplatecompaction,wheel
rollingwithasuitablevehiclewithwheelswiderthanthetrenchorbyflooding,dependingon
theapplication.However,irrespectiveofwhichmethodisused,itwillremainthecontractors
responsibilitytoensurethatreinstatementoftrenches,duetosubsidence,isnotrequired
throughoutthedefectsliabilityperiod.Repairofanysubsidenceduringthistimeshallbethe
contractorsresponsibility.
16
6.17 ExcessSpoil
Excesstrenchingspoilwillberemovedanddisposedtoalocationonsiteofasdirectedbythe
irrigationconsultantorhisnominatedrepresentative.
6.18 SolenoidControlValves
Electricalcontrolvalvesshallbeshallbe40mmor50mmBermad200Seriesnormallyclosed24
volts50cyclesolenoid.
Flow(pressure)adjustmentofallsolenoidvalveswillbeundertakeninaccordancewiththe
normaloperatingpressureofthesprinklerattachedtotheparticularsolenoidvalve.
6.19 Air/VacuumReleaseValve
Shallbea50mmcombinationairvacuumreleasevalvethatincorporatesinonebodyakineticair
andvacuumreleaseandconfigurationasperthedrawings.Thelocationsoftheseairvalvesshall
besuchthatanytrappedairinthemainlineisabletobereadilyexhaustedwhilstminimisingthe
riskofwaterhammerinthesystem.
6.20 IsolationValves
SolenoidValves,AirReleaseValvesandFlushingValvesshallbeisolatedfromthemainline
utilisingaPhilmacBallValve.
On80mmandgreatermainlinesize,isolationvalvesshallbeanAVKductileironresilientseated
sluicevalveswithspindlecap.ThesevalvesshallbemanufacturedtoAustralianStandard2638.
21999,besuitableforTableEflange.
Valvesshallbeconfiguredforclockwiseturningtocloseandthetopofthespindlecapshall
haveanarrowindicatingthedirectiontoturnforclosing.
17
6.21 ValveBoxes
ValveBoxesshallbeRainbirdreinforcedplasticvalveboxeswithlockablelids.Valveboxesshall
haveminimumdimensionsinaccordancewiththefollowingmodelsandinstalledtoCityof
WannerooSpecification:
2StandardRectangularSeries(VBSTD)
25mmSolenoidValves
(368mmx239mmx307mm)
2JumboRectangularSeries(VBJMB)
40mm&50mmSolenoidValves
(430mmx300mmx305mm)
MainlineFlushValves
(368mmx239mmx307mm)
SolenoidIsolationValves InsideSolenoidValveBox
MainlineAirReleaseValves 210"RoundSeries(VB10RND)
FlowClick
(368mmx239mmx307mm)
6.22 SprinklerHeight&Adjustment
Allsprinklersshallbeinstalledasperthemanufacturersinstructions.TheIrrigationSub
Contractorshallberesponsibleforensuringallsprinklerheadsfullyretractwhennotin
operation.
TheIrrigationSubContractorisrequiredtoliaisewiththeLandscapeContractortoobtainthe
finallevelsofallturf/landscapedareaswheresprinklersaretobeinstalledandtheproposed
methodofplanting,sothatthesprinklersanddrippersmaybeinstalledatvariousheightstothe
proposedfinishedgroundlevel(GL)asperthefollowingtable
AreaType Planting SprinklerHeightrelativetoGL
TurfArea Seeded/Stolons Flush
TurfArea RollOn 1015mmAbove
18
6.23 Sprinklers
6.23.1 TurfArea
Items Requirements
SprinklerBody HunterI2004SS
NozzleType Asspecifiedontheplan
RiserType Dia.20mmx300mmPolyArticRiser
SprinklerPressure 350kPa
6.23.2 GardenArea
Items Requirements
570XF6P(150mm)(PartCircle)
SprinklerBody
570XF12P(300mm)(FullCircle)
MPRspraynozzles
NozzleType
(modelandarcasspecifiedonplan)
RiserType Dia.15mmx300mmPolyArticRiser
6.23.3 TreeBubblers
Items Requirements
SprinklerBody Toro570XF6P(150mm)
ToroFloodBubbler
NozzleType
(modelasspecifiedonplan)
OlsonEzellflexibleswingpipe(500mm
RiserType minimum)withEZelbowsor
equivalent
19
7 Sensors
7.1 FlowSync
AFlowSync(FCT400)istobeinstalledonthemainlineatthelocationnominatedontheplan
andwiresrunbacktotheHunterACCcontrollers.(Maximumdistance300metres).
TheFlowSyncistobeinterfacedwithHunterACCcontrollersfromthecommencementof
operation.
7.2 ETSensor
AHunter ET sensor with an optional Hunter ET windanemometershallbeinstalledwithin30
metresofthecontroller.Itistobeinstalledonan80mm(Diameter)x4.5metres(Height)
mediumdutygalvanisedsteelpolenexttothecontrolcubicle.Thepoleistobeconcretedinto
theground.
TheETSensoristobelocatedwhereitwillbeexposedtowind,sunandrainfall,butnotinthe
pathofsprinklerspray.
20
8 CONTROLSYSTEM
8.1 Controllers
AnewHunterACC99DcontrollerswithACCCOMLANmodulewillbeinstalledinthecubicleas
nominatedontheplans.
Allsensorsaretobewiredtothecontrollerassetupaspermanufacturersspecifications.
FutureconnectiontotheNBN(NationalBroadbandNetwork)istheresponsibilityofCityof
Wanneroo.
8.2 TwoWirePath
TwowirepathshallbeHunterID2BLUcompriseof3.3mm2solidcoreredandbluetwistedcable.
Ateachvalvecoil,theIrrigationContractorshallallowsufficientloopedcontrolcable,soastobe
abletoextendthecableconnectionpointone(1)metreabovefinished.
8.3 FlowSyncWires
A1.5mm23Cmulticorewireistoberunfromthelocationnominatedontheplansbacktothe
ACCcontrollers.Thiswireistobeinstalledinthesameconduitasthe2wirepath.
8.4 FieldDecoderUnits
Install,ateverysolenoidvalveHunterICD100decoders.Decodersshallbesolidstateelectronic
circuitryandepoxypottedinasturdyplasticcasesuitablefordirectburial.
8.5 SurgeProtection
TheIrrigationSubContractorshallsupplya13mmx1200mmgroundrodforsurgeprotection
andhousedwithinavalveboxasbelow:
Attheendofeach2wirepathcommunicationcablerun.
Atspacingnotexceeding250metresalongcommunicationruns.
Atevery8THdecoder.
Oraspermanufacturersspecifications.
8.6 Conduit
Alllowvoltagesolenoidwires/2wirepathsshallbeinstalledinDN40mediumdensityelectrical
conduitsasnominatedontheplans.
8.7 WireConnectors
AllsolenoidcablejointsshallbefittedwithacrimpandsealedwithaDBYconnectors.
Wireconnectorstosolenoidcoilsanddecodersshallonlybecarriedoutbyexperienced
tradesmen.
8.8 CablePits
P2cablepitsarerequiredevery100metersorchangeofdirection.
21
APPENDIX1EXISTINGBOREINFORMATION

22

23

24
APPENDIX2PUMPCURVE

25

07 2016 Landscape Contractor Tender Document

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

07 2016 Landscape Contractor Tender Document

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Stage25Landscape&Irrigation

SPECIFICATION AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT FOR

2 FORM OF TENDER .................................................................................................................... 25

3 TENDER SCHEDULES ............................................................................................................... 29

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

5 ANNEXURE TO AS2124-1992 PART A ..................................................................................... 77

SECTION C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................93

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

10 SITEWORKS, SETOUT AND EARTHWORKS ........................................................................... 99

11 TIMBER WORK......................................................................................................................... 107

12 METALWORK ........................................................................................................................... 109

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

13 SEGMENTAL AND STONE PEDESTRIAN PAVING (NOT USED) .......................................... 119

15 SEGMENTAL ROAD PAVING (NOT USED) ............................................................................ 125

18 INSITU CONCRETE .................................................................................................................. 133

19 CONCRETE AND BRICK MASONRY ...................................................................................... 141

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

20 STABILISED / RAMMED EARTH WALLS (NOT USED).......................................................... 155

24 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS ..................................................................................................... 165

25 SOFT LANDSCAPE WORKS ................................................................................................... 167

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

26 PROJECT CONSOLIDATION ................................................................................................... 183

SECTION D MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATION...............187

28 MAINTENANCE WORKS HARD LANDSCAPE .................................................................... 199

29 MAINTENANCE WORKS SOFT LANDSCAPE ..................................................................... 205

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

30 MAINTENANCE WORKS TURF AND GRASS AREAS ........................................................ 207

31 ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE WORKS................................................................................... 211

SECTION E APPENDICES .................213

33 SETTING OUT ........................................................................................................................ 222

35 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................................... 225

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

37 AS CONSTRUCTED SURVEY OF EARTHWORKS ................................................................ 230

38 IRRIGATION SPECIFICATION ................................................................................................. 231

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

It is surrounded by the established

Ultimately, the Catalina Estate will

1.2 TENDER DOCUMENTS

Specifications and Drawings as listed

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

CB-01-907 REV A FEATURE WALL DETAIL

B. Irrigation Drawings (Total Eden)

17367-01 REV A KEY PLAN

C. Electrical and Lighting Drawings (ETC)

D. Other Drawings (Sub-consultant)

1.3 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH TENDER

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

1.8 LODGEMENT OF TENDERS

The Chief Executive Officer

The Tender shall be lodged in the Tender Box, located at:

Tamala Park Regional Council

1.9 EVALUATION PROCESS

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

In assessing the Tenders the following Matrix Weighting will be utilised:

Demonstrated Track Record and Experience 30%

Demonstrated Track Record and Experience (30%)

Availability of Resources, Capacity & Sub Contractors Nominated (10%)

Organisational and Quality Management (5%).

emerge associates CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

Safety and Environmental Management (5%)

Tender Price (50%)